2011 Malibu

Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (1,1)
2011 Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1

Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1 Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Additional Storage Features . . . 4-3 Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-16
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Performance and Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-24
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-29
Keys, Doors and Windows . . . 2-1 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-30 Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-47
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25 Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2011 Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual M
Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1

General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2
Recommended Fluids,
Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . . 11-6
Maintenance Records . . . . . . . . 11-8
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1
Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-16
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Introduction iii
This manual describes features that Canadian Vehicle Owners

may or may not be on your specific
vehicle either because they are Propriétaires Canadiens
options that you did not purchase or A French language copy of this
due to changes subsequent to the manual can be obtained from your
printing of this owner manual. dealer or from:
Please refer to the purchase
The names, logos, emblems, documentation relating to your On peut obtenir un exemplaire de
slogans, vehicle model names, and specific vehicle to confirm each of ce guide en français auprès du
vehicle body designs appearing in the features found on your vehicle. concessionnaire ou à l'adresse
this manual including, but not limited For vehicles first sold in Canada, suivante:
to, GM, the GM logo, CHEVROLET, substitute the name “General
the CHEVROLET Emblem, Helm, Incorporated
Motors of Canada Limited” for P.O. Box 07130
MALIBU, and the MALIBU Emblem Chevrolet Motor Division wherever it
are trademarks and/or service Detroit, MI 48207
appears in this manual.
marks of General Motors LLC, its 1-800-551-4123
subsidiaries, affiliates, or licensors. Keep this manual in the vehicle for Numéro de poste 6438 de langue
quick reference. française
www.helminc.com
Litho in U.S.A.
©
Part No. 20786885 B Second Printing I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: 2010 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.

iv Introduction
Using this Manual Symbols

{ WARNING
To quickly locate information about The vehicle has components and
the vehicle, use the Index in the These mean there is something labels that use symbols instead of
back of the manual. It is an that could hurt you or other text. Symbols are shown along with
alphabetical list of what is in the people. the text describing the operation or
manual and the page number where information relating to a specific
it can be found. component, control, message,
Notice: This means there is
gauge, or indicator.
something that could result in
Danger, Warnings, and property or vehicle damage. This M : This symbol is shown when
Cautions would not be covered by the you need to see your owner manual
vehicle's warranty. for additional instructions or
Warning messages found on vehicle
information.
labels and in this manual describe
hazards and what to do to avoid or * : This symbol is shown when
reduce them. you need to see a service manual
for additional instructions or
Danger indicates a hazard with a
information.
high level of risk which will result in
serious injury or death.
Warning or Caution indicates a A circle with a slash through it is a
hazard that could result in injury or safety symbol which means “Do
death. Not,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not let
this happen.”
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Introduction v
Vehicle Symbol Chart # : Fog Lamps

Here are some additional symbols . : Fuel Gauge
that may be found on the vehicle
and what they mean. For more + : Fuses
information on the symbol, refer to 3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam
the Index. Changer
9 : Airbag Readiness Light j : LATCH System Child
# : Air Conditioning Restraints
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS) * : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
% : Audio® Steering Wheel Controls : : Oil Pressure
or OnStar } : Power
$ : Brake System Warning Light / : Remote Vehicle Start
" : Charging System > : Safety Belt Reminders
I : Cruise Control 7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
B : Engine Coolant Temperature d : Traction Control
O : Exterior Lamps M : Windshield Washer Fluid
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

vi Introduction
2 NOTES
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

In Brief 1-1
In Brief Sensing System for Passenger

Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Driver Information
Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Steering Wheel Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Instrument Panel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Performance and Maintenance
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Traction Control
Initial Drive Information System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-12
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Electronic Stability
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-20
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Vehicle Features Tire Sealant and
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-21
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Portable Audio Devices Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 1-21
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 (Auxiliary Input or Driving for Better Fuel
Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 USB Port) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Roadside Assistance
Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 1-9 Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-18 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

1-2 In Brief
Instrument Panel
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

In Brief 1-3
A. Air Vents on page 8‑9. J. Cruise Control on page 9‑32. Q. Hazard Warning Flashers on
B. Turn and Lane‐Change Lever. Driver Information Center (DIC) page 6‑4.
See Turn and Lane-Change Buttons. See Driver Information R. Shift Lever. See Automatic
Signals on page 6‑4. Center (DIC) on page 5‑22. Transmission on page 9‑24.
C. Instrument Cluster on page 5‑9. K. Data Link Connector (DLC) (Out S. Front Storage on page 4‑2.
D. Windshield Wiper/Washer on of View). See Malfunction Power Outlets on page 5‑7.
page 5‑3. Indicator Lamp on page 5‑15.
T. Passenger Sensing System on
E. Instrument Panel Storage on L. Steering Wheel Adjustment on page 3‑32.
page 4‑1. page 5‑2.
U. Traction Control System (TCS)
F. Infotainment on page 7‑1. M. Horn on page 5‑3. on page 9‑29.
G. Instrument Panel Illumination N. Steering Wheel Controls on V. Glove Box on page 4‑1.
Control on page 6‑5. page 5‑2 (If Equipped).
H. Driver Compartment Storage. O. Ignition Positions on page 9‑16.

See Front Storage on page 4‑2. P. Climate Control Systems on
I. Hood Release. See Hood on page 8‑1 (If Equipped).
page 10‑5. Automatic Climate Control
System on page 8‑5 (If
Equipped) .
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

1-4 In Brief
Initial Drive Press L and hold for more than

two seconds to sound the panic
Information alarm.
This section provides a brief
Press L again to cancel the panic
overview about some of the
important features that may or may alarm.
not be on your specific vehicle. See Keys on page 2‑2 and Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
For more detailed information, refer
to each of the features which can be Operation on page 2‑3.
found later in this owner manual.
Remote Vehicle Start
Remote Keyless Entry With this feature the engine can be
Press K to unlock the driver door. started from outside of the vehicle.
(RKE) System Press again within five seconds to
The RKE transmitter is used to unlock all remaining doors. Starting the Vehicle
remotely lock and unlock the doors 1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the
from up to 60 m (195 ft) away from Press Q to lock all doors.
vehicle.
the vehicle. Lock and unlock feedback can be
personalized. See Vehicle 2. Press Q.
Personalization on page 5‑30 for 3. Immediately after completing
additional information.
Step 2, press and hold / until
Press and hold V for the turn signal lamps flash.
approximately one second to open
the trunk.
Press L and release to locate the
vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

In Brief 1-5
When the vehicle starts, the parking Door Locks See Trunk on page 2‑9.
lamps will turn on and remain on as
long as the engine is running. The Manual Locks Windows
doors will be locked and the climate From inside the vehicle slide the
control system may come on. door lock knob to unlock or lock
The engine will continue to run for a door.
10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a
10-minute time extension. Remote Power Door Locks
start can be extended only once. On vehicles with power door locks,
the switches are on the front doors.
Canceling a Remote Start
To cancel a remote start:
": Press to unlock the doors.
. Aim the RKE transmitter at the
Q: Press to lock the doors.
vehicle and press and hold / For more information, see:

until the parking lamps turn off. . Door Locks on page 2‑7.
. Turn on the hazard warning . Power Door Locks on page 2‑7. On vehicles with power windows,
flashers. the switches are on the driver door
. Turn the ignition on and then Trunk Release armrest. Each passenger door has a
back off. In addition to the trunk release switch that controls only that
button on the RKE transmitter, there window.
See Remote Vehicle Start on
page 2‑5. is a remote release V button Press the front of the switch to open
located on the driver door near the the window. Pull the switch up to
map pocket. close it.
The trunk can only be opened when See Power Windows on page 2‑16.
the vehicle is in P (Park), or when
the ignitionInis
for
maoff.
ti
onProvi
dedby:

1-6 In Brief
Seat Adjustment Height Adjustment Seatback Adjustment
Manual Seats
Seat Position
If available, press and hold the top To recline the seatback:

or bottom of the switch to raise or 1. Lift the lever.
lower the seat. Release the switch
when the desired height is reached. 2. Move the seatback to the
To adjust the seat position: desired position, and then
See Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3. release the lever to lock the
1. Lift the bar under the front of the
seat cushion to unlock the seat. seatback in place.
2. Slide the seat to the desired 3. Push and pull on the seatback to
position and release the bar. make sure it is locked.
3. Try to move the seat back and
forth to make sure it is locked in
place.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

In Brief 1-7
To return the seatback to the upright Power Seats See Power Seat Adjustment on
position: page 3‑4.
Seat Position
1. Lift the lever fully without Seatback Adjustment
applying pressure to the
seatback, and the seatback will
return to the upright position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
See “Manual Reclining Seatbacks”
under Reclining Seatbacks on
page 3‑5.
To adjust a power seat, if available:

To adjust a power seatback,
. Move the seat forward or
if equipped:
rearward by sliding the control
forward or rearward. . Tilt the top of the control
rearward to recline.
. Raise or lower the front or rear
. Tilt the top of the control forward
part of the seat cushion by
moving the front or rear of the to raise.
horizontal control up or down. See “Power Reclining Seatbacks”
. Raise or lower the entire seat by under Reclining Seatbacks on
moving the entire control up page 3‑5.
or down.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

1-8 In Brief
Lumbar Adjustment Second Row Seats Push and pull on the seatback to be
sure it is locked in position. Make
With this feature, either side of the sure that the safety belts are
seatback can be folded down for properly stowed over the seatback
more cargo space. Before folding a in all three positions.
seatback, make sure the front seat
is not reclined. If it is, the rear See Rear Seats on page 3‑8 for
seatback will not fold down all more information.
the way.
Heated Seats
A. Increase Lumbar Support

Control
B. Decrease Lumbar Support
Control
If available, press the front (A) or
rear (B) of the control to increase or
decrease lumbar support. Release
the control when the desired level of To lower the rear seatback, pull up
support is reached. on the seatback strap while folding If available, press the top of the
See Lumbar Adjustment on the seatback down. This allows switch to turn the heat feature on to
access to the trunk. To raise the the high heat setting. The indicator
page 3‑4.
rear seatback pull the seatback up light “2” will be lit.
and make sure it latches.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

In Brief 1-9
Press the top of the switch again to Safety Belts Sensing System for
go to the low heat setting. The
indicator light “1” will be lit.
Passenger Airbag
Press the bottom of the switch to The passenger sensing system will
turn the feature off. turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag under certain
The heated seats are canceled conditions. The driver airbags are
when the ignition is turned off. not affected by this.
For more information, see Heated The passenger airbag status
Front Seats on page 3‑7. indicator will be visible on the
instrument panel when the vehicle is
Head Restraint started.
Adjustment
Do not drive until the head restraints
for all occupants are installed and Refer to the following sections for
adjusted properly. important information on how to use
safety belts properly.
To achieve a comfortable seating
position, change the seatback
. Safety Belts on page 3‑9.
recline angle as little as necessary . How to Wear Safety Belts
while keeping the seat and the head Properly on page 3‑13.
restraint height in the proper . Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑18.
position.
. Lower Anchors and Tethers for
For more information see Head
Children (LATCH System) on
Restraints on page 3‑2 and Seat
page 3‑48.
Adjustment on page 3‑3.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

1-10 In Brief
Mirror Adjustment 2. Press one of the four arrows

located on the control pad to
Exterior Mirrors move the mirror to the desired
direction.
Keep the selector switch in the
center position when not adjusting
United States either outside mirror.
See Power Mirrors on page 2‑14.
Interior Mirror
Vehicles with an automatic dimming
rearview mirror will automatically
reduce the glare from the
Canada and Mexico headlamps of the vehicle behind.
The dimming feature comes on and
See Passenger Sensing System on the indicator light illuminates each
page 3‑32 for important information. Controls for the outside power time the ignition is turned to start.
mirrors are located on the
driver door. See Manual Rearview Mirror on
page 2‑14.
1. Move the selector switch located
below the four-way control pad
to the left or right to choose
either the driver side or
passenger side mirror.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

In Brief 1-11
Steering Wheel 3. Pull or push the steering wheel Reading Lamps

closer or away from you.
Adjustment The front reading lamps are located
4. Pull the lever up to lock the in the front overhead console. The
steering wheel in place. rear reading lamps are near the
Do not adjust the steering wheel dome lamp overhead near the rear
while driving. passenger seats.
For vehicles with front and/or rear
Interior Lighting reading lamps, press the lens to
turn the lamp on and off, while the
Dome Lamps doors are closed. These lamps
The dome lamps come on when any come on automatically when any
door is opened. They turn off after door is opened.
all the doors are closed. For more information on interior
To turn the dome lamps on lighting, see:
manually, turn the instrument panel . Instrument Panel Illumination
The lever is located on the left side brightness knob, located on the Control on page 6‑5.
of the steering wheel column. instrument panel to the left of the
steering column, clockwise to the
. Entry/Exit Lighting on page 6‑5.
To adjust the steering wheel:
farthest position. The dome lamps . Parade Dimming on page 6‑6.
1. Pull the lever down. will remain on whether a door is
2. Move the steering wheel up opened or closed.
or down.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

1-12 In Brief
Exterior Lighting For more information, see: 9: Turns the wipers off.
. Exterior Lamp Controls on &: For intermittent or speed
page 6‑1. sensitive operation. While in this
. Delayed Headlamps on position, turn the x band up or
page 6‑3. down to vary frequency.
. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) The amount of delay time varies
on page 6‑2. between wiping cycles due to the
delay setting selected or the speed
. Automatic Headlamp System on of the vehicle. As vehicle speed is
P: Briefly turn to this position to page 6‑3. increased or decreased, the wiper
manually turn the automatic lamp . Fog Lamps on page 6‑4. interval also increases or
control off or on.
decreases.
In Canada, this position only works Windshield Wiper/Washer 6 : Slow wipes.
when a vehicle is in the P (Park)
position. When the vehicle is put 1 : Fast wipes.
into D (Drive) the lights come on. 8: Use for a single wiping cycle.
AUTO: Automatically turns on the Windshield Washer: Press the
Daytime Running Lamps during button at the end of the lever until
daytime, and the headlamps, the washers begin.
parking lamps, and taillamps at
night. See Windshield Wiper/Washer on
The windshield wiper lever is page 5‑3.
;: Manual operation of the parking located on the right side of the
lamps and taillamps. steering column.
2: Manual operation of the
headlamps, parking lamps, and
taillamps.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

In Brief 1-13
Climate Controls
A. Fan Control E. Air Delivery Mode Control

B. Air Recirculation F. Air Conditioning
C. Temperature Control G. Rear Window Defogger
D. Outside Air See Climate Control Systems on
page 8‑1 (If Equipped).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

1-14 In Brief
Automatic Climate Control System (If Equipped)
A. Fan Control F. Air Delivery Mode Control

B. Air Conditioning G. Display
C. Air Recirculation H. Temperature Control
D. Outside Air See Automatic Climate Control
E. Rear Window Defogger System on page 8‑5 (If Equipped).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

In Brief 1-15
Transmission Vehicle Features

Driver Shift Control (DSC) Radio(s)
This position allows you to change
gears similar to a manual
transmission. To use this feature:
1. Move the shift lever from
D (Drive) rearward to
M (Manual).
Radio with CD (MP3) and USB Port shown
2. Press the + (plus) end of the O : Press to turn the system on BAND: Press to choose between
button on the side of the shifter and off. Turn to increase or FM, AM, or XM™, if equipped.
to upshift, or push the − (minus) decrease the volume.
end of the button to downshift. f: Select radio stations.
See Manual Mode on page 9‑25. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

1-16 In Brief
© ¨ : Seek or scan stations. Storing a Favorite Station Setting the Clock

4 : For vehicles with XM, MP3, Depending on which radio the To set the time and date for the
WMA, or RDS features, press to vehicle has, radio stations are Radio with CD (MP3) and USB port
display additional text information stored as either favorites or presets. or Radio with a Single CD (MP3)
related to the current FM-RDS or For radios with a FAV button, a player:
XM station; or CD, MP3, WMA maximum of 36 stations can be 1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/
song. Song title information will be stored as favorites using the six ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.
displayed on the top line of the softkeys located below the radio
display while the artist information station frequency tabs and by using 2. Press O to turn the radio on.
will be displayed on the bottom line, the radio FAV button. Press FAV to
if the information is available during 3. Press H and the HR, MIN, MM,
go through up to six pages of
XM, CD, MP3, or WMA playback. DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month,
favorites, each having six favorite
When information is not available, day, and year) displays.
stations available per page. Each
"No Info" displays. page of favorites can contain any 4. Press the softkey located below
For more information about these combination of AM, FM, or XM™ any one of the tabs that you
and other radio features, see stations. want to change.
Infotainment on page 7‑1 and For radios without a FAV button, up 5. Increase or decrease the time or
Operation on page 7‑3. to 18 stations (6 FM1, 6 FM2, and date by turning f clockwise or
6 AM), can be programmed on the counterclockwise.
6 numbered buttons.
For detailed instructions on setting
See Operation on page 7‑3. the clock for your specific audio
system, see Clock on page 5‑5.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

In Brief 1-17
Satellite Radio Portable Audio Devices Bluetooth®

XM is a satellite radio service based (Auxiliary Input or For vehicles with a Bluetooth
in the 48 contiguous United States USB Port) system, it allows users with a
and 10 Canadian provinces. Bluetooth‐enabled cell phone to
XM satellite radio has a wide This vehicle may have an 3.5 mm make and receive hands-free calls
variety of programming and (1/8 in) auxiliary input jack and a using the vehicle’s audio system
commercial-free music, coast to USB port, located on the audio and controls.
coast, and in digital-quality sound. faceplate. Some portable audio
devices such as iPods®, MP3 The Bluetooth‐enabled cell phone
A fee is required to receive the players, and USB storage devices must be paired with the Bluetooth
XM service. can be connected to the vehicle system before it can be used in the
For more information, refer to: using a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable or a vehicle. Not all phones will support
USB cable. all functions. For more information,
. www.xmradio.com or call visit www.gm.com/bluetooth.
1-800-929-2100 (U.S.) For more information, see Auxiliary
Devices on page 7‑20. For more information, see Bluetooth
. www.xmradio.ca or call on page 7‑25.
1-877-438-9677 (Canada)
See Satellite Radio on page 7‑10.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

1-18 In Brief
Steering Wheel Controls bg: Press to silence the vehicle J: Press to turn the cruise control
speakers only. Press again to turn system on and off.
the sound on. Press and hold longer RES+: Press briefly to make the
than two seconds to interact with vehicle resume a previously set
the OnStar® or Bluetooth systems. speed or press and hold to
x c : Press to reject an accelerate.
incoming call, or to end a call. SET−: Press to set the speed and
For more information, see Steering activate cruise control or make the
Wheel Controls on page 5‑2. vehicle decelerate.
For more information, see Cruise
Cruise Control Control on page 9‑32.
If equipped, some audio controls

can be adjusted using the controls
on the right side of the steering
wheel.
e+/e: Increases or decreases
volume.
w/xc: Press to change radio
stations, select tracks on a CD, or to
select tracks and navigate folders
on an iPod® or USB device.
The cruise control buttons are
located on the left side of the
steering wheel.
Inf
ormat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

In Brief 1-19
Driver Information r: Press to reset some vehicle Power Outlets

Center (DIC) information displays, select a
Accessory power outlets can be
personalization setting,
The DIC display is located at the used to plug in electrical equipment,
or acknowledge a warning
bottom of the instrument panel such as a cell phone or MP3 player.
message.
cluster. It shows the status of many There are two accessory power
vehicle systems and enables For more information, see Driver
outlets. One accessory power outlet
access to the personalization menu. Information Center (DIC) on
is located inside the storage bin
page 5‑22.
below the climate controls and the
Vehicle Personalization other outlet is on the rear of the
center storage console.
Some vehicle features can be
programmed by using the DIC Remove the cover to access and
buttons on the left side of the replace when not in use.
steering wheel. These features See Power Outlets on page 5‑7.
include:
. Oil Life Reset
. Units
. RKE Lock and Unlock Feedback
. Door Lock and Unlock Settings
The DIC buttons are located on the . Language
left side of the steering wheel.
See Vehicle Personalization on
INFO: Press to scroll through the
page 5‑30.
vehicle information displays.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

1-20 In Brief
Performance and Electronic Stability Tire Pressure Monitor

Maintenance Control (ESC) This vehicle may have a Tire
The Electronic Stability Control Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
Traction Control system assists with directional
control of the vehicle in difficult
System (TCS) driving conditions. The system turns
The traction control system limits on automatically every time the
wheel spin. The system turns on vehicle is started.
automatically every time the vehicle . To turn off both traction control
is started.
and Electronic Stability Control,
. To turn off traction control, press The TPMS warning light alerts you
press and hold t until F to a significant loss in pressure of
and release t on the illuminates and the appropriate one of the vehicle's tires. If the
instrument panel. F illuminates DIC message is displayed. See warning light comes on, stop as
and the appropriate DIC Ride Control System Messages soon as possible and inflate the
message is displayed. See Ride on page 5‑27. tires to the recommended pressure
Control System Messages on . Press and release the button shown on the Tire and Loading
page 5‑27. again to turn on both systems. Information label. See Vehicle Load
. Press and release the button Limits on page 9‑12. The warning
For more information, see Electronic
again to turn on traction control. light will remain on until the tire
Stability Control (ESC) on
pressure is corrected.
For more information, see Traction page 9‑31.
Control System (TCS) on During cooler conditions, the low tire
page 9‑29. pressure warning light may appear
when the vehicle is first started and
then turn off. This may be an early
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

In Brief 1-21
indicator that the tire pressures are Engine Oil Life System Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)
getting low and the tires need to be
inflated to the proper pressure. The engine oil life system calculates Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badge
engine oil life based on vehicle use and a yellow fuel cap can use either
The TPMS does not replace normal and displays the “Change Oil Soon” unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel
monthly tire maintenance. It is the DIC message when it is necessary containing up to 85% ethanol (E85).
driver’s responsibility to maintain to change the engine oil and filter. See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on
correct tire pressures. The oil life system should be reset page 9‑37. For all other vehicles,
See Tire Pressure Monitor System to 100% only following an oil use only the unleaded gasoline
on page 10‑53. change. described under Recommended
Fuel on page 9‑35.
Resetting the Oil Life System
Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit 1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, Driving for Better Fuel
with the engine off.
Economy
This vehicle may come with a jack 2. Press and hold the DIC INFO
and spare tire or a tire sealant and and reset buttons, on the left Driving habits can affect fuel
compressor kit. The kit can be used side of the steering wheel, mileage. Here are some driving tips
to temporarily seal small punctures at the same time to enter the to get the best fuel economy
in the tread area of the tire. personalization menu. The “Oil possible.
See Tire Sealant and Compressor Life Reset” message displays. . Avoid fast starts and accelerate
Kit on page 10‑67 for complete 3. Press and hold the reset button smoothly.
operating information. until the DIC display shows . Brake gradually and avoid
If the vehicle came with a jack and “Acknowledged.” abrupt stops.
spare tire, see If a Tire Goes Flat on 4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF. . Avoid idling the engine for long
page 10‑65. periods of time.
See Engine Oil Life System on
page 10‑13.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

1-22 In Brief
. When road and weather
conditions are appropriate, use
Roadside Assistance Roadside Assistance and OnStar
(U.S. and Canada)
cruise control. Program
If you have an active OnStar
. Always follow posted speed U.S.: 1-800-243-8872
subscription, press the Q button
limits or drive more slowly when TTY Users (U.S.): 1-888-889-2438 and the current GPS location will be
conditions require.
Canada: 1-800-268-6800 sent to an OnStar advisor who will
. Keep vehicle tires properly assess your problem, contact
inflated. Mexico: 01-800-466-0800 Roadside Assistance, and relay
. Combine several trips into a As the owner of a new Chevrolet, your exact location to get the help
single trip. you are automatically enrolled in the you need.
Roadside Assistance program.
. Replace the vehicle's tires with Online Owner Center (U.S. and
the same TPC Spec number See Roadside Assistance Program Canada)
molded into the tire's sidewall (U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑8 or
The Online Owner Center is a
near the size. Roadside Assistance Program
complimentary service that includes
(Mexico) on page 13‑10 for more
. Follow recommended scheduled online service reminders, vehicle
information.
maintenance. maintenance tips, online owner
manual, special privileges,
and more.
Sign up today at:
www.chevyownercenter.com
(U.S.) or www.gm.ca (Canada).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

In Brief 1-23
OnStar® ]: Push this red emergency For a full description of OnStar

button to get priority help from services and system limitations, see
specially trained OnStar Emergency the OnStar Owner's Guide in the
Advisors. glove box.
X : Push this button for hands‐free, OnStar service is subject to the
voice‐activated calling and to give OnStar Terms and Conditions
voice commands for Hands‐Free included in the OnStar Glove
Calling and Turn‐by‐Turn Box Kit.
For vehicles with an active OnStar Navigation. OnStar service requires wireless
subscription, OnStar uses several Automatic Crash Response, communication networks and the
innovative technologies and live Emergency Services, Crisis Assist, Global Positioning System (GPS)
Advisors to provide a wide range of Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle satellite network. Not all OnStar
safety, security, navigation, Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock, services are available everywhere
diagnostics, and calling services. Roadside Assistance, Turn‐by‐Turn or on all vehicles at all times.
Automatic Crash Response Navigation, and Hands‐Free Calling OnStar service can’t work unless
are available on most vehicles. Not the vehicle is in a place where
In a crash, built‐in sensors can all OnStar services are available on OnStar has an agreement with a
automatically alert an OnStar all vehicles. For more information, wireless service provider for service
Advisor who is immediately see the OnStar Owner's Guide; in that area, and the wireless
connected to the vehicle to see if visit www.onstar.com (U.S.) or service provider has coverage,
you need help. www.onstar.ca (Canada); contact network capacity, reception, and
OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR technology compatible with OnStar
How OnStar Service Works (1‐888‐466‐7827) or TTY service. Service involving location
Q : Push this blue button to 1‐877‐248‐2080; or push the information about the vehicle can’t
connect to a specially trained Q button to speak with an OnStar work unless GPS signals are
OnStar Advisor to verify your Advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days available, unobstructed, and
account information and to answer a week. compatible with the OnStar
questions. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

1-24 In Brief
hardware. The vehicle has to have a See Radio Frequency Statement on Your Responsibility
working electrical system and page 13‑19 for information
Increase the volume of the radio if
adequate battery power for the regarding Part 15 of the Federal
the OnStar Advisor cannot be
OnStar equipment to operate. Communications Commission (FCC)
heard.
OnStar service may not work if the rules and Industry Canada
OnStar equipment isn’t properly Standards RSS-210/220/310. If the light next to the OnStar
installed or you haven’t maintained buttons is red, the system may not
it and the vehicle is in good working OnStar Steering Wheel be functioning properly. Push the
order and in compliance with all Controls Q button and request a vehicle
government regulations. If you try to This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute diagnostic check. If the light
add, connect, or modify any button that can be used to interact appears clear (no light appears),
equipment or software in the with OnStar Hands-Free calling. your OnStar subscription has
vehicle, OnStar service may not See Steering Wheel Controls on expired and all services have been
work. Other problems OnStar can’t page 5‑2 for more information. deactivated. Push the Q button to
control may prevent service to you, confirm that the OnStar equipment
such as hills, tall buildings, tunnels, On some vehicles, the Talk button
can be used to dial numbers into is active.
weather, electrical system design
and architecture of the vehicle, voice mail systems, or to dial phone
damage to important parts of the extensions. See the OnStar Owner's
vehicle in a crash, or wireless phone Guide for more information.
network congestion or jamming.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-1
Keys, Doors and Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Windows Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Interior Mirrors
Keys and Locks Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-14
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Automatic Dimming Rearview
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Windows
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Door Ajar Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Roof
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Doors
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Vehicle Security
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . 2-11
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-12
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

2-2 Keys, Doors and Windows
Keys and Locks If you are locked out of your vehicle,

contact Roadside Assistance. See
Roadside Assistance Program (U.S.
Keys and Canada) on page 13‑8 or
Roadside Assistance Program
{ WARNING (Mexico) on page 13‑10.
Leaving children in a vehicle with Remote Keyless Entry

the ignition key is dangerous for
many reasons. Children or others
(RKE) System
could be badly injured or even See Radio Frequency Statement on
killed. They could operate the page 13‑19 for information
power windows or other controls regarding Part 15 of the Federal
The key can be used for the ignition Communications Commission (FCC)
or even make the vehicle move.
and all locks. rules and Industry Canada
The windows will function with the
keys in the ignition and children The key has a bar-coded key tag Standards RSS-210/220/310.
could be seriously injured or killed that the dealer or qualified locksmith If there is a decrease in the RKE
if caught in the path of a closing can use to make new keys. Store operating range:
window. Do not leave the keys in this information in a safe place, not
in your vehicle. . Check the distance. The
a vehicle with children. transmitter may be too far from
Notice: If the keys get locked in the vehicle.
the vehicle, it may have to be
damaged to get them out. Always . Check the location. Other
carry a spare key. vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


. Check the transmitter's battery. confirm locking. See “LOCK HORN”
See “Battery Replacement” later and “LIGHT FLASH” under Vehicle
in this section. Personalization on page 5‑30 for
. If the transmitter is still not more information.
working correctly, see your
Pressing Q may also arm the
dealer or a qualified technician
anti-theft alarm system. See
for service.
Anti-Theft Alarm System on
page 2‑11.
Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation K (Unlock): Press once to unlock
the driver door. Press K again
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) within five seconds to unlock all
transmitter functions work up to With Remote Start Shown, Without remaining doors. The interior lamps
60 m (195 feet) away from the Remote Start Similar turn on and stay on for 20 seconds
vehicle. or until the ignition is turned on.
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): For
If enabled through the DIC, the
Keep in mind that other conditions, vehicles with this feature, press to
such as those previously stated, can operate the remote start feature. remote unlock feedback can be
impact the performance of the See Remote Vehicle Start on programmed to have the horn chirp
transmitter. page 2‑5 for additional information. and/or the turn signals flash to
confirm unlocking. See “UNLOCK
Q (Lock): Press to lock all the HORN” and “LIGHT FLASH” under
doors. The interior lamps turn off Vehicle Personalization on
after all of the doors are closed. page 5‑30 for more information.
If enabled through the Driver
Information Center (DIC), the The high‐beam headlamps, parking
remote lock feedback can be lamps, and back‐up lamps may
programmed to have the horn chirp come on each time K is pressed.
and/or the turn signals flash to
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

See “EXT (Exterior) LIGHTS” under Programming Transmitters to Notice: When replacing the
Vehicle Personalization on the Vehicle battery, do not touch any of the
page 5‑30 for additional information. circuitry on the transmitter. Static
Only RKE transmitters programmed from your body could damage the
Pressing K on the RKE transmitter to the vehicle will work. If a transmitter.
disarms the anti-theft alarm system. transmitter is lost or stolen, a
See Anti-Theft Alarm System on replacement can be purchased and
page 2‑11. programmed through your dealer.
When the replacement transmitter is
V (Remote Trunk Release): programmed to the vehicle, all
Press and hold for about
remaining transmitters must also be
one second to unlock the trunk. The
programmed. Any lost or stolen
trunk can be opened with the
transmitters no longer work once the
transmitter when the vehicle speed
new transmitter is programmed.
is less than 3 km/h (2 mph) or when
Each vehicle can have up to four
the ignition is off.
transmitters programmed to it.
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic
Alarm): Press and release to Battery Replacement
locate the vehicle. The horn sounds Replace the battery if the KEY FOB
three times and the headlamps and BATT (Battery) LOW message To replace the battery:
turn signals flash three times. displays in the DIC. See “KEY FOB 1. Separate the transmitter with a
BATT (Battery) LOW” under Key
Press and hold L for more than flat, thin object inserted into the
and Lock Messages on page 5‑27 notch on the side.
two seconds to initiate the panic for additional information.
alarm. The horn sounds and the 2. Remove the old battery. Do not
headlamps and turn signals flash for use a metal object.
30 seconds. Press L again to
cancel the panic alarm.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

3. Insert the new battery, positive doing so. Check local regulations for To start the vehicle using the remote
side facing up. Replace with a any requirements on remote starting start feature:
CR2032 or equivalent battery. of vehicles. 1. Aim the transmitter at the
4. Snap the transmitter back Do not use the remote start feature vehicle.
together. if your vehicle is low on fuel. Your 2. Press and release the
vehicle may run out of fuel. transmitter's lock button, then
Remote Vehicle Start If your vehicle has the remote start immediately press and hold the
Your vehicle may have a remote feature, the RKE transmitter transmitter's remote start button
starting feature that allows you to functions will have an increased for about four seconds or until
start the engine from outside the range of operation. However, the the vehicle's turn signal lamps
vehicle. It may also start the range may be less while the vehicle flash. The doors will lock.
vehicle's heating or air conditioning is running. When the vehicle starts, the
systems and rear window defogger. There are other conditions which parking lamps turn on and
When the remote start system is can affect the performance of the remain on while the engine is
active and the vehicle has an transmitter, see Remote Keyless running.
automatic climate control system, it Entry (RKE) System on page 2‑2 for
will automatically regulate the inside The remote start feature provides
additional information. two separate starts per ignition
temperature. Normal operation of
these systems will return after the / (Remote Start): This button will cycle, each with 10 minutes of
ignition key is turned to ON/RUN. be on the RKE transmitter if the engine running time, or one start
vehicle has remote start. with a time extension. The first start
Laws in some communities may must expire or be canceled to get
restrict the use of remote starters. two separate 10 minute starts.
For example, some laws may
require a person using remote start
to have the vehicle in view when
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

If it is the first remote start since the

. Turn the ignition switch out of . The engine coolant temperature
vehicle has been driven, repeat the LOCK/OFF position and then is too high.
previous steps, while the engine is back to LOCK/OFF. . The oil pressure is low.
still running, to extend the engine The parking lamps turn off to
running time by 10 minutes from the
. Two remote vehicle starts,
indicate the engine is off. or one start with a time
time you repeat the steps for remote
starting. The remote start running After the engine has been started extension, have already been
time can be extended one time and two times, or one time with a time provided for that ignition cycle.
only after the first remote start. extension, the vehicle's ignition
must be turned to ON/RUN using Remote Start Ready
After entering the vehicle during a the key before the remote start If your vehicle does not have the
remote start, insert and turn the key procedure can be used again. See remote vehicle start feature, it may
to ON/RUN to drive the vehicle. Ignition Positions on page 9‑16 for have the remote start ready feature.
The engine will shut off information regarding the ignition This feature allows your dealer to
automatically after 10 minutes, positions on your vehicle. add the manufacturer's remote
unless a time extension has been The remote vehicle start feature will vehicle start feature.
done or the vehicle's key is inserted not operate if any of the follow See your dealer if you would like to
into the ignition switch and turned to occur: add the manufacturer's remote
ON/RUN. . vehicle start feature to your vehicle.
The vehicle's key is in the
To manually shut off a remote start, ignition.
do any of the following. . The vehicle's hood is open.
. Aim the RKE transmitter at the
vehicle and press and release
. The hazard warning flashers
the remote start button. are on.
. Turn on the hazard warning
. The check engine light is on.
flashers. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 5‑15.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Door Locks WARNING (Continued)

Power Door Locks
With power door locks, the switches
{ WARNING injuries or even death from on the front doors can be used to
heat stroke. Always lock the lock and unlock the vehicle.
Unlocked doors can be vehicle whenever leaving it.
dangerous. K (Unlock): Press to unlock the
. Outsiders can easily enter doors.
. Passengers, especially through an unlocked door
children, can easily open the when you slow down or stop Q (Lock): Remove the key from
doors and fall out of a moving the vehicle. Locking the doors the ignition and press to lock the
vehicle. When a door is can help prevent this from doors.
locked, the handle will not happening.
open it. The chance of being Door Ajar Reminder
thrown out of the vehicle in a A chime will sound and the DOOR
crash is increased if the There are several ways to lock and
unlock your vehicle. AJAR message will display if one of
doors are not locked. So, all the doors is not fully closed. This
passengers should wear From the outside, turn the key in the happens when the ignition is on and
safety belts properly and the driver's door lock counterclockwise the shift lever is moved out of
doors should be locked to lock the door and clockwise to P (Park) or N (Neutral). See Door
whenever the vehicle is unlock it or use the remote keyless Ajar Messages on page 5‑26.
driven. entry transmitter.
. Young children who get into From the inside, move the manual
unlocked vehicles may be lock control on the door or use the
unable to get out. A child can power door lock switch.
be overcome by extreme heat
and can suffer permanent
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Delayed Locking Automatic Door Locks Lockout Protection

This feature will delay the actual The vehicle is programmed to lock If you press the power door lock
locking of the doors and arming of all doors automatically when the switch when the key is in the
the theft-deterrent system for following are met: ignition and any door is open, all the
five seconds when the power door . All doors are closed. doors will lock and then the driver's
lock switch or remote keyless entry door will unlock. Be sure to remove
transmitter is used to lock the . The ignition is on. the key from the ignition when
vehicle. . The vehicle is shifted out of locking your vehicle.
If any door is open when locking the P (Park). If the remote keyless entry
vehicle, three chimes will sound This feature cannot be disabled. transmitter is used to lock the doors
signaling that the delayed locking while the key is in the ignition, a
feature is active. Five seconds after All doors will unlock when the chime will sound three times. All
the last door is closed, all of the vehicle is shifted into P (Park). doors will then lock.
doors will lock. To cancel the delay The power door unlock function can
and lock the doors immediately, be programmed through prompts Safety Locks
press the lock button on the remote displayed on the Driver Information
keyless entry transmitter or the The vehicle has rear door security
Center (DIC). See Vehicle
power door lock switch a second locks to prevent passengers from
Personalization on page 5‑30.
time. The theft deterrent system will opening the rear doors from the
arm after 30 seconds. inside.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Doors WARNING (Continued)

Trunk If the vehicle must be driven with
the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:
Press the trunk release button on
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . Close all of the windows.
transmitter for one second to open . Fully open the air outlets on
the trunk from the outside. or under the instrument
panel.
{ WARNING . Adjust the Climate Control
Exhaust gases can enter the system to a setting that
vehicle if it is driven with the brings in only outside air and
Open the rear doors to access the set the fan speed to the
security locks on the inside edge of liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with
any objects that pass through the highest setting. See Climate
each door. Control System in the Index.
seal between the body and the
To set the locks, insert a key into . If the vehicle is equipped with
trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine
the slot and turn it to the horizontal a power liftgate, disable the
exhaust contains Carbon
position. The door can only be power liftgate function.
opened from the outside with the Monoxide (CO) which cannot be
door unlocked. To return the door to seen or smelled. It can cause For more information about
normal operation, turn the slot to the unconsciousness and even death. carbon monoxide, see Engine
vertical position. (Continued) Exhaust on page 9‑22.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Remote Trunk Release Emergency Trunk Release There is a glow-in-the-dark

Handle emergency trunk release handle
located inside the trunk on the trunk
latch. This handle glows following
exposure to light. Pull the release
handle up to open the trunk from the
inside.
Press the button located on the

driver door near the map pocket to
open the trunk.
The trunk can only be opened while
the vehicle is in P (Park) or when
the ignition is off.
Close the trunk by pulling on the Notice: Do not use the
handle. emergency trunk release handle
as a tie-down or anchor point
when securing items in the trunk
as it could damage the handle.
The emergency trunk release
handle is only intended to aid a
person trapped in a latched trunk,
enabling them to open the trunk
from the inside.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle Security Disarming the System

This vehicle has theft-deterrent To disarm the system:
features; however, they do not make . Press the RKE transmitter
it impossible to steal. unlock button.
. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN.
Anti-Theft Alarm System The security light, located on the
Once the system is disarmed, the
Your vehicle may have an anti-theft instrument panel cluster, comes on
security light will stop flashing.
alarm system. to indicate that arming has been
initiated. Once the system is armed, How the System Alarm is
Arming the System the security light flashes once every Activated
With the ignition off, press the three seconds.
To activate the system if it is armed:
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) If the security light is flashing twice
transmitter lock button to arm the per second, this means that a door
. Open the driver's door or trunk.
system. is open. A ten second pre-alarm chirp
will sound followed by a
The system will arm 30 seconds If the system is armed and the key thirty second full alarm of horn
after all the doors are closed, is used to unlock the vehicle, the and lights.
or 60 seconds with any door open. alarm will be activated. . Open any other door. A full
If you press the lock button on the If you do not want to arm the alarm of horn and lights will
transmitter a second time while all system, lock the vehicle with the immediately sound for
the doors are closed, the system will manual lock knob on the doors or thirty seconds.
arm immediately. The system will with the inside power door lock
still arm in 60 seconds if a door is switches.
. Open the hood. If the vehicle
open. When the open door is has the remote start feature, it
The alarm will sound and the will activate the full alarm.
closed, the system will arm.
exterior lights will flash if any door is
opened while armed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

When an alarm event has finished, Immobilizer the system. Only the correct key
the system will re-arm itself starts the vehicle. The vehicle may
automatically. See Radio Frequency Statement on not start if the key is damaged.
page 13‑19 for information
How to Turn Off the System regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Alarm Communications Commission (FCC)
rules and Industry Canada
To turn off the system alarm:
Standards RSS-210/220/310.
. Press the lock button on the
RKE transmitter. The system will Immobilizer Operation
then re-arm itself.
This vehicle has a passive The security light, located in the
. Press the unlock button on the theft-deterrent system. instrument panel cluster, comes on
RKE transmitter. This will also if there is a problem with arming or
disarm the system. The system does not have to be
manually armed or disarmed. disarming the theft-deterrent
. Insert the key in the ignition and system.
turn it on. This will also disarm The vehicle is automatically
immobilized when the key is When trying to start the vehicle, the
the system. security light comes on briefly when
removed from the ignition.
How to Detect a Tamper the ignition is turned on.
The system is automatically
Condition disarmed when the vehicle is If the engine does not start and the
started with the correct key. The key security light stays on there is a
If three chirps are heard when the
uses a transponder that matches an problem with the system. Turn the
unlock or lock button is pressed on
immobilizer control unit in the ignition off and try again.
the RKE transmitter, it means that
the system alarm was previously vehicle and automatically disarms
triggered.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

If the engine still does not start, and 3. After the engine has started, turn Exterior Mirrors
the key appears to be undamaged the key to LOCK/OFF, and
or the light continues to stay on, try remove the key.
another ignition key. If the engine Convex Mirrors
4. Insert the key to be programmed
does not start with the other key, the and turn it to ON/RUN within
vehicle needs service. If the vehicle five seconds of the original key { WARNING
does start, the first key may be being turned to LOCK/OFF in
damaged. See your dealer who can A convex mirror can make things,
Step 3. like other vehicles, look farther
service the theft-deterrent system
and have a new key made. The security light will turn off away than they really are. If you
once the key has been cut too sharply into the right lane,
It is possible for the theft-deterrent programmed. It may not be
system decoder to learn the you could hit a vehicle on the
apparent that the security light right. Check the inside mirror or
transponder value of a new or went on due to how quickly the
replacement key. Up to 10 keys can glance over your shoulder before
key is programmed. changing lanes.
be programmed for the vehicle. The
following procedure is for 5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if
programming additional keys only. additional keys are to be The passenger side mirror is convex
programmed. shaped. A convex mirror's surface is
To program the new key:
Do not leave the key or device that curved so more can be seen from
1. Verify that the new key has a 1 disarms or deactivates the theft the driver seat.
stamped on it. deterrent system in the vehicle.
2. Insert the already programmed
key in the ignition and start the
engine. If the engine will not
start, see your dealer for service.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Power Mirrors 2. Press one of the four arrows Interior Mirrors

located on the control pad to
move the mirror to the desired
direction. Manual Rearview Mirror
3. Adjust each outside mirror so Hold the inside rearview mirror in
that a little of the vehicle and the the center to move it for a clearer
area behind it can be seen. view of behind your vehicle. Adjust
the mirror to avoid glare from the
Keep the selector switch in the headlamps behind. Push the tab
center position when not adjusting forward for daytime use and pull it
either outside mirror. for nighttime use.
Manually fold the mirrors inward to Vehicles with OnStar® have three
prevent damage when going additional control buttons located at
through an automatic car wash. To the bottom of the mirror. See your
fold, push the mirror toward the dealer for more information on the
Controls for the outside power vehicle. Push the mirror outward, to
mirrors are located on the system and how to subscribe to
return to its original position. OnStar®. See the OnStar® owner
driver door.
guide for more information about the
To adjust the mirrors: Heated Mirrors services OnStar® provides.
1. Move the selector switch located For vehicles with heated mirrors:
below the four-way control pad Automatic Dimming
to the left or right to choose < (Rear Defogger): Press to heat
the mirrors. Rearview Mirror
either the driver side or
passenger side mirror. See “Rear Window Defogger” under The vehicle may have an automatic
Automatic Climate Control System dimming inside rearview mirror with
on page 8‑5 for more information. a compass display and OnStar®
controls. See your dealer for more
information on the system and how
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

to subscribe to OnStar®. See the Windows

OnStar® owner's guide for more
information about the services
OnStar® provides. { WARNING
See Compass on page 5‑4 for more Leaving children, helpless adults,
information. or pets in a vehicle with the
O (On/Off): Press to turn the windows closed is dangerous.
dimming feature on or off. They can be overcome by the
extreme heat and suffer
Automatic Dimming Mirror permanent injuries or even death
Operation from heat stroke. Never leave a
Automatic dimming reduces the child, a helpless adult, or a pet
alone in a vehicle, especially with The vehicle aerodynamics are
glare of lights from behind the
designed to improve fuel economy
vehicle. The dimming feature comes the windows closed in warm or
performance. This may result in a
on and the indicator light illuminates hot weather.
pulsing sound when either rear
each time the vehicle is started.
window is down and the front
Cleaning the Mirror windows are up. To reduce the
sound, open either a front window
Do not spray glass cleaner directly or the sunroof (if equipped).
on the mirror. Use a soft towel
dampened with water.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Power Windows To stop the window while it is To program the driver window, follow
lowering, pull the front of the switch these steps:
momentarily. To raise the window, 1. With the ignition in ACC/
pull and hold the front of the switch. ACCESSORY, ON/RUN,
Express-Up Window or when Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) is active, close all
On windows with this feature, pull doors.
the switch up to the second position
and release the switch to activate 2. Press and hold the power
the express-up feature. To stop the window switch until the window
window as it is going up, pull up or is fully open.
press down briefly on the switch 3. Pull the power window switch up
again. until the window is fully closed.
Programming the Power 4. Continue holding the switch up
The power window switches are Windows for approximately two seconds
located on the armrest on the after the window is completely
If the battery on the vehicle has closed.
driver's door. In addition, there is a been recharged, disconnected,
switch on each passenger door. or is not working, the driver The window is now reprogrammed.
Express-Down Window power window will need to be
re-programmed for the express-up
The driver window has an feature to work. Replace or
express-down feature. This switch is recharge the vehicle's battery
labeled AUTO. Press the front all before reprogramming.
the way down and release, to
automatically lower.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Express Window Anti-Pinch Express Window Anti‐Pinch In this mode, the window can still
Feature Override close on an object in its path. Use
care when using the override mode.
If any object is in the path of the
window when the express‐up is { WARNING Window Lockout
active, the window stops at the
If express override is activated, The driver power window controls
obstruction and auto‐reverse to a
the window will not reverse also include a lockout button.
preset factory position. Weather
conditions such as severe icing automatically. You or others could o (Window Lockout): Press the
may also cause the window to be injured and the window could lockout button to stop the rear
auto‐reverse. The window returns be damaged. Before you use passengers from using their window
to normal operation once the express override, make sure that switches. The driver and front
obstruction or condition is removed. all people and obstructions are passenger can still operate all the
clear of the window path. windows with the lock on. When the
red part of the switch is visible, you
have returned to normal window
In an emergency, the anti‐pinch operation.
feature can be overridden in a
supervised mode. Hold the window
switch all the way up to the second
position. The window rises for as
long as the switch is held. Once the
switch is released, the express
mode is re‐activated.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Sun Visors Roof The sunroof only operates when the

ignition is in ON/RUN, ACC/
ACCESSORY, or if Retained
Sunroof Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 9‑20.
Press and release the back of the
switch to open the sunroof to the
vent position. From the vent
position, press and release the back
of the switch to express-open the
sunroof. To stop the sunroof from
express opening, press the switch
again. If the sunshade is closed, it
will open automatically when the
Pull the sun visor down to block
sunroof opens past the vented
glare. Detach the sun visor from the
position.
center mount to pivot to the side On vehicles with a sunroof, the
window, or to extend along the rod, switch is located on the headliner
if available. between the map lamps.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

A deflector will automatically raise

when the sunroof is opened. The
deflector will retract when the
sunroof is closed.
To close the sunroof, press the front
of the switch and hold it until the
sunroof is closed. The sunroof will
stop if the switch is released. Close
the sunshade by hand.
The sunroof glass panel cannot be
opened or closed if the vehicle has
an electrical failure.
Dirt and debris may collect on the
Notice: Forcing the sunshade sunroof seal or in the tracks that
forward of the sliding glass panel could cause an issue with sunroof
may cause damage and the operation, noise or plug the water
sunroof may not operate properly. drainage system. Periodically open
Always close the glass panel the sunroof and remove any
before closing the sunshade. obstacles or loose debris. Wipe the
sunroof seal and roof sealing area
using a clean cloth, mild soap, and
water. Do not remove grease from
sunroof.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

2 NOTES
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Seats and Restraints 3-1
Seats and Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-24

Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Child Restraints
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Restraints Replacing Safety Belt System
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Infants and Young
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-43
Airbag System Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-45
Head Restraints Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Lower Anchors and Tethers
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-27 for Children (LATCH
Front Seats When Should an Airbag System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29 Replacing LATCH System
Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-4 What Makes an Airbag Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-55
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30 Securing Child Restraints
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 How Does an Airbag (Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30 Securing Child Restraints
What Will You See After an (Front Passenger Seat) . . . . 3-57
Rear Seats Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Passenger Sensing
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Safety Belts Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
How to Wear Safety Belts Adding Equipment to the
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-37
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-38
Safety Belt Use During Replacing Airbag System
Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-23
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

3-2 Seats and Restraints
Head Restraints
The vehicle's front and rear seats
have adjustable head restraints in
the outboard seating positions.
{ WARNING
With head restraints that are not
installed and adjusted properly,
there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/
spinal injury in a crash. Do not Adjust the head restraint so that the To lower the head restraint, press
drive until the head restraints for top of the restraint is at the same the button located on top of the
all occupants are installed and height as the top of the occupant's seatback, and push the head
adjusted properly. head. This position reduces the restraint down. Try to move the
chance of a neck injury in a crash. head restraint after the button is
The height of the head restraint can released to make sure that it is
be adjusted. Pull the head restraint locked in place.
up to raise it. Try to move the head The vehicle's front and rear seat
restraint to make sure that it is outboard head restraints are not
locked in place. designed to be removed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Front Seats To adjust the seat position: Height Adjustment
Seat Adjustment
Seat Position
{ WARNING
You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust a
manual driver seat while the
vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a
pedal when you do not want to. 1. Lift the bar under the front of the If available, press and hold the top
Adjust the driver seat only when seat cushion to unlock the seat. or bottom of the switch to raise or
the vehicle is not moving. 2. Slide the seat to the desired lower the seat. Release the switch
position and release the bar. when the desired height is reached.
3. Try to move the seat back and
forth to make sure it is locked in
place.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Power Seat Adjustment Lumbar Adjustment
{ WARNING
You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust the
seat while the vehicle is moving.
The sudden movement could
startle and confuse you, or make
you push a pedal when you do
not want to. Adjust the driver seat
only when the vehicle is not
moving. To adjust a power seat, if available:
. Move the seat forward or
rearward by sliding the control A. Increase Lumbar Support
forward or rearward. Control
. Raise or lower the front or rear B. Decrease Lumbar Support
part of the seat cushion by Control
moving the front or rear of the If available, press the front (A) or
control up or down. rear (B) of the control to increase or
. Raise or lower the entire seat by decrease lumbar support. Release
moving the entire control up the control when the desired level of
or down. support is reached.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Reclining Seatbacks WARNING (Continued)

{ WARNING The lap belt cannot do its job
either. In a crash, the belt could
Sitting in a reclined position when go up over your abdomen. The
the vehicle is in motion can be belt forces would be there, not at
dangerous. Even when buckled your pelvic bones. This could
up, the safety belts cannot do cause serious internal injuries.
their job when reclined like this.
For proper protection when the
The shoulder belt cannot do its vehicle is in motion, have the
job because it will not be against seatback upright. Then sit well
your body. Instead, it will be in back in the seat and wear the Do not have a seatback reclined if
front of you. In a crash, you could safety belt properly. the vehicle is moving.
go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Manual Reclining Seatbacks To return the seatback to the upright

position:
{ WARNING 1. Lift the lever fully without
applying pressure to the
You can lose control of the seatback, and the seatback will
vehicle if you try to adjust a return to the upright position.
manual driver seat while the
2. Push and pull on the seatback to
vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a
pedal when you do not want to.
Adjust the driver seat only when
the vehicle is not moving. To recline the seatback:
1. Lift the lever.
2. Move the seatback to the
{ WARNING desired position, and then
release the lever to lock the
If either seatback is not locked, it seatback in place.
could move forward in a sudden
stop or crash. That could cause 3. Push and pull on the seatback to
injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the
seatbacks to be sure they are
locked.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Power Reclining Seatbacks Heated Front Seats
{ WARNING
If you cannot feel temperature
change or pain to the skin, the
seat heater may cause burns
even at low temperatures. To
reduce the risk of burns, people
with such a condition should use
care when using the seat heater,
especially for long periods of
time. Do not place anything on If available, press the top of the
the seat that insulates against switch to turn the heat feature on to
To adjust a power seatback, heat, such as a blanket, cushion, the high heat setting. The indicator
if equipped: cover, or similar item. This may light “2” will be lit.
. Tilt the top of the control cause the seat heater to Press the top of the switch again to
rearward to recline. overheat. An overheated seat go to the low heat setting. The
heater may cause a burn or may indicator light “1” will be lit.
. Tilt the top of the control forward
to raise. damage the seat. Press the bottom of the switch to
turn the feature off.
The heated seats are canceled
when the ignition is turned off.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Rear Seats Raising the Seatback
Folding the Seatback { WARNING

Either side of the seatback can be
folded down for more cargo space. A safety belt that is improperly
Adjust the seatback only when the routed, not properly attached,
vehicle is not moving. or twisted will not provide the
protection needed in a crash. The
Notice: Folding a rear seat with person wearing the belt could be
the safety belts still fastened may seriously injured. After raising the
cause damage to the seat or the
rear seatback, always check to be
safety belts. Always unbuckle the
sure that the safety belts are
safety belts and return them to
their normal stowed position To fold the seatback down: properly routed and attached, and
before folding a rear seat. 1. Make sure the front seatback is are not twisted.
not reclined. If it is, the rear
seatback will not fold down all
the way. If necessary, return the
front seatback to the upright
position. See Reclining
Seatbacks on page 3‑5.
2. Pull up on the seatback strap
while folding the seatback down.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

{ WARNING Safety Belts { WARNING

This section of the manual
If either seatback is not locked, it describes how to use safety belts It is extremely dangerous to ride
could move forward in a sudden properly. It also describes some in a cargo area, inside or outside
stop or crash. That could cause things not to do with safety belts. of a vehicle. In a collision, people
injury to the person sitting there. riding in these areas are more
Always push and pull on the
seatbacks to be sure they are
{ WARNING likely to be seriously injured or
killed. Do not allow people to ride
locked. Do not let anyone ride where a in any area of your vehicle that is
safety belt cannot be worn not equipped with seats and
To raise the seatback: properly. In a crash, if you or your safety belts. Be sure everyone in
passenger(s) are not wearing the vehicle is in a seat and using
1. Push the seatback up and back safety belts, the injuries can be a safety belt properly.
to lock it into place.
much worse. You can hit things
2. Push and pull the top of the inside the vehicle harder or be This vehicle has indicators as a
seatback to be sure it is locked ejected from the vehicle. You and reminder to buckle the safety belts.
into position. your passenger(s) can be See Safety Belt Reminders on
3. Make sure that the safety belts seriously injured or killed. In the page 5‑12 for additional information.
are properly stowed over the same crash, you might not be,
In most states and in all Canadian
seatback in all three seating if you are buckled up. Always provinces, the law requires wearing
positions. fasten your safety belt, and check safety belts. Here is why:
When the seat is not in use, it that your passenger(s) are
restrained properly too. You never know if you will be in a
should be kept in the upright, locked crash. If you do have a crash, you
position. do not know if it will be a
serious one.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

A few crashes are mild, and some Why Safety Belts Work
crashes can be so serious that even
When you ride in or on anything,
buckled up, a person would not
you go as fast as it goes.
survive. But most crashes are in
between. In many of them, people
who buckle up can survive and
sometimes walk away. Without
safety belts they could have been
badly hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety
belts in vehicles, the facts are clear.
In most crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot! Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose

it is just a seat on wheels.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Get it up to speed. Then stop the The person keeps going until or the instrument panel...
vehicle. The rider does not stop. stopped by something. In a real
vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the safety belts!

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

With safety belts, you slow down as Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why Q: If I am a good driver, and I
the vehicle does. You get more time should I have to wear safety never drive far from home,
to stop. You stop over more belts? why should I wear safety
distance, and your strongest bones A: Airbags are supplemental belts?
take the forces. That is why safety systems only; so they work with A: You may be an excellent driver,
belts make such good sense. safety belts — not instead of but if you are in a crash — even
Questions and Answers About them. Whether or not an airbag one that is not your fault — you
Safety Belts is provided, all occupants still and your passenger(s) can be
have to buckle up to get the hurt. Being a good driver does
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle most protection. That is true not not protect you from things
after a crash if I am wearing a only in frontal collisions, but beyond your control, such as
safety belt? especially in side and other bad drivers.
A: You could be — whether you are collisions. Most accidents occur within
wearing a safety belt or not. But 40 km (25 mi) of home. And the
your chance of being conscious greatest number of serious
during and after an accident, so injuries and deaths occur at
you can unbuckle and get out, is speeds of less than
much greater if you are belted. 65 km/h (40 mph).
And you can unbuckle a safety Safety belts are for everyone.
belt, even if you are
upside down.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

How to Wear Safety Belts First, before you or your to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
passenger(s) wear a safety belt, under it, the belt would apply force
Properly there is important information you on your abdomen. This could cause
This section is only for people of should know. serious or even fatal injuries. The
adult size. shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest.
Be aware that there are special
These parts of the body are best
things to know about safety belts
able to take belt restraining forces.
and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and The shoulder belt locks if there is a
infants. If a child will be riding in the sudden stop or crash.
vehicle, see Older Children on
page 3‑39 or Infants and Young
Children on page 3‑41. Follow those
rules for everyone's protection.
It is very important for all occupants
to buckle up. Statistics show that
unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are Sit up straight and always keep your
wearing safety belts. feet on the floor in front of you. The
lap part of the belt should be worn
Occupants who are not buckled up low and snug on the hips, just
can be thrown out of the vehicle in a touching the thighs. In a crash, this
crash. And they can strike others in applies force to the strong pelvic
the vehicle who are wearing safety bones and you would be less likely
belts.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Q: What is wrong with this? Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING
You can be seriously hurt if the
shoulder belt is too loose. In a
crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase
injury. The shoulder belt should fit
snugly against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. A: The lap belt is too loose. It will
It will not give as much not give nearly as much
protection this way. protection this way.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING { WARNING
You can be seriously hurt if the You can be seriously injured if the
lap belt is too loose. In a crash, belt is buckled in the wrong place
you could slide under the lap belt like this. In a crash, the belt would
and apply force on your go up over your abdomen. The
abdomen. This could cause belt forces would be there, not on
serious or even fatal injuries. The the pelvic bones. This could
lap belt should be worn low and cause serious internal injuries.
snug on the hips, just touching Always buckle the belt into the
the thighs. buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong

buckle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Q: What is wrong with this? Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING
You can be seriously injured if the
belt goes over an armrest like
this. The belt would be much too
high. In a crash, you can slide
under the belt. The belt force
would then be applied on the
abdomen, not on the pelvic
bones, and that could cause
serious or fatal injuries. Be sure
the belt goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest. A: The shoulder belt is worn under

the arm. It should be worn over
the shoulder at all times.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING { WARNING
You can be seriously injured if You can be seriously injured by
you wear the shoulder belt under not wearing the lap-shoulder belt
your arm. In a crash, your body properly. In a crash, you would
would move too far forward, not be restrained by the shoulder
which would increase the chance belt. Your body could move too
of head and neck injury. Also, the far forward increasing the chance
belt would apply too much force of head and neck injury. You
to the ribs, which are not as might also slide under the lap
strong as shoulder bones. You belt. The belt force would then be
could also severely injure internal applied right on the abdomen.
organs like your liver or spleen. That could cause serious or fatal
The shoulder belt should go over A: The belt is behind the body. injuries. The shoulder belt should
the shoulder and across the go over the shoulder and across
chest. the chest.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Q: What is wrong with this? The lap-shoulder belt may lock if

{ WARNING you pull the belt across you very
quickly. If this happens, let the
You can be seriously injured by a belt go back slightly to unlock it.
twisted belt. In a crash, you would Then pull the belt across you
not have the full width of the belt more slowly.
to spread impact forces. If a belt
is twisted, make it straight so it If the shoulder portion of a
can work properly, or ask your passenger belt is pulled out all
the way, the child restraint
dealer to fix it.
locking feature may be engaged.
If this happens, just let the belt
Lap-Shoulder Belt go back all the way and start
again.
All seating positions in the vehicle
have a lap-shoulder belt. Engaging the child restraint
A: The belt is twisted across
locking feature in the right front
the body. The following instructions explain seating position may affect the
how to wear a lap-shoulder belt passenger sensing system. See
properly. Passenger Sensing System on
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is page 3‑32 for more information.
adjustable, so you can sit up
straight. To see how, see “Seats”
in the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull
the belt across you. Do not let it
get twisted.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

effectiveness of the safety belt in

a crash. See “Shoulder Belt
Height Adjuster” later in this
section for instruction on use
and important safety information.
3. Push the latch plate into the To unlatch the belt, push the button
buckle until it clicks. on the buckle. The belt should
Pull up on the latch plate to return to its stowed position. Slide
make sure it is secure. If the belt the latch plate up the safety belt
is not long enough, see Safety webbing when the safety belt is not
Belt Extender on page 3‑23. in use. The latch plate should rest
5. To make the lap part tight, pull on the stitching on the safety belt,
Position the release button on up on the shoulder belt. near the guide loop on the side wall.
the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if It may be necessary to pull Before a door is closed, be sure the
necessary. stitching on the safety belt safety belt is out of the way. If a
through the latch plate to fully door is slammed against a safety
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt tighten the lap belt on smaller belt, damage can occur to both the
height adjuster, move it to the occupants. safety belt and the vehicle.
height that is right for you.
Improper shoulder belt height
adjustment could reduce the I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster Safety Belt Pretensioners

Your vehicle has a shoulder belt This vehicle has safety belt
height adjuster for the driver and pretensioners for the front outboard
right front passenger position. occupants. Although the safety belt
Adjust the height so the shoulder pretensioners cannot be seen, they
portion of the belt is on the shoulder are part of the safety belt assembly.
and not falling off of it. The belt They can help tighten the safety
should be close to, but not belts during the early stages of a
contacting, the neck. Improper moderate to severe frontal and near
shoulder belt height adjustment frontal crash if the threshold
could reduce the effectiveness of conditions for pretensioner
the safety belt in a crash. See How activation are met. And, if the
to Wear Safety Belts Properly on Squeeze the buttons (A) on the vehicle has side impact airbags,
page 3‑13. sides of the height adjuster and safety belt pretensioners can help
move the height adjuster to the tighten the safety belts in a side
desired position. crash.
After the adjuster is set to the Pretensioners work only once.
desired position, try to move it down If they activate in a crash, they will
without squeezing the buttons to need to be replaced, and probably
make sure it has locked into other new parts for the vehicle's
position. safety belt system. See Replacing
Safety Belt System Parts After a
Crash on page 3‑24.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Rear Safety Belt Comfort Here is how to install a comfort

Guides guide to the safety belt:
This vehicle may have rear shoulder
belt comfort guides. If not, they are
available through your dealer. The
guides may provide added safety
belt comfort for older children who
have outgrown booster seats and
for some adults. When installed and
properly adjusted, the comfort guide
positions the belt away from the
neck and head.
2. Place the guide over the belt
and insert the two edges of the
belt into the slots of the guide.
1. Pull the elastic cord out from
between the edge of the
seatback and the interior body to
remove the guide from its
storage clip.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

{ WARNING
A safety belt that is not properly
worn may not provide the
protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts
of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
3. Be sure that the belt is not 4. Buckle, position, and release the
twisted and it lies flat. The safety belt as described
elastic cord must be under the previously in this section. Make
belt and the guide on top. sure the shoulder portion of the
belt is on the shoulder and not
falling off of it. The belt should
be close to, but not contacting,
the neck.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

To remove and store the comfort Safety Belt Extender

guide, squeeze the belt edges
together so that the safety belt can If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten
be removed from the guide. Pull the around you, you should use it.
guide upward to expose its storage But if a safety belt is not long
clip, and then slide the guide onto enough, your dealer will order you
the clip. Turn the guide and clip an extender. When you go in to
inward and slide them in between order it, take the heaviest coat you
the seatback and the interior body, will wear, so the extender will be
leaving only the loop of the elastic long enough for you. To help avoid
cord exposed. personal injury, do not let someone
else use it, and use it only for the
Safety Belt Use During A pregnant woman should wear a seat it is made to fit. The extender
Pregnancy lap-shoulder belt, and the lap has been designed for adults. Never
portion should be worn as low as use it for securing child seats. To
Safety belts work for everyone, wear it, attach it to the regular safety
including pregnant women. Like all possible, below the rounding,
throughout the pregnancy. belt. For more information, see the
occupants, they are more likely to instruction sheet that comes with
be seriously injured if they do not The best way to protect the fetus is the extender.
wear safety belts. to protect the mother. When a safety
belt is worn properly, it is more likely
that the fetus will not be hurt in a
crash. For pregnant women, as for
anyone, the key to making safety
belts effective is wearing them
properly.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Safety System Check Safety Belt Care Replacing Safety Belt

Now and then, check that the safety Keep belts clean and dry. System Parts After a
belt reminder light, safety belts, Crash
buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
anchorages are working properly.
{ WARNING
Look for any other loose or Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
{ WARNING
damaged safety belt system parts It may severely weaken them. In A crash can damage the safety
that might keep a safety belt system a crash, they might not be able to belt system in the vehicle.
from doing its job. See your dealer provide adequate protection. A damaged safety belt system
to have it repaired. Torn or frayed Clean safety belts only with mild may not properly protect the
safety belts may not protect you in a soap and lukewarm water. person using it, resulting in
crash. They can rip apart under
impact forces. If a belt is torn or serious injury or even death in a
frayed, get a new one right away. crash. To help make sure the
safety belt systems are working
Make sure the safety belt reminder properly after a crash, have them
light is working. See Safety Belt inspected and any necessary
Reminders on page 5‑12 for more replacements made as soon as
information. possible.
Keep safety belts clean and dry.
See Safety Belt Care on page 3‑24.
After a minor crash, replacement of
safety belts may not be necessary.
But the safety belt assemblies that
were used during any crash may
have been stressed or damaged.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

See your dealer to have the safety Airbag System For frontal airbags, the word
belt assemblies inspected or AIRBAG will appear on the middle
replaced. The vehicle has the following part of the steering wheel for the
airbags: driver and on the instrument panel
New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the safety belt . A frontal airbag for the driver. for the right front passenger.
system was not being used at the . A frontal airbag for the right front With seat-mounted side impact
time of the crash. passenger. airbags, the word AIRBAG will
Have the safety belt pretensioners appear on the side of the seatback
. A seat-mounted side impact closest to the door.
checked if the vehicle has been in a airbag for the driver.
crash, or if the airbag readiness light With roof-rail airbags, the word
stays on after you start the vehicle . A seat-mounted side impact AIRBAG will appear along the
or while you are driving. See Airbag airbag for the right front headliner or trim.
Readiness Light on page 5‑13. passenger.
Airbags are designed to supplement
. A roof-rail airbag for the driver the protection provided by safety
and the passenger seated belts. Even though today's airbags
directly behind the driver. are also designed to help reduce
. A roof-rail airbag for the right the risk of injury from the force of an
front passenger and the inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
passenger seated directly very quickly to do their job.
behind the right front passenger.
All of the airbags in your vehicle will
have the word AIRBAG embossed
in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Here are the most important things

to know about the airbag system: { WARNING { WARNING
Airbags inflate with great force, Children who are up against,
{ WARNING faster than the blink of an eye. or very close to, any airbag
You can be severely injured or Anyone who is up against, or very when it inflates can be seriously
killed in a crash if you are not close to, any airbag when it injured or killed. Airbags plus
wearing your safety belt — even if inflates can be seriously injured lap-shoulder belts offer protection
you have airbags. Airbags are or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily for adults and older children, but
designed to work with safety close to any airbag, as you would not for young children and infants.
belts, but do not replace them. be if you were sitting on the edge Neither the vehicle safety belt
Also, airbags are not designed to of the seat or leaning forward. system nor its airbag system is
deploy in every crash. In some Safety belts help keep you in designed for them. Young
crashes safety belts are your only position before and during a children and infants need the
restraint. See When Should an crash. Always wear a safety belt, protection that a child restraint
Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑29. even with airbags. The driver system can provide. Always
should sit as far back as possible secure children properly in the
Wearing your safety belt during a while still maintaining control of vehicle. To read how, see Older
crash helps reduce your chance the vehicle. Children on page 3‑39 or Infants
of hitting things inside the vehicle and Young Children on
or being ejected from it. Airbags Occupants should not lean on or
sleep against the door or side page 3‑41.
are “supplemental restraints” to
the safety belts. Everyone in your windows in seating positions with
vehicle should wear a safety belt seat-mounted side impact airbags
properly — whether or not there is and/or roof-rail airbags.
an airbag for that person.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Where Are the Airbags?
There is an airbag readiness light

on the instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag
electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an
electrical problem. See Airbag The right front passenger's frontal
Readiness Light on page 5‑13 for airbag is in the instrument panel on
more information. The driver's frontal airbag is in the the passenger's side.
middle of the steering wheel.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

WARNING (Continued)
or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept
clear. Do not put anything
between an occupant and an
airbag, and do not attach or put
anything on the steering wheel
hub or on or near any other
airbag covering.
Do not use seat accessories that
Driver Side shown, Passenger Driver Side shown, Passenger block the inflation path of a
Side similar Side similar seat-mounted side impact airbag.
The seat-mounted side impact The roof-rail airbags for the driver, Never secure anything to the roof
airbags for the driver and right front right front passenger, and second of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags
passenger are in the side of the row outboard passengers are in the by routing a rope or tie down
seatbacks closest to the door. ceiling above the side windows. through any door or window
opening. If you do, the path of an
{ WARNING inflating roof-rail airbag will be
blocked.
If something is between an
occupant and an airbag, the
airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into
that person causing severe injury
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

When Should an Airbag Frontal airbags may inflate at Frontal airbags are not intended to
different crash speeds. For inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear
Inflate? example: impacts, or in many side impacts.
Frontal airbags are designed to . If the vehicle hits a stationary In addition, the vehicle has
inflate in moderate to severe frontal object, the airbags could inflate dual-stage frontal airbags.
or near-frontal crashes to help at a different crash speed than if Dual-stage airbags adjust the
reduce the potential for severe the vehicle hits a moving object. restraint according to crash severity.
injuries mainly to the driver's or right The vehicle has electronic frontal
front passenger's head and chest. . If the vehicle hits an object that
deforms, the airbags could sensors, which help the sensing
However, they are only designed to system distinguish between a
inflate if the impact exceeds a inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits an object moderate frontal impact and a more
predetermined deployment severe frontal impact. For moderate
threshold. Deployment thresholds that does not deform.
frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags
are used to predict how severe a . If the vehicle hits a narrow object inflate at a level less than full
crash is likely to be in time for the (like a pole), the airbags could deployment. For more severe frontal
airbags to inflate and help restrain inflate at a different crash speed impacts, full deployment occurs.
the occupants. than if the vehicle hits a wide
object (like a wall). The vehicle has seat-mounted side
Whether the frontal airbags will or impact and roof-rail airbags. See
should deploy is not based on how . If the vehicle goes into an object Airbag System on page 3‑25.
fast your vehicle is traveling. at an angle, the airbags could Seat-mounted side impact and
It depends largely on what you hit, inflate at a different crash speed roof-rail airbags are intended to
the direction of the impact, and how than if the vehicle goes straight inflate in moderate to severe side
quickly your vehicle slows down. into the object. crashes. Seat-mounted side impact
Thresholds can also vary with and roof-rail airbags will inflate if the
specific vehicle design. crash severity is above the system's
designed threshold level. The
threshold level can vary with
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: specific vehicle design.

Seat-mounted side impact and What Makes an Airbag How Does an Airbag
roof-rail airbags are not intended to
inflate in frontal impacts, near-frontal
Inflate? Restrain?
impacts, rollovers, or rear impacts. In a deployment event, the sensing In moderate to severe frontal or
A seat-mounted side impact airbag system sends an electrical signal near frontal collisions, even belted
is intended to deploy on the side of triggering a release of gas from the occupants can contact the steering
the vehicle that is struck. A roof-rail inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the wheel or the instrument panel. In
airbag is intended to deploy on the airbag causing the bag to break out moderate to severe side collisions,
side of the vehicle that is struck. of the cover and deploy. The inflator, even belted occupants can contact
In any particular crash, no one can the airbag, and related hardware are the inside of the vehicle.
say whether an airbag should have all part of the airbag module. Airbags supplement the protection
inflated simply because of the Frontal airbag modules are located provided by safety belts. Frontal
damage to a vehicle or because of inside the steering wheel and airbags distribute the force of the
what the repair costs were. For instrument panel. For vehicles with impact more evenly over the
frontal airbags, inflation is seat‐mounted side impact airbags, occupant's upper body, stopping
determined by what the vehicle hits, there are airbags modules in the the occupant more gradually.
the angle of the impact, and how side of the front seatbacks closest Seat-mounted side impact and
quickly the vehicle slows down. For to the door. For vehicles with roof-rail airbags distribute the force
seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags, there are airbag of the impact more evenly over the
roof-rail airbags, deployment is modules in the ceiling of the vehicle, occupant's upper body.
determined by the location and near the side windows that have But airbags would not help in many
severity of the side impact. occupant seating positions. types of collisions, primarily
because the occupant's motion is
not toward those airbags. See When
Should an Airbag Inflate? on
page 3‑29 for more information.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Airbags should never be regarded the windshield or being able to steer fuel system after the airbags inflate.
as anything more than a supplement the vehicle, nor does it prevent You can lock the doors, turn off the
to safety belts. people from leaving the vehicle. interior lamps and hazard warning
flashers by using the controls for
What Will You See After { WARNING those features.
an Airbag Inflates?
After the frontal airbags and
When an airbag inflates, there { WARNING
may be dust in the air. This dust
seat-mounted side impact airbags could cause breathing problems A crash severe enough to inflate
inflate, they quickly deflate, so for people with a history of the airbags may have also
quickly that some people may not asthma or other breathing trouble. damaged important functions in
even realize an airbag inflated. To avoid this, everyone in the the vehicle, such as the fuel
Roof-rail airbags may still be at least vehicle should get out as soon as system, brake and steering
partially inflated for some time after systems, etc. Even if the vehicle
it is safe to do so. If you have
they deploy. Some components of appears to be drivable after a
breathing problems but cannot
the airbag module may be hot for
get out of the vehicle after an moderate crash, there may be
several minutes. For location of the
airbag inflates, then get fresh air concealed damage that could
airbag modules, see What Makes
an Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑30. by opening a window or a door. make it difficult to safely operate
If you experience breathing the vehicle.
The parts of the airbag that come problems following an airbag
into contact with you may be warm, Use caution if you should attempt
deployment, you should seek to restart the engine after a crash
but not too hot to touch. There may
medical attention. has occurred.
be some smoke and dust coming
from the vents in the deflated
airbags. Airbag inflation does not The vehicle has a feature that may In many crashes severe enough to
prevent the driver from seeing out of automatically unlock the doors, turn inflate the airbag, windshields are
on the interior lamps and hazard broken by vehicle deformation.
warning flashers, and shut off the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Additional windshield breakage may

. Let only qualified technicians
also occur from the right front work on the airbag systems.
passenger airbag. Improper service can mean that
an airbag system will not work
. Airbags are designed to inflate properly. See your dealer for
only once. After an airbag service.
inflates, you will need some new
parts for the airbag system. Canada and Mexico
If you do not get them, the
Passenger Sensing
System The words ON and OFF, or the
airbag system will not be there symbol for on and off, are visible
to help protect you in another The vehicle has a passenger during the system check. If you are
crash. A new system will include sensing system for the right front using remote start, if equipped, to
airbag modules and possibly passenger position. The passenger start the vehicle from a distance,
other parts. The service manual airbag status indicator will be visible you may not see the system check.
for your vehicle covers the need on the instrument panel when the When the system check is
to replace other parts. vehicle is started. complete, either the word ON or
. The vehicle has a crash sensing OFF, or the symbol for on or off, will
and diagnostic module which be visible. See Passenger Airbag
records information after a Status Indicator on page 5‑13.
crash. See Vehicle Data The passenger sensing system
Recording and Privacy on turns off the right front passenger
page 13‑17 and Event Data frontal airbag and seat-mounted
Recorders on page 13‑18. side impact airbag under certain
United States
conditions. The driver airbags and
the roof-rail airbags are not affected
by the passenger sensing system.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

The passenger sensing system A label on the sun visor says,

works with sensors that are part of “Never put a rear-facing child seat in WARNING (Continued)
the right front passenger seat. The the front.” This is because the risk to
sensors are designed to detect the the rear-facing child is so great, fail-safe. No one can guarantee
presence of a properly-seated if the airbag deploys. that an airbag will not deploy
occupant and determine if the right under some unusual
circumstance, even though
front passenger frontal airbag and
seat‐mounted side impact airbag
{ WARNING the airbag(s) are off.
should be enabled (may inflate) A child in a rear-facing child Secure rear-facing child restraints
or not. restraint can be seriously injured in a rear seat, even if the
According to accident statistics, or killed if the right front airbag(s) are off. If you secure a
children are safer when properly passenger airbag inflates. This is forward-facing child restraint in
secured in a rear seat in the correct because the back of the the right front seat, always move
child restraint for their weight rear-facing child restraint would the front passenger seat as far
and size. be very close to the inflating back as it will go. It is better to
We recommend that children be airbag. A child in a forward-facing secure the child restraint in a
secured in a rear seat, including: an child restraint can be seriously rear seat.
infant or a child riding in a injured or killed if the right front
rear-facing child restraint; a child passenger airbag inflates and the
The passenger sensing system is
riding in a forward-facing child seat; passenger seat is in a forward
designed to turn off the right front
an older child riding in a booster position.
passenger airbag and seat‐mounted
seat; and children, who are large Even if the passenger sensing side impact airbag if:
enough, using safety belts. system has turned off the right . The right front passenger seat is
front passenger frontal airbag and unoccupied.
seat-mounted side impact airbag
(if equipped), no system is
. The system determines that an
infant is present in a rear-facing
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued) infant seat.


. The system determines that a The passenger sensing system is
small child is present in a child designed to turn on (may inflate) the { WARNING
restraint. right front passenger frontal airbag
and seat‐mounted side impact If the airbag readiness light ever
. The system determines that a
airbag anytime the system senses comes on and stays on, it means
small child is present in a
that a person of adult size is sitting that something may be wrong
booster seat.
properly in the right front with the airbag system. To help
. A right front passenger takes passenger seat. avoid injury to yourself or others,
his/her weight off of the seat for have the vehicle serviced right
a period of time. When the passenger sensing
away. See Airbag Readiness
system has allowed the airbags to
. The right front passenger seat is Light on page 5‑13 for more
be enabled, the on indicator will light
occupied by a smaller person, and stay lit to remind you that the information, including important
such as a child who has airbags are active. safety information.
outgrown child restraints.
.
For some children who have
Or, if there is a critical problem outgrown child restraints and for If the On Indicator is Lit for a
with the airbag system or the very small adults, the passenger Child Restraint
passenger sensing system. sensing system may or may not turn If a child restraint has been installed
When the passenger sensing off the right front passenger frontal and the on indicator is lit:
system has turned off the right front airbag and seat-mounted side
passenger frontal airbag and seat‐ impact airbag, depending upon the 1. Turn the vehicle off.
mounted side impact airbag, the off person’s seating posture and body 2. Remove the child restraint from
indicator will light and stay lit to build. Everyone in the vehicle the vehicle.
remind you that the airbags are off. who has outgrown child restraints
See Passenger Airbag Status should wear a safety belt 3. Remove any additional items
Indicator on page 5‑13. properly — whether or not there is from the seat such as blankets,
an airbag for that person. cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

4. Reinstall the child restraint If the on indicator is still lit with enable the right front passenger
following the directions provided an infant present in a child frontal airbag and seat-mounted
by the child restraint restraint, secure the child side impact airbag:
manufacturer and refer to restraint in a rear seat position in 1. Turn the vehicle off.
Securing Child Restraints (Rear the vehicle and see your dealer.
Seat) on page 3‑55 or Securing 2. Remove any additional material
Child Restraints (Front If the Off Indicator is Lit for an from the seat, such as blankets,
Passenger Seat) on page 3‑57. Adult-Size Occupant cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers.
5. If, after reinstalling the child
restraint and restarting the 3. Place the seatback in the fully
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, upright position.
turn the vehicle off. Then slightly 4. Have the person sit upright in
recline the vehicle seatback and the seat, centered on the seat
adjust the seat cushion, cushion, with legs comfortably
if adjustable, to make sure that extended.
the vehicle seatback is not
pushing the child restraint into 5. Restart the vehicle and have the
the seat cushion. person remain in this position for
two to three minutes after the on
Also make sure the child indicator is lit.
restraint is not trapped under the
vehicle head restraint. If this
If a person of adult-size is sitting in
happens, adjust the head
the right front passenger seat, but
restraint. See Head Restraints
the off indicator is lit, it could be
on page 3‑2.
because that person is not sitting
6. Restart the vehicle. properly in the seat. If this happens,
use the following steps to allow the
system to detect that person and
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Additional Factors Affecting

System Operation { WARNING { WARNING
Safety belts help keep the Stowing of articles under the For up to 10 seconds after the
passenger in position on the seat passenger seat or between the ignition is turned off and the
during vehicle maneuvers and passenger seat cushion and battery is disconnected, an airbag
braking, which helps the passenger seatback may interfere with the can still inflate during improper
sensing system maintain the proper operation of the passenger service. You can be injured if you
passenger airbag status. See sensing system. are close to an airbag when it
“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints” inflates. Avoid yellow connectors.
in the Index for additional They are probably part of the
information about the importance of Servicing the airbag system. Be sure to follow
proper restraint use. Airbag-Equipped Vehicle proper service procedures, and
A thick layer of additional material, Airbags affect how the vehicle make sure the person performing
such as a blanket or cushion, should be serviced. There are parts work for you is qualified to do so.
or aftermarket equipment such as of the airbag system in several
seat covers, seat heaters, and seat places around the vehicle. Your
massagers can affect how well the dealer and the service manual have
passenger sensing system information about servicing the
operates. We recommend that you vehicle and the airbag system. To
not use seat covers or other purchase a service manual, see
aftermarket equipment except when Service Publications Ordering
approved by GM for your specific Information on page 13‑15.
vehicle. See Adding Equipment to
the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 3‑37 for more information
about modifications that can affect
how the system operates.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Adding Equipment to the seat. The passenger sensing manual. See Customer
system may not operate properly Satisfaction Procedure
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle if the original seat trim is (U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑1
Q: Is there anything I might add replaced with non-GM covers, or Customer Satisfaction
to or change about the vehicle upholstery or trim, or with Procedure (Mexico) on
that could keep the airbags GM covers, upholstery or trim page 13‑3.
from working properly? designed for a different vehicle. Q: Because I have a disability,
Any object, such as an I have to get my vehicle
A: Yes. If you add things that
aftermarket seat heater or a modified. How can I find out
change the vehicle's frame,
comfort enhancing pad or whether this will affect my
bumper system, height, front end
device, installed under or on top airbag system?
or side sheet metal, they may
of the seat fabric, could also
keep the airbag system from A: If you have questions, call
interfere with the operation of
working properly. Changing or Customer Assistance. The
the passenger sensing system.
moving any parts of the front phone numbers and addresses
This could either prevent proper
seats, safety belts, the airbag for Customer Assistance are in
deployment of the passenger
sensing and diagnostic module, Step Two of the Customer
airbag(s) or prevent the
steering wheel, instrument Satisfaction Procedure in this
passenger sensing system from
panel, roof-rail airbag modules, manual. See Customer
properly turning off the
ceiling headliner or pillar garnish Satisfaction Procedure (U.S. and
passenger airbag(s). See
trim, front sensors, side impact Canada) on page 13‑1 or
Passenger Sensing System on
sensors, or airbag wiring can Customer Satisfaction
page 3‑32.
affect the operation of the airbag Procedure (Mexico) on
system. If you have any questions, call
Customer Assistance. The page 13‑3.
In addition, the vehicle has a
phone numbers and addresses
passenger sensing system for
for Customer Assistance are in
the right front passenger
Step Two of the Customer
position, which includes sensors
Satisfaction Procedure in this
that are part of the passenger's I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

In addition, your dealer and the Replacing Airbag System If an airbag inflates, you will need to
service manual have information replace airbag system parts. See
about the location of the airbag
Parts After a Crash your dealer for service.
sensors, sensing and diagnostic If the airbag readiness light stays on
module and airbag wiring. { WARNING after the vehicle is started or comes
A crash can damage the on when you are driving, the airbag
Airbag System Check system may not work properly. Have
airbag systems in the vehicle.
The airbag system does not need A damaged airbag system the vehicle serviced right away. See
regularly scheduled maintenance or Airbag Readiness Light on
may not work properly and
replacement. Make sure the airbag page 5‑13 for more information.
may not protect you and your
readiness light is working. See passenger(s) in a crash, resulting
Airbag Readiness Light on in serious injury or even death. To
page 5‑13 for more information. help make sure the airbag
Notice: If an airbag covering is systems are working properly
damaged, opened, or broken, the after a crash, have them
airbag may not work properly. Do inspected and any necessary
not open or break the airbag replacements made as soon as
coverings. If there are any possible.
opened or broken airbag covers,
have the airbag covering and/or
airbag module replaced. For the
location of the airbag modules,
see What Makes an Airbag
Inflate? on page 3‑30. See your
dealer for service.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


. Can proper safety belt fit be
Child Restraints The manufacturer's instructions that
come with the booster seat state the maintained for the length of the
weight and height limitations for that trip? If yes, continue. If no,
Older Children booster. Use a booster seat with a return to the booster seat.
lap-shoulder belt until the child Q: What is the proper way to
passes the fit test below: wear safety belts?
. Sit all the way back on the seat. A: An older child should wear a
Do the knees bend at the seat lap-shoulder belt and get the
edge? If yes, continue. If no, additional restraint a shoulder
return to the booster seat. belt can provide. The shoulder
. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. belt should not cross the face or
Does the shoulder belt rest on neck. The lap belt should fit
the shoulder? If yes, continue. snugly below the hips, just
If no, try using the rear safety touching the top of the thighs.
belt comfort guide. See “Rear This applies belt force to the
Safety Belt Comfort Guides” child's pelvic bones in a crash.
under Lap-Shoulder Belt on It should never be worn over the
Older children who have outgrown abdomen, which could cause
booster seats should wear the severe or even fatal internal
If the shoulder belt still does not
vehicle safety belts. injuries in a crash.
rest on the shoulder, then return
to the booster seat. Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort
. Does the lap belt fit low and Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
snug on the hips, touching the page 3‑18.
thighs? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

According to accident statistics,

children and infants are safer when WARNING (Continued)
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint might also slide under the lap
system secured in a rear seating belt. The belt force would then be
position. applied right on the abdomen.
That could cause serious or fatal
In a crash, children who are not injuries. The shoulder belt should
buckled up can strike other people go over the shoulder and across
who are buckled up, or can be
the chest.
thrown out of the vehicle. Older
children need to use safety belts
properly.
{ WARNING { WARNING
Never do this.
Never do this.
Never allow a child to wear the
Never allow two children to wear
safety belt with the shoulder belt
the same safety belt. The safety
behind their back. A child can be
belt can not properly spread the
seriously injured by not wearing
impact forces. In a crash, the two
the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a
children can be crushed together
crash, the child would not be
and seriously injured. A safety
restrained by the shoulder belt.
belt must be used by only one
The child could move too far
person at a time.
forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Infants and Young Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts offer

WARNING (Continued)
protection for adults and older
Children children, but not for young children
Everyone in a vehicle needs and infants. Neither the vehicle's 110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's
protection! This includes infants and safety belt system nor its airbag arms. An infant should be
all other children. Neither the system is designed for them. Every secured in an appropriate
distance traveled nor the age and time infants and young children ride restraint.
size of the traveler changes the in vehicles, they should have the
need, for everyone, to use safety protection provided by appropriate
restraints. In fact, the law in every child restraints.
state in the United States and in Children who are not restrained
every Canadian province says properly can strike other people,
children up to some age must be or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
restrained while in a vehicle.
{ WARNING { WARNING
Never do this.
Children can be seriously injured
or strangled if a shoulder belt is Never hold an infant or a child
wrapped around their neck and while riding in a vehicle. Due to
the safety belt continues to crash forces, an infant or a child
tighten. Never leave children will become so heavy it is not
unattended in a vehicle and never possible to hold it during a crash.
allow children to play with the For example, in a crash at only
safety belts. 40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)
infant will suddenly become a
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

For most basic types of child

{ WARNING restraints, there are many
different models available. When
Never do this. purchasing a child restraint, be
Children who are up against, sure it is designed to be used in
or very close to, any airbag when a motor vehicle. If it is, the
it inflates can be seriously injured restraint will have a label saying
or killed. Never put a rear-facing that it meets federal motor
child restraint in the right front vehicle safety standards.
seat. Secure a rear-facing child The restraint manufacturer's
restraint in a rear seat. It is also instructions that come with the
better to secure a forward-facing restraint state the weight and
child restraint in a rear seat. If you Q: What are the different types of height limitations for a particular
must secure a forward-facing add-on child restraints? child restraint. In addition, there
child restraint in the right front are many kinds of restraints
A: Add-on child restraints, which
seat, always move the front available for children with
are purchased by the vehicle
passenger seat as far back as it special needs.
owner, are available in four basic
will go. types. Selection of a particular
restraint should take into
consideration not only the child's
weight, height, and age but also
whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor
vehicle in which it will be used.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Child Restraint Systems

{ WARNING { WARNING
To reduce the risk of neck and A young child's hip bones are still
head injury during a crash, infants so small that the vehicle's regular
need complete support. This is safety belt may not remain low on
because an infant's neck is not the hip bones, as it should.
fully developed and its head Instead, it may settle up around
weighs so much compared with the child's abdomen. In a crash,
the rest of its body. In a crash, an the belt would apply force on a
infant in a rear-facing child body area that is unprotected by
restraint settles into the restraint, any bony structure. This alone
so the crash forces can be could cause serious or fatal
distributed across the strongest injuries. To reduce the risk of
part of an infant's body, the back serious or fatal injuries during a (A) Rear‐Facing Infant Seat
and shoulders. Infants should crash, young children should A rear-facing infant seat (A)
always be secured in rear-facing always be secured in appropriate provides restraint with the seating
child restraints. child restraints. surface against the back of the
infant.
The harness system holds the infant
in place and, in a crash, acts to
keep the infant positioned in the
restraint.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Securing an Add-On Child

Restraint in the Vehicle
{ WARNING
A child can be seriously injured or
killed in a crash if the child
restraint is not properly secured in
the vehicle. Secure the child
restraint properly in the vehicle
using the vehicle safety belt or
LATCH system, following the
(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat (C) Booster Seats instructions that came with that
A forward-facing child seat (B) A booster seat (C) is a child restraint child restraint and the instructions
provides restraint for the child's designed to improve the fit of the in this manual.
body with the harness. vehicle's safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child To help reduce the chance of injury,
to see out the window. the child restraint must be secured
in the vehicle. Child restraint
systems must be secured in vehicle
seats by lap belts or the lap belt
portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by
the LATCH system. See Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH System) on page 3‑48 for
more information. Children can be
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

endangered in a crash if the child Administration (NHTSA) website to Where to Put the
restraint is not properly secured in locate the nearest child safety seat
the vehicle. inspection station. For CPST
Restraint
When securing an add-on child availability in Canada, check with According to accident statistics,
restraint, refer to the instructions Transport Canada or the Provincial children and infants are safer when
that come with the restraint which Ministry of Transportation office. properly restrained in a child
may be on the restraint itself or in a restraint system or infant restraint
Securing the Child Within the system secured in a rear seating
booklet, or both, and to this manual. Child Restraint
The child restraint instructions are position.
important, so if they are not We recommend that children and
available, obtain a replacement { WARNING child restraints be secured in a rear
copy from the manufacturer. A child can be seriously injured or seat, including: an infant or a child
Keep in mind that an unsecured killed in a crash if the child is not riding in a rear-facing child restraint;
child restraint can move around in a a child riding in a forward-facing
properly secured in the child
collision or sudden stop and injure child seat; an older child riding in a
restraint. Secure the child
people in the vehicle. Be sure to booster seat; and children, who are
properly following the instructions large enough, using safety belts.
properly secure any child restraint that came with that child restraint.
in the vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
In some areas of the United States
and Canada, Certified Child
Passenger Safety Technicians
(CPSTs) are available to inspect
and demonstrate how to correctly
use and install child restraints. In
the U.S., refer to the National
Highway Traffic Safety
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

A label on your sun visor says, Child restraints and booster seats
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in WARNING (Continued) vary considerably in size, and some
the front.” This is because the risk to may fit in certain seating positions
the rear-facing child is so great, deploy under some unusual better than others. Always make
if the airbag deploys. circumstance, even though it is sure the child restraint is properly
turned off. secured.
{ WARNING Secure rear-facing child Depending on where you place the
restraints in a rear seat, even if child restraint and the size of the
A child in a rear-facing child the airbag is off. If you secure a child restraint, you may not be able
restraint can be seriously forward-facing child restraint in to access adjacent safety belt
injured or killed if the right front the right front seat, always move assemblies or LATCH anchors for
passenger airbag inflates. the front passenger seat as far additional passengers or child
This is because the back of the back as it will go. It is better to restraints. Adjacent seating
rear-facing child restraint would secure the child restraint in a positions should not be used if the
be very close to the inflating rear seat. child restraint prevents access to or
airbag. A child in a forward-facing interferes with the routing of the
child restraint can be seriously See Passenger Sensing System safety belt.
injured or killed if the right front on page 3‑32 for additional
information. Wherever you install a child
passenger airbag inflates and the restraint, be sure to secure the child
passenger seat is in a forward restraint properly.
position. When securing a child restraint in a
rear seating position, study the Keep in mind that an unsecured
Even if the passenger sensing child restraint can move around in a
instructions that came with your
system has turned off the right child restraint to make sure it is collision or sudden stop and injure
front passenger frontal airbag, no compatible with this vehicle. people in the vehicle. Be sure to
system is fail-safe. No one can properly secure any child restraint in
guarantee that an airbag will not your vehicle — even when no child
(Continued) is in it.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

If you secure a child restraint in the

left or center rear seat using
LATCH, review the following
illustrations. Depending on where
you place the child restraint, you
may not be able to access certain
safety belt assemblies or LATCH A. Occupant prohibited A. Child restraint or occupant
anchors for additional passengers or using safety belt
child restraints. B. Child restraint using LATCH
Configurations for Use of Child

Restraints
A. Child restraint using LATCH A. Child restraint or occupant

using safety belt
B. Child restraint or occupant
using safety belt B. Child restraint using LATCH
A. Child restraint using LATCH
C. Child restraint using safety belt
B. Child restraint or occupant or LATCH or occupant using
using safety belt safety belt
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Lower Anchors and When installing a child restraint with Lower Anchors
a top tether, you must also use
Tethers for Children either the lower anchors or the
(LATCH System) safety belts to properly secure the
The LATCH system holds a child child restraint. A child restraint must
restraint during driving or in a crash. never be installed using only the top
This system is designed to make tether and anchor.
installation of a child restraint easier. In order to use the LATCH system in
The LATCH system uses anchors in your vehicle, you need a child
the vehicle and attachments on the restraint that has LATCH
child restraint that are made for use attachments. The child restraint
with the LATCH system. manufacturer will provide you with Lower anchors (A) are metal bars
instructions on how to use the child built into the vehicle. There are two
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible lower anchors for each LATCH
child restraint is properly installed restraint and its attachments. The
following explains how to attach a seating position that will
using the anchors, or use the accommodate a child restraint with
vehicle's safety belts to secure the child restraint with these
attachments in your vehicle. lower attachments (B).
restraint, following the instructions
that came with that restraint, and Not all vehicle seating positions or
also the instructions in this manual. child restraints have lower anchors
and attachments or top tether
anchors and attachments.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Top Tether Anchor Your child restraint may have a Lower Anchor and Top Tether
single tether (A) or a dual Anchor Locations
tether (C). Either will have a
single attachment (B) to secure
the top tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints with top
tethers are designed for use with or
without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top
tether always to be attached. In
Canada, the law requires that
A top tether (A, C) anchors the forward-facing child restraints have
top of the child restraint to the a top tether, and that the tether be
vehicle. A top tether anchor is built attached. Be sure to read and follow
into the vehicle. The top tether the instructions for your child
attachment (B) on the child restraint Rear Seat
restraint.
connects to the top tether anchor in i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating
the vehicle in order to reduce the positions with top tether anchors.
forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving or in j (Lower Anchor): Seating
a crash. positions with two lower anchors.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Do not secure a child restraint in a

position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be attached, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top tether
To assist you in locating the lower must be attached.
anchors, each rear anchor position According to accident statistics,
has a label, near the crease children and infants are safer when
between the seatback and the seat properly restrained in a child
cushion. restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
The top tether anchors are located position. See Where to Put the
under the covers, behind the rear Restraint on page 3‑45 for
seat, on the filler panel. Be sure to additional information.
use an anchor located on the same
side of the vehicle as the seating
position where the child restraint will
To assist you in locating the top be placed.
tether anchors, the top tether anchor
symbol is located on the cover.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Securing a Child Restraint Notice: Do not let the LATCH

Designed for the LATCH WARNING (Continued) attachments rub against the
System vehicle’s safety belts. This may
restraint to a single anchor could damage these parts. If necessary,
cause the anchor or attachment move buckled safety belts to
{ WARNING to come loose or even break avoid rubbing the LATCH
during a crash. A child or others attachments.
If a LATCH-type child restraint is could be injured. To reduce the
not attached to anchors, the child risk of serious or fatal injuries Do not fold the empty rear seat
restraint will not be able to protect with a safety belt buckled. This
during a crash, attach only one
the child correctly. In a crash, the could damage the safety belt or
child restraint per anchor.
child could be seriously injured or the seat. Unbuckle and return the
killed. Install a LATCH-type child safety belt to its stowed position,
restraint properly using the before folding the seat.
anchors, or use the vehicle safety { WARNING If you need to secure more than one
belts to secure the restraint, child restraint in the rear seat, see
following the instructions that Children can be seriously injured Where to Put the Restraint on
came with the child restraint and or strangled if a shoulder belt is page 3‑45. Depending on where you
the instructions in this manual. wrapped around their neck and place the child restraint, you may
the safety belt continues to not be able to access certain safety
tighten. Buckle any unused safety belt assemblies or LATCH anchors
belts behind the child restraint so for additional passengers or child
{ WARNING children cannot reach them. Pull restraints.
the shoulder belt all the way out
Do not attach more than one child of the retractor to set the lock,
restraint to a single anchor. if the vehicle has one, after the
Attaching more than one child child restraint has been installed.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

You cannot secure three child secure the restraints. Some

restraints using the LATCH anchors restraints also use another vehicle
in the rear seat at the same time, anchor to secure a top tether.
but you can install two of them. 1. Attach and tighten the lower
If you want to do this, install one attachments to the lower
LATCH child restraint in the anchors. If the child restraint
passenger-side position, and install does not have lower
the other one either in the attachments or the desired
driver-side position or in the center seating position does not have
position. Refer to the following lower anchors, secure the child
illustration to learn which anchors restraint with the top tether and
to use. the safety belts. Refer to your
A. Passenger Side Rear Seat child restraint manufacturer
Lower Anchors instructions and the instructions
B. Center Rear Seat Lower in this manual.
Anchors 1.1. Find the lower anchors for
C. Driver Side Rear Seat Lower the desired seating
Anchors position.
Make sure to attach the child 1.2. Put the child restraint on
restraint at the proper anchor the seat.
location. 1.3. Attach and tighten the lower
This system is designed to make attachments on the child
installation of child restraints easier. restraint to the lower
When using lower anchors, do not anchors.
use the vehicle's safety belts.
Instead use the vehicle's anchors
and child restraint
I
nfor
mat
ioattachments
nPr
ovi
dedby: to

2. If the child restraint manufacturer 2.3. Route, attach, and tighten

recommends that the top tether the top tether according to
be attached, attach and tighten the child restraint
the top tether to the top tether instructions and the
anchor, if equipped. Refer to the following instructions:
child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
Open the cover to expose If the position you are using
the anchor. does not have a headrest
2.2. If the position you are using or head restraint and you
has an adjustable headrest are using a dual tether,
or head restraint , raise it. route the tether over the
See Head Restraints on seatback.
page 3‑2. If the position you are using
does not have a headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a single tether,
route the tether over the
seatback.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

3. Before placing a child in the

child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the
LATCH path and attempt to
move it side‐to‐side and
back‐and‐forth. There should be
no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of
movement for proper installation.
If the position you are using
has an adjustable headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a single tether, If the position you are using
route the tether under the has an adjustable headrest
headrest or head restraint or head restraint and you
and in between the are using a dual tether
headrest or head restraint route the tether under the
posts. See Head Restraints headrest or head restraint
on page 3‑2. and in between the
headrest or head restraint
posts. See Head Restraints
on page 3‑2.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Replacing LATCH System If the vehicle has the LATCH system Children (LATCH System) on
and it was being used during a page 3‑48 for top tether anchor
Parts After a Crash crash, new LATCH system parts locations.
may be needed. Do not secure a child seat in a
{ WARNING New parts and repairs may be position without a top tether anchor
A crash can damage the LATCH necessary even if the LATCH if a national or local law requires
system in the vehicle. A damaged system was not being used at the that the top tether be anchored, or if
LATCH system may not properly time of the crash. the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top strap
secure the child restraint,
resulting in serious injury or even Securing Child Restraints must be anchored.
death in a crash. To help make (Rear Seat) In Canada, the law requires that
sure the LATCH system is forward-facing child restraints have
When securing a child restraint in a
working properly after a crash, a top tether, and that the tether be
rear seating position, study the
see your dealer to have the attached.
instructions that came with the child
system inspected and any restraint to make sure it is If the child restraint does not have
necessary replacements made as compatible with this vehicle. the LATCH system, you will be
soon as possible. using the safety belt to secure the
If the child restraint has the LATCH
child restraint in this position. Be
system, see Lower Anchors and
sure to follow the instructions that
Tethers for Children (LATCH
came with the child restraint. Secure
System) on page 3‑48 for how and
the child in the child restraint when
where to install the child restraint
and as the instructions say.
using LATCH. If a child restraint is
secured in the vehicle using a
safety belt and it uses a top tether,
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

If more than one child restraint

needs to be installed in the rear
seat, be sure to read Where to Put
the Restraint on page 3‑45.
1. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the lap and shoulder portions of
the vehicle's safety belt through
or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show
you how.
3. Push the latch plate into the 4. Pull the shoulder belt all the way
buckle until it clicks. out of the retractor to set the
Position the release button on lock. When the retractor lock is
the buckle so that the safety belt set, the belt can be tightened but
could be quickly unbuckled if not pulled out of the retractor.
necessary.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

6. If the child restraint has a top Securing Child Restraints

tether, follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions
(Front Passenger Seat)
regarding the use of the top This vehicle has airbags. A rear
tether. See Lower Anchors and seat is a safer place to secure a
Tethers for Children (LATCH forward-facing child restraint. See
System) on page 3‑48 for more Where to Put the Restraint on
information. page 3‑45.
7. Before placing a child in the In addition, the vehicle has a
child restraint, make sure it is passenger sensing system which is
securely held in place. To check, designed to turn off the right front
grasp the child restraint at the passenger frontal airbag and
5. To tighten the belt, push down safety belt path and attempt to seat-mounted side impact airbag
on the child restraint, pull the move it side‐to‐side and under certain conditions. See
shoulder portion of the belt to back‐and‐forth. When the child Passenger Sensing System on
tighten the lap portion of the belt, restraint is properly installed, page 3‑32 and Passenger Airbag
and feed the shoulder belt back there should be no more than Status Indicator on page 5‑13 for
into the retractor. When installing 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement. more information, including
a forward-facing child restraint, it To remove the child restraint, important safety information.
may be helpful to use your knee unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
to push down on the child let it return to the stowed position.
restraint as you tighten the belt. If the top tether is attached to a top
Try to pull the belt out of the tether anchor, disconnect it.
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 4 and 5.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

A label on the sun visor says, If the child restraint has the LATCH
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in WARNING (Continued) system, see Lower Anchors and
the front.” This is because the risk to Tethers for Children (LATCH
the rear-facing child is so great, Even if the passenger sensing System) on page 3‑48 for how and
if the airbag deploys. system has turned off the right where to install the child restraint
front passenger frontal airbag, no using LATCH. If a child restraint is
system is fail-safe. No one can
{ WARNING guarantee that an airbag will not
secured using a safety belt and it
uses a top tether, see Lower
A child in a rear-facing child deploy under some unusual Anchors and Tethers for Children
restraint can be seriously injured circumstance, even though it is (LATCH System) on page 3‑48 for
or killed if the right front turned off. top tether anchor locations.
passenger airbag inflates. This is Secure rear-facing child Do not secure a child seat in a
because the back of the restraints in a rear seat, even if position without a top tether anchor
rear-facing child restraint would the airbag is off. If you secure a if a national or local law requires
be very close to the inflating forward-facing child restraint in that the top tether be anchored, or if
airbag. A child in a forward-facing the right front seat, always move the instructions that come with the
child restraint can be seriously the front passenger seat as far child restraint say that the top strap
injured or killed if the right front back as it will go. It is better to must be anchored.
passenger airbag inflates and the secure the child restraint in a In Canada, the law requires that
passenger seat is in a forward rear seat. forward-facing child restraints have
position. a top tether, and that the tether be
See Passenger Sensing System
(Continued) attached.
on page 3‑32 for additional
information.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

You will be using the lap-shoulder

belt to secure the child restraint in
this position. Follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it
will go before securing the
forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag
and seat-mounted side impact
airbag, the off indicator on the
passenger airbag status 4. Push the latch plate into the 5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way
indicator should light and stay lit buckle until it clicks. out of the retractor to set the
when you start the vehicle. See Position the release button on lock. When the retractor lock is
Passenger Airbag Status the buckle so that the safety belt set, the belt can be tightened but
Indicator on page 5‑13. could be quickly unbuckled if not pulled out of the retractor.
2. Put the child restraint on necessary.
the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the lap and shoulder portions of
the vehicle's safety belt through
or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show
you how.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

7. Before placing a child in the

child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the
safety belt path and attempt to
move it side‐to‐side and
back‐and‐forth. When the child
restraint is properly installed,
there should be no more than
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
If the airbags are off, the off
indicator in the passenger airbag
6. To tighten the belt, push down status indicator will come on and
on the child restraint, pull the stay on when the vehicle is started.
shoulder portion of the belt to If a child restraint has been installed
tighten the lap portion of the belt, and the on indicator is lit, see “If the
and feed the shoulder belt back On Indicator is Lit for a Child
into the retractor. When installing Restraint ” under Passenger
a forward-facing child restraint, it Sensing System on page 3‑32 for
may be helpful to use your knee more information.
to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt. To remove the child restraint,
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
Try to pull the belt out of the let it return to the stowed position.
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 5 and 6.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Storage 4-1
Storage Storage Glove Box

Compartments Pull the handle up to open.
Storage Compartments Cupholders
Instrument Panel Storage . . . . 4-1 Instrument Panel Storage
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Removable cupholders are located
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 in front of the center console. See
Front Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 “Center Console Storage Area” to
Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-3 access them. Press and hold the
tab at the rear of the cupholders and
Additional Storage Features lift up and rearward to remove the
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 cupholders. This disengages the
two forward tabs.
To reinstall, place the two forward
tabs into the slots and push down
on the rear of the cupholder.
An instrument panel storage area,

with a removable liner, is located
above the radio. Slide the latch
toward the rear of the vehicle to
open the storage area.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

4-2 Storage
Front Storage
For vehicles with rear seat A driver side storage compratment

cupholders, access them by pulling is located near the steering column
down on the door at the back of the Storage is available in front of the on the bottom of the instrument
center console. shift lever. Open it by pushing on panel. Pull the cover down to open.
the bottom of the door. Pull out to remove for cleaning.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Storage 4-3
Center Console Storage Additional Storage

The center console storage has a Features
tray and a main storage area. Pull
up on the driver side latch to access
the tray. Pull up on the passenger
Convenience Net
side latch to access the main Use the rear convenience net, to
storage. It is equipped with a store small. The net should not be
removable divider and a storage used to store heavy loads.
pocket may be at the rear of the
center console.
The armrest on top of the center
console can be adjusted to a
rearward, middle, and forward
position. Pull or push the front of the
armrest to adjust to the desired
position.
An additional storage area is in front
of the main storage. Push down and
then forward on the rear of the
cover to access. It has a storage
tray and removable cupholders.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

4-4 Storage
2 NOTES
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Instruments and Controls 5-1
Instruments and Engine Coolant Temperature

Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Information Displays
Driver Information
Controls Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-12
Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-13
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Passenger Airbag Status Vehicle Messages

Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Controls Brake System Messages . . . . 5-26
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2 Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-15
Malfunction Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-26
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2 Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Brake System Warning Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-26
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-3 Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-26
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-27
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-27
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Electronic Stability Control Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Warning Lights, Gauges, and (ESC)/Traction Control Ride Control System
Indicators System (TCS) Indicator/ Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-29
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Engine Coolant Temperature Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-29
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Vehicle Reminder
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-21 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 5-30
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Vehicle Personalization
Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-30
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

5-2 Instruments and Controls
Controls 3. Pull or push the steering wheel e+/e − (Volume): Press to

closer or away from you. increase or to decrease the radio
Steering Wheel 4. Pull the lever up to lock the volume.
Adjustment steering wheel in place. w / x c (Next / Previous):
Do not adjust the steering wheel Press to change radio stations,
while driving. select tracks on a CD, or to select
tracks and navigate folders on an
Steering Wheel Controls iPod® or USB device.
To change radio stations:
. Press and release w or x c
to go to the next or previous
radio station stored as a preset.
. Press and hold w or x c to
go to the next or previous radio
station in the selected band with
a strong signal.
The lever is located on the left side To select tracks on a CD:
of the steering wheel column.
Press and release w or x c to
To adjust the steering wheel:
go to the next or previous track.
1. Pull the lever down. Vehicles with audio steering wheel
2. Move the steering wheel up controls could differ depending on
or down. the vehicle's options. Some audio
controls can be adjusted at the
steering wheel.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

To select tracks on an iPod or USB 3. Press and release w or x c Horn

device: to scroll up or down the list. Press near the horn symbols or
1. Press and hold w or x c . To select a folder, press press on the steering wheel pad to
while listening to a song until the and hold w when the folder sound the horn.
contents of the current folder is highlighted.
display on the radio display.
. To go back further in the
Windshield Wiper/Washer
2. Press and release w or x c folder list, press and
to scroll up or down the list, then hold x c.
press and hold w to play the
highlighted track.
x c (End): Press to reject an
incoming call, or end a current call.
To navigate folders on an iPod or b g (Mute / Voice Recognition):
USB device: Press to silence the vehicle
1. Press and hold w or x c speakers only. Press again to turn The windshield wiper lever is on the
while listening to a song until the the sound on. right side of the steering wheel.
contents of the current folder For vehicles with Bluetooth® or Move the lever to control the
display on the radio display. OnStar® systems press and windshield wipers.
2. Press and hold x c to go hold b g for longer than 9 (Off): Turns the windshield
back to the previous folder list. two seconds to interact with wipers off.
those systems. See Bluetooth on
page 7‑25 and the OnStar Owner's
& (Intermittent; Speed Sensitive
Wipers): For intermittent or speed
Guide for more information.
sensitive operation. While in this
position, turn the x band up or
down to vary frequency.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

The amount of delay time varies As an added safety feature, if the Compass
between wiping cycles due to the wipers are on for more than
delay setting selected or the speed 15 seconds, the vehicle's Compass Operation
of the vehicle. As vehicle speed is headlamps turn on automatically.
increased or decreased, the wiper They turn off 15 seconds after the Press O on the rearview mirror to
interval also increases or wipers are turned off. turn the compass display on or off.
decreases. When the ignition and the compass
Windshield Washer
6 (Low Speed): Slow wipes. feature are on, the compass
Press the button at the end of the displays the current compass
1 (High Speed): Fast wipes. windshield wiper lever until the direction after a few seconds.
8 (Mist): Single wipe, move the washers begin.
Compass Calibration
lever down, then release it. Several
wipes, hold the lever down. { WARNING If after a few seconds the display
does not show a compass direction,
Clear ice and snow from the wiper In freezing weather, do not use (N for North for example), there may
blades before using them. the washer until the windshield is be a strong magnetic field
If frozen to the windshield, carefully warmed. Otherwise the washer interfering with the compass.
loosen or thaw them. Damaged fluid can form ice on the Interference can be caused by a
wiper blades should be replaced. windshield, blocking your vision. magnetic antenna mount, note pad
Heavy snow or ice can overload the holder, or similar object. If the
wiper motor. A circuit breaker stops letter C appears in the compass
When the button is released, the window, the compass may need to
the motor until it cools. If the motor washers stop, but the wipers
gets stuck, turn the wipers off, clear be reset or calibrated.
continue to wipe about three times
away the snow or ice, and then turn or resume the previous speed. The mirror can be calibrated by
the wipers back on. driving the vehicle very slowly, in
circles, until the display reads a
direction.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Compass Variance Clock

The mirror is set in zone eight. It is Without Date Display
necessary to adjust the compass to
compensate for compass variance if AM/FM Base Radio with a Single
the vehicle is driven outside CD Player
zone eight. Under certain To set the time:
circumstances, such as a long
distance, cross-country trip, it is 1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/
necessary to adjust the compass ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.
variance. Press the O knob to turn the
To adjust for compass variance: radio on.
1. Find your current location and 2. Press the H button until the hour
2. Press and hold O until a zone
variance zone number on the begins flashing on the display.
number displays.
zone map that follows. Press the H button a second
3. Once the zone number displays, time and the minute begins
press O repeatedly until the flashing on the display.
correct zone number is reached.
3. While either the hour or the
If C appears in the compass
minute numbers are flashing,
window, the compass may need
calibration. See “Compass turn the f knob to increase or
Calibration” listed previously. decrease the time.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

4. Press the H button again until 2. Press the H button and the HR, The date does not automatically
the clock display stops flashing MIN, MM, DD, YYYY (hour, display. To see the date press H
to set the currently displayed minute, month, day, and year) while the radio is on. The date
time; otherwise, the flashing displays. with display times out after a
stops after five seconds and the 3. Press the softkey located below few seconds and goes back to the
current time displayed is any one of the tabs that you normal radio and time display.
automatically set. want to change. To change the time default setting
To change the time default setting 4. To increase the time or date do from 12 hour to 24 hour or to
from 12 hour to 24 hour, press one of the following: change the date default setting from
the H button until 12H or 24H is month/day/year to day/month/year:
displayed. Once 12H or 24H is
. Press the softkey located
below the selected tab. 1. Press the H button and then the
displayed, turn the f knob to the softkey located below the
desired option to select the setting. . Press the ¨ SEEK, or forward arrow label. Once the
Press the H button again to apply \ FWD button. time 12H and 24H, and the date
the setting, or let the screen MM/DD/YYYY (month, day, and
time out.
. Turn the f knob clockwise. year) and DD/MM/YYYY (day,
5. To decrease the time or date do month, and year) displays.
With Date Display one of the following: 2. Press the softkey located below
Radio with CD (MP3) and USB the desired option.
Port, and Radio with Single CD
. Press the © SEEK or
(MP3) Player s REV button. 3. Press the H button again to
apply the selected default, or let
To set the time and date: . Turn the f knob
the screen time out.
counterclockwise.
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.
Press the O knob to turn the
radio on. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Power Outlets Notice: Leaving electrical Power Outlet 115 Volt

equipment plugged in for an Alternating Current
Accessory power outlets can be extended period of time while the
used to plug in electrical equipment, vehicle is off will drain the The vehicle may have a power
such as a cell phone or MP3 player. battery. Always unplug electrical outlet that can be used to plug in
equipment when not in use and electrical equipment that uses a
There are two accessory power
do not plug in equipment that maximum limit of 150 watts.
outlets. One accessory power outlet
is located inside the storage bin exceeds the maximum 20 ampere
below the climate controls and the rating.
other outlet is on the rear of the Certain electrical accessories may
center storage console. not be compatible with the
Remove the cover to access and accessory power outlet and could
replace when not in use. The overload vehicle or adapter fuses.
accessory power outlet is If a problem is experienced, see
operational at all times. your dealer.
When adding electrical equipment,
{ WARNING be sure to follow the proper
installation instructions included with
Power is always supplied to the the equipment. See Add-On
outlets. Do not leave electrical Electrical Equipment on page 9‑47. The power outlet is located on the
equipment plugged in when the
Notice: Hanging heavy rear of the center console.
vehicle is not in use because the equipment from the power outlet
vehicle could catch fire and cause An indicator light on the outlet
can cause damage not covered comes on when in use. The ignition
injury or death. by the vehicle warranty. The must be in ON/RUN and equipment
power outlets are designed for requiring less than 150 watts is
accessory power plugs only, such plugged into the outlet, and no
as cell phone charge cords. system fault is detected.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

If you try to connect equipment Warning Lights, Gauges can indicate when there
using more than 150 watts or a could be a problem with a vehicle
system fault is detected, a Gauges, and function. Often gauges and warning
protection circuit shuts off the power lights work together to indicate a
supply and the indicator light turns
Indicators problem with the vehicle.
off. To reset the circuit, unplug the Warning lights and gauges can When one of the warning lights
item and plug it back in or turn the signal that something is wrong comes on and stays on while
Remote Accessory Power (RAP) off before it becomes serious enough driving, or when one of the gauges
and then back on. See Retained to cause an expensive repair or shows there may be a problem,
Accessory Power (RAP) on replacement. Paying attention to the check the section that explains what
page 9‑20. The power restarts when warning lights and gauges could to do. Follow this manual's advice.
equipment that operates within the prevent injury. Waiting to do repairs can be costly
limit is plugged into the outlet and a Warning lights come on when there and even dangerous.
system fault is not detected. could be a problem with a vehicle
The power outlet is not designed for function. Some warning lights come
and may not work properly if the on briefly when the engine is started
following are plugged in: to indicate they are working.
. Equipment with high initial peak
wattage such as:
compressor-driven refrigerators
and electric power tools.
. Other equipment requiring an
extremely stable power supply
such as:
microcomputer-controlled
electric blankets, touch sensor
lamps, etc.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Instrument Cluster
English shown, Metric similar
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Speedometer Trip Odometer Fuel Gauge

The speedometer shows the The trip odometer can show how far
vehicle's speed in either kilometers the vehicle has been driven since
per hour (km/h) or miles per the trip odometer was last reset.
hour (mph). The trip odometer is accessed and
reset through the Driver Information
Odometer Center (DIC). See Driver
The odometer shows how far the Information Center (DIC) on
vehicle has been driven, in either page 5‑22 for more information.
kilometers or miles.
This vehicle has a tamper‐resistant
Tachometer
odometer. The digital odometer will The tachometer displays the engine
read 999,999 if it is turned back. speed in revolutions per English
If the vehicle needs a new odometer minute (rpm).
installed, it must be set to the Notice: If the engine is operated
mileage total of the old odometer. with the tachometer in the shaded
If that is not possible, then it must warning area, the vehicle could
be set at zero and a label must be be damaged, and the damages
put on the driver door to show the would not be covered by the
old mileage reading when the new vehicle warranty. Do not operate
odometer was installed. the engine with the tachometer in
the shaded warning area.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Here are four things that some Engine Coolant

owners ask about. These are
normal and do not indicate a
Temperature Gauge
problem with the fuel gauge:
. At the service station, the gas
pump shuts off before the gauge
reads full.
. It takes a little more or less fuel
to fill up than the gauge
indicated. For example, the
gauge may have indicated the
fuel tank was half full, but it
Metric
actually took a little more or less
When the ignition is on, the fuel than half the fuel tank's capacity
gauge shows how much fuel is left to fill it.
English
in the fuel tank. When the indicator . The indicator moves a little while
nears empty, a message in the
turning a corner or speeding up.
Driver Information Center (DIC)
displays. See Fuel System . The gauge goes back to empty
Messages on page 5‑27 for more when the ignition is turned off.
information. The vehicle still has a
little fuel left, but the vehicle should
be fueled soon. An arrow on the fuel
gauge indicates the side of the
vehicle the fuel door is on.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Safety Belt Reminders Passenger Safety Belt

Reminder Light
Driver Safety Belt Reminder
Light
There is a driver safety belt
reminder light on the instrument
panel cluster.
For vehicles equipped with the

passenger safety belt reminder light,
several seconds after the engine is
Metric started, a chime sounds for
This gauge shows the engine several seconds to remind the front
coolant temperature. If the pointer When the vehicle is started, passenger to buckle their safety
moves towards the H (United this light flashes and a chime may belt. The passenger safety belt light
States) or to the shaded thermostat come on to remind the driver to flashes and then stays on solid until
symbol area (Canada), the engine is fasten their safety belt. Then the the belt is buckled. This cycle
too hot. light stays on solid until the belt is continues several times if the
buckled. This cycle may continue passenger remains or becomes
A temperature indicator light turns unbuckled while the vehicle is
on and a chime sounds. several times if the driver remains or
becomes unbuckled while the moving.
The vehicle is operated under vehicle is moving. If the passenger safety belt is
normal driving conditions and the buckled, neither the chime nor the
temperature indicator light comes If the driver safety belt is buckled,
neither the light nor the chime light comes on.
on, pull off the road, stop the
vehicle, and turn off the engine as comes on.
soon as possible. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

The front passenger safety belt If there is a problem with the airbag
reminder light and chime may turn system, an airbag Driver Information
on if an object is put on the seat Center (DIC) message can also
such as a briefcase, handbag, come on. See Airbag System
grocery bag, laptop, or other Messages on page 5‑29 for more
electronic device. To turn off the information.
reminder light and/or chime, remove The airbag readiness light flashes
the object from the seat or buckle for a few seconds when the engine Passenger Airbag Status
the safety belt is started. If the light does not come Indicator
on then, have it fixed immediately.
Airbag Readiness Light The vehicle has a passenger
sensing system. See Passenger
The system checks the airbag's { WARNING Sensing System on page 3‑32 for
electrical system for possible important safety information. The
malfunctions. If the light stays on it If the airbag readiness light stays
instrument panel has a passenger
indicates there is an electrical on after the vehicle is started or
airbag status indicator.
problem. The system check comes on while driving, it means
includes the airbag sensor, the the airbag system might not be
pretensioners, the airbag modules, working properly. The airbags in
the wiring and the crash sensing the vehicle might not inflate in a
and diagnostic module. For more crash, or they could even inflate
information on the airbag system, without a crash. To help avoid
see Airbag System on page 3‑25. injury, have the vehicle serviced
right away.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

you know the status of the right front

passenger frontal and seat-mounted { WARNING
side impact airbags.
If the airbag readiness light ever
If the word ON or the on symbol is comes on and stays on, it means
lit on the passenger airbag status that something may be wrong
indicator, it means that the right with the airbag system. To help
United States front passenger frontal airbag and avoid injury to yourself or others,
seat-mounted side impact airbag have the vehicle serviced right
are enabled (may inflate).
away. See Airbag Readiness
If the word OFF or the off symbol is Light on page 5‑13 for more
lit on the passenger airbag status information, including important
indicator, it means that the safety information.
passenger sensing system has
Canada and Mexico turned off the right front passenger
frontal and seat-mounted side
When the vehicle is started, the impact airbag.
passenger airbag status indicator
will light ON and OFF, or the symbol If, after several seconds, both status
for on and off, for several seconds indicator lights remain on, or if there
as a system check. If you are using are no lights at all, there may be a
remote start to start the vehicle from problem with the lights or the
a distance, if equipped, you may not passenger sensing system. See
see the system check. Then, after your dealer for service.
several more seconds, the status
indicator will light either ON or OFF,
or either the on or off symbol to let
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Charging System Light Malfunction Malfunctions often are indicated by

the system before any problem is
Indicator Lamp apparent. Being aware of the light
A computer system called OBD II can prevent more serious damage
(On-Board Diagnostics-Second to the vehicle. This system assists
Generation) monitors operation of the service technician in correctly
the fuel, ignition, and emission diagnosing any malfunction.
control systems. It ensures that Notice: If the vehicle is
emissions are at acceptable levels continually driven with this light
This light comes on briefly when the for the life of the vehicle, helping to
ignition key is turned to START, but on, after a while, the emission
produce a cleaner environment. controls might not work as well,
the engine is not running, as a
check to show it is working. the vehicle fuel economy might
not be as good, and the engine
If it does not, have the vehicle might not run as smoothly. This
serviced by your dealer. could lead to costly repairs that
The light should go out once the might not be covered by the
engine starts. If it stays on, vehicle warranty.
or comes on while driving, there Notice: Modifications made to the
could be a problem with the This light should come on when the engine, transmission, exhaust,
charging system. This light could ignition is on, but the engine is not intake, or fuel system of the
indicate that there are problems with running, as a check to show it is vehicle or the replacement
a generator drive belt, or that there working. If it does not, have the of the original tires with other
is an electrical problem. Have it vehicle serviced by your dealer. than those of the same Tire
checked right away. If the vehicle If the malfunction indicator lamp Performance Criteria (TPC) can
must be driven a short distance with comes on and stays on while the affect the vehicle's emission
the light on, turn off accessories, engine is running, this indicates that controls and can cause this light
such as the radio and air there is an OBD II problem and to come on. Modifications to
conditioner. service is required. these systems could lead to
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

costly repairs not covered by the If the light continues to flash, when
. Make sure the electrical system
vehicle warranty. This could also it is safe to do so, stop the vehicle. is not wet. The system could be
result in a failure to pass a Find a safe place to park the wet if the vehicle was driven
required Emission Inspection/ vehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait at through a deep puddle of water.
Maintenance test. See least 10 seconds, and restart the The condition is usually
Accessories and Modifications on engine. If the light is still flashing, corrected when the electrical
page 10‑3. follow the previous steps and see system dries out. A few driving
your dealer for service as soon as trips should turn the light off.
This light comes on during a
malfunction in one of two ways: possible. . Make sure to fuel the vehicle
Light On Steady: An emission with quality fuel. Poor fuel quality
Light Flashing: A misfire condition causes the engine not to run as
has been detected. A misfire control system malfunction has
been detected on the vehicle. efficiently as designed and can
increases vehicle emissions and cause: stalling after start-up,
could damage the emission control Diagnosis and service might be
required. stalling when the vehicle is
system on the vehicle. Diagnosis changed into gear, misfiring,
and service might be required. The following may correct an hesitation on acceleration,
To prevent more serious damage to emissions system malfunction: or stumbling on acceleration.
the vehicle: . Make sure the fuel cap is fully These conditions might go away
installed. See Filling the Tank on once the engine is warmed up.
. Reduce vehicle speed.
page 9‑39. The diagnostic If one or more of these
. Avoid hard accelerations. system can determine if the fuel conditions occurs, change the
. Avoid steep uphill grades. cap has been left off or fuel brand used. It will require at
improperly installed. A loose or least one full tank of the proper
. If towing a trailer, reduce the missing fuel cap allows fuel to
amount of cargo being hauled as fuel to turn the light off.
evaporate into the atmosphere.
soon as it is possible. A few driving trips with the cap See Recommended Fuel on
properly installed should turn the page 9‑35.
light off.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

If none of the above have made the

. The critical emission control
light turn off, your dealer can check systems have not been
the vehicle. The dealer has the completely diagnosed by the
proper test equipment and system. This can happen if the
diagnostic tools to fix any battery has recently been
mechanical or electrical problems replaced or if the battery has run
that might have developed. down. The diagnostic system
The DLC is under the instrument evaluates critical emission
Emissions Inspection and panel to the left of the steering control systems during normal
Maintenance Programs wheel. See your dealer if assistance driving. This can take
is needed. several days of routine driving.
Some state/provincial and local
governments may have programs to The vehicle may not pass If this has been done and the
inspect the on-vehicle emission inspection if: vehicle still does not pass the
control equipment. For the inspection, your dealer can
. The malfunction indicator lamp is prepare the vehicle for
inspection, the emission system test on with the engine running, or if
equipment is connected to the inspection.
the light does not come on when
vehicle’s Data Link the ignition is turned to ON/RUN
Connector (DLC). while the engine is off.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Brake System Warning When the ignition is on, the brake

Light system warning light also comes on { WARNING
when the parking brake is set. The
The vehicle brake system consists light stays on if the parking brake The brake system might not be
of two hydraulic circuits. If one does not fully release. If it stays on working properly if the brake
circuit is not working, the remaining after the parking brake is fully system warning light is on.
circuit can still work to stop the released, it means there is a brake Driving with the brake system
vehicle. For normal braking problem. warning light on can lead to a
performance, both circuits need to crash. If the light is still on after
The Driver Information Center (DIC)
be working the vehicle has been pulled off
may display a BRAKE FLUID
the road and carefully stopped,
If the warning light comes on, there message. See Brake System
Messages on page 5‑26 for more have the vehicle towed for
is a brake problem. Have the brake
system inspected right away. information. service.
If the light comes on while driving,
pull off the road and carefully stop.
The brake pedal may be harder to
push or the pedal may go closer to
the floor. It may take longer to stop.
Try turning off and restarting the
English Metric vehicle one or two times, if the light
is still on, have the vehicle towed for
This light comes on briefly when the
service. See Towing the Vehicle on
ignition key is turned to ON/RUN.
page 10‑88
If it does not come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn if
there is a problem.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Antilock Brake System If the regular brake system warning If the light does not come on, have
light is also on, the vehicle does not the vehicle serviced by the dealer.
(ABS) Warning Light have antilock brakes and there is a If the system is working normally the
problem with the regular brakes. indicator light turns off.
See Brake System Warning Light on If the light is on while certain DIC
page 5‑18. messages display, this indicates
For vehicles with a Driver that the ESC and TCS are not
Information Center (DIC), see Brake working or are disabled.
System Messages on page 5‑26 for If the light is on and not flashing,
all brake related DIC messages. the TCS and potentially the ESC
For vehicles with the Antilock Brake
System (ABS), this light comes on system have been disabled. Check
briefly when the engine is started. Electronic Stability the DIC messaging to determine
If it does not, have the vehicle
Control (ESC)/Traction which feature(s) is no longer
Control System (TCS) functioning and whether it is
serviced by your dealer. If the because of the driver turning off the
system is working normally the Indicator/Warning Light feature(s), or because the system is
indicator light then goes off. not working properly and the vehicle
If the ABS light stays on, turn the requires service.
ignition off. If the light comes on If the TCS is disabled, wheel spin is
while driving, stop as soon as it is not limited. If the ESC system is
safely possible and turn the ignition disabled, the system does not aid in
off. Then start the engine again to maintaining directional control of the
reset the system. If the ABS light vehicle.
stays on, or comes on again while The Electronic Stability Control
driving, the vehicle needs service. (ESC) system or the Traction
If the regular brake system warning Control System (TCS) indicator/
light is not on, the vehicle still has warning light comes on briefly when
brakes, but not antilock brakes. the engine Inis
f
or started.
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

If the indicator/warning light is on Engine Coolant The engine coolant temperature

and flashing, the TCS or the ESC warning light comes on when the
system is actively working. Check
Temperature Warning engine has overheated.
the DIC messaging for details to Light If this happens pull over and turn off
determine which system is working. the engine as soon as possible. See
If the LOW TRACTION message Engine Overheating on page 10‑20
appears, the system is limiting for more information.
wheel spin. If the ESC ACTIVE
message appears, the system is
aiding in maintaining directional Tire Pressure Light
control of the vehicle.
See Electronic Stability Control This light comes on briefly while
(ESC) on page 9‑31 and Traction starting the vehicle.
Control System (TCS) on page 9‑29 If it does not, have the vehicle
for more information. serviced by the dealer. If the system
See Ride Control System Messages is working normally the indicator
on page 5‑27 for more information light goes off. For vehicles with the Tire Pressure
on the messages associated with Notice: Driving with the engine Monitor System (TPMS), this light
this light. coolant temperature warning light comes on briefly when the engine is
on could cause the vehicle to started. It provides information
overheat. See Engine Overheating about tire pressures and the TPMS.
on page 10‑20. The vehicle's
engine could be damaged, and it
might not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Never drive with
the engine coolant temperature
warning light on.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

When the Light is On Steady Engine Oil Pressure Light

This indicates that one or more of
the tires are significantly
underinflated.
{ WARNING
A tire pressure message can Do not keep driving if the oil
accompany the light. See Tire pressure is low. The engine can
become so hot that it catches fire. The oil pressure light should come
Messages on page 5‑29 for more
Someone could be burned. Check on briefly as the engine is started.
information. Stop as soon as
the oil as soon as possible and If it does not come on have the
possible, and inflate the tires to the
have the vehicle serviced. vehicle serviced by your dealer.
pressure value shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. See If the light comes on and stays on, it
Tire Pressure on page 10‑51 for Notice: Lack of proper engine oil means that oil is not flowing through
more information. maintenance can damage the the engine properly. The vehicle
engine. The repairs would not be could be low on oil and might have
When the Light Flashes First and some other system problem. See
Then is On Steady covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always follow the maintenance your dealer.
This indicates that there may be a schedule for changing engine oil.
problem with the TPMS. The light
flashes for about a minute and stays
on steady for the remainder of the
ignition cycle. This sequence
repeats with every ignition cycle.
See Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation on page 10‑54 for more
information.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Security Light Cruise Control Light Information Displays

Driver Information
Center (DIC)
Your vehicle has a Driver
Information Center (DIC). The DIC
display gives you the status of many
For information regarding this light The cruise control light comes on of your vehicle's systems. The DIC
and the vehicle's security system, whenever the cruise control is set. is also used to display driver
see Content Theft Deterrent. personalization menu modes and
The light goes out when the cruise warning/status messages. All
High-Beam On Light control is turned off. See Cruise messages will appear in the DIC
Control on page 9‑32 for more display, located at the bottom of the
information. instrument panel cluster.
The high-beam on light comes on

when the high-beam headlamps are
in use.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer on page 6‑2 for more
information.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

buttons to enter the personalization Odometer

menu. See Vehicle Personalization Press the information button until
on page 5‑30 for more information. the outside air temperature and the
The DIC comes on when the ignition odometer displays. This mode
is on. The DIC has different modes shows the total distance the vehicle
which can be accessed by pressing has been driven in either
the DIC buttons. The button kilometers (km) or miles (mi).
functions are detailed in the To change the DIC display to
following. English or metric units, see “UNITS”
Information Modes under Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑30.
INFO (Information): Press this
The DIC buttons are located on the button to scroll through the following Trip Odometer
left side of the steering wheel. vehicle information modes: Press the information button until
INFO (Information): Press this Outside Air Temperature the outside air temperature along
button to scroll through the vehicle with A or B displays. These modes
The outside air temperature will be show the current distance traveled
information mode displays.
displayed at the same time as the since the last reset for each trip
r (Reset): Press this button to Odometer and the Trip Odometer. odometer in either kilometers (km)
reset some vehicle information The temperature outside of the or miles (mi). Both odometers can
mode displays, select a vehicle will be displayed in either be used at the same time.
personalization menu mode degrees Celsius (°C) or degrees
setting, or acknowledge a warning Fahrenheit (°F). The outside air To reset the trip odometer to zero,
message. temperature appears on the left side press and hold the reset button for a
of the DIC display and the few seconds while the desired trip
Press and hold the information and odometer is displayed.
reset buttons at the same time for odometer, or trip odometer, appears
one second, then release the on the right side of the display.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

FUEL RANGE To reset the average fuel economy, AV (Average) SPEED

Press the information button until press and hold the reset button Press the information button until
FUEL RANGE displays. This mode while MPG (L/100 KM) AVG is AV SPEED displays. This mode
shows the remaining distance you displayed. Average fuel economy is shows the vehicle's average speed
can drive without refueling in either then calculated starting from that in kilometers per hour (km/h) or
kilometers (km) or miles (mi). It is point. If the average fuel economy is miles per hour (mph).
based on fuel economy and the fuel not reset, it is continually updated
each time you drive. To reset the average vehicle speed,
remaining in the tank. press and hold the reset button
When the fuel level is low, FUEL MPG (L/100 KM) INST while AV SPEED is displayed.
RANGE LOW displays. (Instantaneous)
OIL LIFE
The fuel economy data used to Press the information button until
determine fuel range is an average MPG (L/100 KM) INST displays. This Press the information button until
of recent driving conditions. As your mode shows the current fuel OIL LIFE displays. The engine oil
driving conditions change, this data economy at a particular moment life system shows an estimate of the
is gradually updated. The FUEL and changes frequently as driving oil's remaining useful life. It shows
RANGE mode cannot be reset. conditions change. This mode 100% when the system is reset after
shows the instantaneous fuel an oil change. It alerts you to
MPG (L/100 KM) AVG (Average) economy in liters per 100 kilometers change the oil on a schedule
Press the information button until (L/100 km) or miles per gallon consistent with your driving
MPG (L/100 KM) AVG displays. This (mpg). Unlike average fuel conditions.
mode shows how many liters per economy, this screen cannot be
100 kilometers (L/100 km) or miles reset.
per gallon (mpg) your vehicle is
getting based on current and past
driving conditions.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

In addition to the engine oil life Tire Pressure Vehicle Messages

system monitoring the oil life, On vehicles with the Tire Pressure
additional maintenance is The following messages appear if
Monitor System (TPMS), the
recommended in the Maintenance there is a problem detected in one
pressure for each tire can be viewed
Schedule in this manual. See of your vehicle's systems.
in the DIC. The tire pressure is
Engine Oil on page 10‑9 and shown in either kilopascals (kPa) or A message clears when the
Scheduled Maintenance on pounds per square inch (psi). Press vehicle's condition is no longer
page 11‑2. the information button until present. To acknowledge a
Always reset the engine oil life LF ## PSI (kPa) ## RF displays message and clear it from the
system after an oil change. See for the front tires. Press the display, press and hold any of the
“How to Reset the Engine Oil Life information button again until DIC buttons. If the condition is still
System” under Engine Oil Life LR ## PSI (kPa) ## RR displays for present, the warning message
System on page 10‑13. the rear tires. comes back on the next time the
vehicle is turned off and back on.
If a low tire pressure condition is
With most messages, a warning
detected by the system while
chime sounds when the message
driving, a message advising you to
displays. Your vehicle may have
add air will appear in the display.
other warning messages.
See Tire Pressure on page 10‑51
and Tire Messages on page 5‑29 for
more information.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Brake System Messages Door Ajar Messages page 10‑9, and Scheduled
Maintenance on page 11‑2 for more
BRAKE FLUID DOOR AJAR information.
This message displays, while the This message displays if one or
ignition is on, when the brake fluid more of the vehicle's doors are not Engine Power Messages
level is low. The brake system closed properly. Make sure that the
ENG (Engine) PWR (Power)
warning light on the instrument door(s) are closed completely.
panel cluster also comes on. See REDUCED
Brake System Warning Light on TRUNK AJAR This message displays when the
page 5‑18 for more information. This message displays when the vehicle's engine power is reduced.
Have the brake system serviced by trunk is not closed completely. Make Reduced engine power can affect
your dealer as soon as possible. sure that the trunk is closed the vehicle's ability to accelerate.
completely. See Trunk on page 2‑9 If this message is on, but there is no
PUSH PARK PEDAL for more information. reduction in performance, proceed
This message displays if the parking to your destination. The
brake is left engaged. See Parking Engine Oil Messages performance may be reduced the
Brake on page 9‑28 for more next time the vehicle is driven. The
information. CHANGE OIL SOON vehicle may be driven at a reduced
This message displays when the life speed while this message is on, but
Cruise Control Messages of the engine oil has expired and it acceleration and speed may be
should be changed. reduced. Anytime this message
CRUISE ENGAGED stays on, the vehicle should be
When this message is taken to your dealer for service as
This message displays when the acknowledged and cleared from the
cruise control system is active. See soon as possible.
display, the engine oil life system
Cruise Control on page 9‑32 for must still be reset separately. See
more information. Engine Oil Life System on
page 10‑13, Engine Oil on
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Fuel System Messages Key and Lock Messages Ride Control System
CHECK GAS CAP KEY FOB BATT (Battery) LOW Messages
This message displays if the fuel This message displays if the ESC (Electronic Stability
cap has not been fully tightened. Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Control) ACTIVE
Recheck the fuel cap to make sure transmitter battery is low. Replace If your vehicle has Electronic
that it is on properly. A few driving the battery in the transmitter. See Stability Control (ESC), this
trips with the cap properly installed “Battery Replacement” under message displays and the ESC/TCS
should turn the message off. Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) light on the instrument panel cluster
System Operation on page 2‑3. flashes when ESC is assisting you
LOW FUEL
with directional control of the
This message displays when your Lamp Messages vehicle. You may feel or hear the
vehicle is low on fuel. Refill the fuel system working and see this
tank as soon as possible. See Fuel AUTO (Automatic)
message displayed in the DIC.
Gauge on page 5‑10, Fuel on LIGHTS OFF Slippery road conditions may exist
page 9‑35, and Filling the Tank on This message displays if the when this message is displayed, so
page 9‑39 for more information. automatic headlamp system is adjust your driving accordingly. This
disabled with the headlamp switch. message may stay on for a
See Automatic Headlamp System few seconds after ESC stops
on page 6‑3 for more information. assisting you with directional control
of the vehicle. This is normal when
AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS ON the system is operating. See
This message displays if the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on
automatic headlamp system is page 9‑31 and Electronic Stability
enabled with the headlamp switch. Control (ESC)/Traction Control
See Automatic Headlamp System System (TCS) Indicator/Warning
on page 6‑3 for more information. Light on page 5‑19 for more
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: information.

ESC (Electronic Stability page 9‑29 and Electronic Stability resetting the system by turning the
Control) OFF Control (ESC)/Traction Control ignition off and then back on. If this
System (TCS) Indicator/Warning message still stays on or turns back
If your vehicle has Electronic Light on page 5‑19 for more on again while you are driving, your
Stability Control (ESC), this information. vehicle needs service. Have the
message displays and the ESC/TCS ESC inspected by your dealer as
light on the instrument panel cluster SERVICE ESC (ELECTRONIC soon as possible.
comes on solid when ESC is turned STABILITY CONTROL)
off. Adjust your driving accordingly. SERVICE TRACTION
See Electronic Stability Control If your vehicle has Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), this If your vehicle has the Traction
(ESC) on page 9‑31 and Electronic
message displays and a chime Control System (TCS), this
Stability Control (ESC)/Traction
sounds if there has been a problem message displays and a chime
Control System (TCS) Indicator/
detected with ESC. The ESC/TCS sounds when the system is not
Warning Light on page 5‑19 for
light also appears on the instrument functioning properly. The ESC/TCS
more information.
panel cluster. This light stays on light also appears on the instrument
LOW TRACTION solid as long as the detected panel cluster. This light stays on
problem remains present. When this solid as long as the detected
If your vehicle has the Traction problem remains present. When this
message displays, the system is not
Control System (TCS), this message displays, the system is not
working. Adjust your driving
message displays and the ESC/TCS working. Adjust your driving
accordingly. See Electronic Stability
light on the instrument panel cluster accordingly. See Traction Control
Control (ESC) on page 9‑31 and
flashes when the system is actively System (TCS) on page 9‑29 and
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/
limiting wheel spin. Slippery road Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/
Traction Control System (TCS)
conditions may exist if this message Traction Control System (TCS)
Indicator/Warning Light on
is displayed, so adjust your driving Indicator/Warning Light on
accordingly. This message stays on page 5‑19 for more information.
for a few seconds after the system If this message turns on while you
Have the system serviced by your
stops limiting wheel spin. See are driving, pull off the road as soon
dealer as soon as possible.
Traction Control System (TCS) on as possible and
Inf
or
stop
mat
ionPr
carefully.
ovidedby:
Try

TRACTION OFF Service Vehicle Messages Monitor Operation on page 10‑54 for
more information. If the warning
If your vehicle has the Traction ENGINE DISABLED comes on and stays on, there may
Control System (TCS), this
This message displays if the starting be a problem with the TPMS. See
message displays and the ESC/TCS
of the engine is disabled. Have your your dealer.
light on the instrument panel cluster
comes on solid when the system is vehicle serviced by your dealer TIRE LOW ADD AIR
turned off. Adjust your driving immediately.
accordingly. See Traction Control On vehicles with the Tire Pressure
System (TCS) on page 9‑29 and
POWER STEERING Monitor System (TPMS), this
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/ On some vehicles, this message message displays when the
Traction Control System (TCS) displays if a problem has been pressure in one or more of the
Indicator/Warning Light on detected with the electric power vehicle's tires is low on air. The low
page 5‑19 for more information. steering. Have your vehicle serviced tire pressure warning light also
by your dealer immediately. comes on. See Tire Pressure Light
on page 5‑20. If this message
Airbag System Messages appears on the DIC, stop as soon
Tire Messages as you can. Have the tire pressures
SERVICE AIR BAG
SVC (Service) TIRE MONITOR checked and set to those shown on
This message displays when there the Tire Loading Information label.
is a problem with the airbag system. On vehicles with the Tire Pressure See Tires on page 10‑42, Vehicle
Have your vehicle serviced by your Monitor System (TPMS), this Load Limits on page 9‑12, and Tire
dealer immediately. message displays if a part on the Pressure on page 10‑51. The DIC
TPMS is not working properly. The also shows the tire pressure values.
tire pressure light also flashes and See Driver Information Center (DIC)
then remains on during the same on page 5‑22.
ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure
Light on page 5‑20. Several
conditions may cause this message
to appear. See
I
nfor
mat
i
Tire
onProvi
Pressure
dedby:

Vehicle Reminder Vehicle 2. Press and hold the information

and reset buttons at the same
Messages Personalization time for one second, then
ICE POSSIBLE release to enter the
Your vehicle has personalization
personalization menu.
This message displays when the capabilities that allow you to
outside air temperature is cold program certain features to a If the vehicle speed is greater
enough to create icy road preferred setting. All of the features than 3 km/h (2 mph), only the
conditions. Adjust your driving listed may not be available on your UNITS menu will be accessible.
accordingly. vehicle. Only the features available 3. Press the information button to
will be displayed on the DIC. scroll through the available
Washer Fluid Messages The default settings for the features personalization menu modes.
were set when your vehicle left the Press the reset button to scroll
LOW WASHER FLUID factory, but may have been changed through the available settings for
This message displays when the from their default state since each mode.
vehicle's windshield washer fluid is that time.
low. Fill the windshield washer fluid If you do not make a selection
To change feature settings, use the within ten seconds, the display
reservoir to the proper level as soon following procedure:
as possible. See Washer Fluid on will go back to the previous
page 10‑23. Entering Personalization Menu information displayed.
1. Turn the ignition on while the
vehicle is stopped.
To avoid excessive drain on the
battery, it is recommended that
the headlamps are turned off.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Personalization Menu Modes To select a setting and move LOCK HORN

on to the next feature, press the This feature, which allows the
OIL LIFE RESET information button while the desired vehicle's horn to chirp every time
When this feature is displayed, you setting is displayed on the DIC. the lock button on the Remote
can reset the engine oil life system. Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is
REMOTE START
To reset the system, see Engine Oil pressed, can be enabled or
Life System on page 10‑13. See If your vehicle has remote start, this disabled. When LOCK HORN
“OIL LIFE” under Driver Information feature allows remote start to be appears on the display, press and
Center (DIC) on page 5‑22 for more turned off or on. Remote start allows hold the reset button for at least
information. you to start the engine from outside one second to scroll through the
of the vehicle using your Remote available settings:
UNITS Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
This feature allows you to select the When REMOTE START appears on OFF (default): The horn will not
units of measurement in which the display, press and hold the reset chirp on the first press of the lock
the DIC will display the vehicle button for at least one second to button on the RKE transmitter. The
information. When UNITS appears scroll through the available settings: horn will still chirp on the second
on the display, press and hold the press.
OFF: The remote start feature will
reset button for at least one second be disabled. ON: The horn will chirp on the first
to scroll through the available press of the lock button on the RKE
settings: ON (default): The remote start transmitter.
feature will be enabled.
ENGLISH (default in United See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
States): All information will be See Remote Vehicle Start on System Operation on page 2‑3 for
displayed in English units. page 2‑5 for more information. more information.
METRIC (default in Canada): All To select a setting and move on to To select a setting and move on to
information will be displayed in the next feature, press the the next feature, press the
metric units. information button while the desired information button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC. setting is displayed on the DIC.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

UNLOCK HORN LIGHT FLASH To select a setting and move

This feature, which allows the This feature, which allows the on to the next feature, press the
vehicle's horn to chirp on the first vehicle's exterior hazard/turn signal information button while the desired
press of the unlock button on the lighting to flash every time the lock, setting is displayed on the DIC.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) unlock, or trunk release buttons on DELAY LOCK
transmitter, can be enabled or the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
disabled. When UNLOCK HORN transmitter are pressed, can be This feature, which delays the
appears on the display, press and enabled or disabled. When LIGHT actual locking of the vehicle, can be
hold the reset button for at least FLASH appears on the display, enabled or disabled. When DELAY
one second to scroll through the press and hold the reset button for LOCK appears on the display, press
available settings: at least one second to scroll through and hold the reset button for at least
the available settings: one second to scroll through the
OFF (default): The horn will not available settings:
chirp when the unlock button on the OFF: The exterior hazard/turn
RKE transmitter is pressed. signal lighting will not flash when ON (default): The doors will not
the lock, unlock, or trunk release lock until five seconds after the last
ON: The horn will chirp on the first door is closed. You can temporarily
press of the unlock button on the buttons on the RKE transmitter are
pressed. override delayed locking by
RKE transmitter. pressing the power lock switch or
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ON (default): The exterior hazard/ the lock button on the Remote
System Operation on page 2‑3 for turn signal lighting will flash when Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter a
more information. the lock, unlock, or trunk release second time.
buttons on the RKE transmitter are
To select a setting and move pressed.
on to the next feature, press the
information button while the desired See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
setting is displayed on the DIC. System Operation on page 2‑3 for
more information.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

OFF: The doors will lock NONE: None of the doors will See Automatic Door Locks on
immediately when pressing the automatically unlock. You will need page 2‑8 for more information.
power lock switch or the lock button to manually unlock the doors. To select a setting and move
on the RKE transmitter. See Automatic Door Locks on on to the next feature, press the
See Power Door Locks on page 2‑7, page 2‑8 for more information. information button while the desired
Delayed Locking on page 2‑8, and To select a setting and move setting is displayed on the DIC.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) on to the next feature, press the
System Operation on page 2‑3 for EXT (Exterior) LIGHTS
information button while the desired
more information. setting is displayed on the DIC. This feature, which allows the
To select a setting and move vehicle's exterior perimeter lighting
on to the next feature, press the UNLK (Unlock) to turn on each time the unlock
information button while the desired This screen displays only if DRIVER button on the Remote Keyless Entry
setting is displayed on the DIC. or ALL is selected for the AUTO (RKE) transmitter is pressed, can be
UNLK feature. This feature enabled or disabled. When EXT
AUTO UNLK (Unlock) determines when the automatic door LIGHTS appears on the display,
This feature, which allows the unlocking will occur. When UNLK press and hold the reset button for
vehicle to automatically unlock appears on the display, press and at least one second to scroll through
certain doors, can be enabled or hold the reset button for at least the available settings:
disabled. When AUTO UNLK one second to scroll through the OFF: The exterior perimeter
appears on the display, press and available settings: lighting will not turn on when the
hold the reset button for at least KEY OFF: The door(s) will unlock unlock button on the RKE
one second to scroll through the when the key is turned off. transmitter is pressed.
available settings:
SHIFT TO P (Park) (default): The
ALL (default): All of the doors will door(s) will unlock when the vehicle
automatically unlock. is shifted into P (Park).
DRIVER: The driver's door will
automatically unlock. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

ON (default): The exterior SPANISH: All messages will

perimeter lighting will turn on when appear in Spanish.
the unlock button on the RKE GERMAN: All messages will
transmitter is pressed. appear in German.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) To select a setting and exit out of
System Operation on page 2‑3 for the personalization menu mode,
more information. press the information button while
To select a setting and move the desired setting is displayed on
on to the next feature, press the the DIC.
information button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC. Exiting Personalization Menu
The personalization menu will be
LANGUAGE
exited when any of the following
This feature allows you to select the conditions occur:
language in which the DIC will . A ten second time period has
display. When LANGUAGE appears
elapsed.
on the display, press and hold the
reset button for at least one second . The ignition is turned off.
to scroll through the available . The end of the personalization
settings: menu list is reached.
ENGLISH (default): All messages
will appear in English.
FRENCH: All messages will appear
in French.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Lighting 6-1
Lighting Interior Lighting

Instrument Panel Illumination
Exterior Lighting
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Exterior Lamp Controls
Exterior Lighting
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1
Exterior Lamps Off Lighting Features
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Entry/Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Battery Load Management . . . . 6-6
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-7
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 The band on the lever located on
Automatic Headlamp the left side of the steering column,
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 operates the exterior lamps.
Delayed Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 The exterior lamp control has the
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-4 following four positions:
Turn and Lane-Change
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 2 (Headlamps): Turns on the
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 headlamps, parking lamps, and
taillamps.
; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the
parking lamps and taillamps only.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

6-2 Lighting
AUTO (Automatic Headlamp Headlamp High/ Daytime Running

System): Automatically turns on
the Daytime Running Lamps during
Low-Beam Changer Lamps (DRL)
daytime, and the headlamps, To change the headlamps from low Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can
parking lamps, and taillamps at beam to high beam, push the turn make it easier for others to see the
night. signal/multifunction lever away front of your vehicle during the day.
P (Off/On): Turn the band to this from you. Fully functional DRL are required on
position to turn on the Automatic This instrument panel cluster light all vehicles first sold in Canada. The
Headlamp System. In Canada, this 3 comes on if the high beam vehicle has a light sensor on top of
position only works when a vehicle lamps are turned on while the the instrument panel that controls
is in the P (Park) position. ignition is in ON/RUN. the DRL. Do not cover this sensor
or the head lamps will be on when
To turn on the Automatic Headlamp To change the headlamps from high they are not needed.
System, turn the switch to off/on. To beam to low beam, pull the turn
turn them off, turn the switch to off/ signal lever toward you. The DRL system makes the
on again. This is a momentary low-beam headlamps come on at a
reduced brightness when the
control switch that springs back Flash-to-Pass following conditions are met:
when released. The Automatic
Headlamp System always turns on This feature lets the high-beam . The ignition is on.
at the beginning of an ignition cycle. headlamps be used to signal a
driver in front of you that you want . The exterior lamps control is
to pass. in AUTO.
Exterior Lamps Off
Pull the turn signal/multifunction
. The exterior lamps control is in
Reminder the parking lamps only position
lever toward you until the high-beam
If the drivers door is opened and the headlamps come on, then release (This applies only to vehicles
ignition is turned off while leaving the lever to turn them off. that are first sold in Canada).
the lamps on, a warning chime will
sound.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Lighting 6-3
. The light sensor detects daytime The vehicle has a light sensor on bright position. See Instrument
light. top of the instrument panel that Panel Illumination Control on
. The parking brake is released or controls the automatic headlamp page 6‑5.
the vehicle is not in P (Park). system. Do not cover the sensor or To idle the vehicle with the
the automatic headlamp system will automatic headlamp system off, turn
When the DRL system is on, the turn on when it is not needed.
taillamps, sidemarker lamps, the ignition on and set the exterior
parking lamps, and instrument panel There is a delay in the transition light switch to the off/on position.
lights are not on unless you turn the between the daytime and nighttime For vehicles first sold in Canada,
exterior lamps control to the parking operation of the DRL and the the transmission must stay in
lamp position. automatic headlamp systems so P (Park) for this function.
that driving under bridges or bright The regular headlamps should be
The regular headlamp system overhead street lights does not
should be turned on when they are used when needed.
affect the system. The DRL and
needed. automatic headlamp systems will
only be affected when the light Delayed Headlamps
Automatic Headlamp sensor sees a change in lighting The delayed headlamps feature
System lasting longer than this delay. keeps the headlamps on for
If the vehicle is started in a dark 20 seconds after the key is turned to
When it is dark enough outside, the
garage, the automatic headlamp LOCK/OFF, then the headlamps
automatic headlamp system turns
system comes on immediately. automatically turn off.
on the headlamps at the normal
brightness along with other lamps Once the vehicle leaves the garage, To override the 20 second delayed
such as the taillamps, sidemarker, it takes about one minute for the headlamp feature while it is active
parking lamps, and the instrument automatic headlamp system to turn the turn signal/multifunction
panel lights. The radio lights will change to DRL if it is light outside. lever up one position and then back
also be dim. During that delay, the instrument to AUTO.
panel cluster may not be as bright
as usual. Make sure the instrument
panel brightness
I
nfor
mat
ionPcontrol
r dedby: is in the full
ovi

6-4 Lighting
Hazard Warning Flashers Turn and Lane-Change Fog Lamps

Signals For vehicles with fog lamps, the
button for this feature is located on
the instrument panel, to the left of
the steering wheel.
The ignition must be on for the fog
lamps to work.
# : Press to turn the fog lamps on
or off. An indicator light comes on
An arrow on the instrument panel when the fog lamps are on.
cluster flashes in the direction of the
turn or lane change. The parking lamps automatically
turn on and off when the fog lamps
Move the lever all the way up or are turned on and off.
down to signal a turn.
| (Hazard Warning Flasher): Raise or lower the lever until the
The fog lamps turn off while the
Press this button located on the high-beam headlamps are
arrow starts to flash to signal a lane turned on.
instrument panel, to make the front
change. Release the lever and the
and rear turn signal lamps flash on Some localities have laws that
turn signal automatically flashes
and off. This warns others that you require the headlamps to be on
three times. If more flashes are
are having trouble. along with the fog lamps.
desired, continue to hold the lever.
Press | again to turn the The lever returns to its starting
flashers off. position when it is released.
If a turn signal arrow flashes rapidly
or does not come on, a signal bulb
may need to be replaced. See
Fuses on page I
nf 10‑35.
or
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Lighting 6-5
Interior Lighting Dome Lamps Lighting Features

The dome lamps come on when any
Instrument Panel door is opened. They turn off after Entry/Exit Lighting
Illumination Control all the doors are closed. The lamps inside the vehicle come
The knob for this control is located The dome lamps can also be turned on when any door is opened. These
on the instrument panel to the left of on by turning the instrument panel lamps fade out about 20 seconds
the steering column. brightness knob, located on the after all of the doors have been
instrument panel to the left of the closed or when the ignition is turned
D (Instrument Panel steering column, clockwise to the to ON/RUN. They also come on
Brightness): Turn the knob farthest position. In this position, the when the unlock symbol button or
clockwise or counterclockwise to dome lamps remain on whether a the horn symbol is pressed on the
brighten or dim the lights. Turn the door is opened or closed. Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
knob completely clockwise to turn system transmitter.
on the interior lamps. Reading Lamps The lamps inside the vehicle stay on
For vehicles with front and rear for about 20 seconds after the key is
reading lamps, press the lens to removed from the ignition to provide
turn the lamp on and off, while the light as you exit.
doors are closed. These lamps
come on automatically when any
door is opened.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

6-6 Lighting
Parade Dimming When the state of charge is high, EPM works to prevent excessive
the voltage is lowered slightly to discharge of the battery. It does this
Parade dimming is a separate prevent overcharging. If the vehicle by balancing the generator's output
lighting mode that comes on while has a voltmeter gauge or a voltage and the vehicle's electrical needs.
the parking lamps are turned on display on the Driver Information It can increase engine idle speed to
during the day. It prevents the Center (DIC), you may see the generate more power, whenever
display lights and indicator lights voltage move up or down. This is needed. It can temporarily reduce
from being dim, while the parking normal. If there is a problem, an the power demands of some
lamps are used during the day. alert will be displayed. accessories.
Battery Load The battery can be discharged at Normally, these actions occur in
idle if the electrical loads are very steps or levels, without being
Management high. This is true for all vehicles. noticeable. In rare cases at the
The vehicle has Electric Power This is because the generator highest levels of corrective action,
Management (EPM) that estimates (alternator) may not be spinning fast this action may be noticeable to the
the battery's temperature and state enough at idle to produce all the driver. If so, a Driver Information
of charge. It then adjusts the voltage power needed for very high Center (DIC) message might be
for best performance and extended electrical loads. displayed, such as BATTERY
life of the battery. A high electrical load occurs when SAVER ACTIVE, BATTERY
several of the following are on, such VOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY.
When the battery's state of charge If one of these messages displays, it
is low, the voltage is raised slightly as: headlamps, high beams, fog
lamps, rear window defogger, is recommended that the driver
to quickly bring the charge back up. reduce the electrical loads as much
climate control fan at high speed,
heated seats, engine cooling fans, as possible. See Driver Information
trailer loads, and loads plugged into Center (DIC) on page 5‑22.
accessory power outlets.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Lighting 6-7
. Press any Remote Keyless
Battery Power Protection Entry (RKE) transmitter button
The vehicle has a battery run-down (if equipped).
protection feature designed to . Press the remote trunk release
protect the vehicle's battery.
button.
When any interior lamp (trunk, . Press the power door lock
reading, or visor vanity) is left on
switch.
while the ignition is turned off, the
battery run-down protection system The battery run-down feature will
will automatically shut the lamp(s) also be activated when any door on
off after 20 minutes. This will avoid the vehicle is left open and the
draining the battery. ignition is in LOCK/OFF.
To reactivate the interior lamps, do
one of the following:
. Turn on the ignition.
. Turn the exterior lamp control off
and then on.
. Open a door.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

6-8 Lighting
2 NOTES
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Infotainment System 7-1
Infotainment Introduction { WARNING

System Infotainment Taking your eyes off the road for
extended periods could cause a
Determine which radio the vehicle
has and read the following pages to crash resulting in injury or death
Introduction
become familiar with its features. to you or others. Do not give
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
extended attention to
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 entertainment tasks while driving.
Radio This system provides access to

AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 many audio and non audio listings.
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Backglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . 7-15
Audio Players
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Phone
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

7-2 Infotainment System
To minimize taking your eyes off the Notice: The chime signals related The vehicle has Retained
road while driving, do the following to safety belts, parking brake, and Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP,
while the vehicle is parked: other functions of your vehicle the audio system can be played
. Become familiar with the operate through the radio/ even after the ignition is turned off.
operation and controls of the entertainment system. If that See Retained Accessory Power
audio system. equipment is replaced or (RAP) on page 9‑20 for more
additional equipment is added to information.
. Set up the tone, speaker your vehicle, the chimes may not
adjustments, and preset radio work. Make sure that replacement Theft-Deterrent Feature
stations. or additional equipment is
compatible with your vehicle TheftLock® is designed to
For more information, see Defensive discourage theft of the vehicle's
Driving on page 9‑2. before installing it. See
Accessories and Modifications on radio by learning a portion of the
Notice: Contact your dealer page 10‑3. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
before adding any equipment. The radio does not operate if it is
stolen or moved to a different
Adding audio or communication
vehicle.
equipment could interfere with
the operation of the engine, radio,
or other systems, and could
damage them. Follow federal
rules covering mobile radio and
telephone equipment.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Operation
Radio with CD (Base)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

(Information): Press to switch the

display between the radio station
frequency and the time. While the
ignition is off, press this button to
display the time.
Speed Compensated Volume
(SCV): Radios with the Speed
Compensated Volume (SCV) feature
automatically adjust the radio
volume to compensate for road and
wind noise as the vehicle speeds up
or slows down, so that the volume
level is consistent.
To activate SCV:
1. Set the radio volume to the
desired level.
Radio with CD (MP3) and USB Port shown, Radio with CD (MP3) similar 2. Press MENU to display the radio
setup menu.
The vehicle has one of these radios control functions that appear on the 3. Press the softkey under the
as its infotainment system. radio display as tabs directly above AUTO VOLUM tab on the radio
the softkeys. display.
Softkeys
The Radio with CD (MP3) and USB Using the Radio
Port, and the Radio with CD (MP3) O (Power/Volume): Press to turn
have five softkeys located below the the system on and off. Turn to
radio display. Softkeys are used to increase or decrease the volume.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

4. Press the softkey under the EQ (Equalization): Press this 3. Adjust the setting by doing one
desired Speed Compensated button to choose bass and treble of the following:
Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med, equalization settings designed for
or High) to select the level of different types of music. Selecting
. Turn the f knob clockwise
radio volume compensation. MANUAL or changing bass or or counterclockwise.
The display times out after treble, returns the EQ to the manual . Press the ¨ SEEK, or
approximately 10 seconds. Each bass and treble settings.
higher setting allows for more © SEEK button.
Unique EQ settings can be saved
radio volume compensation at for each source. . Press the \ FWD, or
faster vehicle speeds.
Setting the Tone (Bass/ s REV button.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
Midrange/Treble) Radio with If a station's frequency is weak or if
Radio with CD
CD (MP3) and USB Port, Radio there is static, decrease the treble.
To adjust the bass, or treble: with CD (MP3) To quickly adjust bass, midrange,
1. Press the f knob until Bass or BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or treble to the middle position,
Treble displays. or Treble): To adjust the bass, press the softkey positioned under
midrange, or treble: the BASS, MID, or TREB tab for
2. To adjust the setting, do one of more than 2 seconds. A beep
the following: 1. Press the f knob until the tone sounds and the level adjusts to the
. Turn the f knob. control tabs display. middle position.
2. Highlight the desired tone To quickly adjust all tone and
. Press either ¨ SEEK, or control tab by doing one of the speaker controls to the middle
© SEEK button. following: position, press the f knob for more
. Press either \ FWD, or . Pressing the f knob. than 2 seconds until a beep sounds.
s REV button. . Press the softkey under the
desired tab.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

EQ (Equalization): Press this 2. To adjust the setting, do one of 3. Adjust the setting by doing one
button to choose bass and treble the following: of the following:
equalization settings designed for
different types of music. Selecting
. Turn the f knob. . Turn the f knob clockwise
MANUAL or changing bass or or counterclockwise.
. Press either ¨ SEEK, or
treble, returns the EQ to the manual . Press the ¨ SEEK, or
bass and treble settings. © SEEK button.
© SEEK button.
Unique EQ settings can be saved . Press either \ FWD, or
for each source. s REV button. . Press the \ FWD, or
®
If the radio has a Bose audio s REV button.
system, the EQ settings are either Adjusting the Speakers
(Balance/Fade) Radio with CD To quickly adjust all speaker and
MANUAL or TALK. tone controls to the middle position,
(MP3) and USB Port, Radio
Adjusting the Speakers with CD (MP3) press the f knob for more than
(Balance/Fade) Radio with CD 2 seconds.
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To
To adjust the balance or fade: adjust the balance or fade: If the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) is
turned on, the radio disables FADE
1. Press the ` or press the f 1. Press the f knob until the and mutes the rear speakers.
knob until the speaker control speaker control tabs display.
label displays.
2. Highlight the desired speaker
control tab by doing one of the
following:
. Pressing the f knob.
. Press the softkey under the
desired tab.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Radio Messages Radio displays on the bottom line. When

information is not available, “NO
Calibration Error: Displays if the
INFO” displays.
radio is no longer calibrated AM-FM Radio
properly for the vehicle. The vehicle Auto Text (RDS Features): If
must be returned to your dealer for Radio Data System (RDS) additional information is available
service. The radio may have RDS. The RDS for the current song being played,
feature is available for use only on Auto Text will automatically page/
Loc or Locked: Displays when the
scroll the information every
TheftLock® system has activated. FM stations that broadcast RDS
information. This system relies upon three seconds above the FAV
Take the vehicle to your dealer for
receiving specific information from presets on the radio display. By
service.
these stations and only works when default, Auto Text is enabled.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if the information is available. While To change the Auto Text setting:
an error cannot be corrected, the radio is tuned to an FM-RDS
contact your dealer. 1. Press MENU to display the radio
station, the station name or call
setup menu.
letters display. In rare cases, a radio
station could broadcast incorrect 2. Press the softkey under AUTO
information that causes the radio TXT tab on the radio display.
features to work improperly. If this 3. Press the softkey under the ON
happens, contact the radio station. or OFF tab on the radio display.
4 (Information) (RDS Features): If 4 is pressed and the song title or
For vehicles with RDS features,
artist information is longer than what
press 4 to display additional text can be displayed, the extra
information related to the current information will page every
FM-RDS station. If information is three seconds when Auto Text is
available, the song title information activated.
displays on the top line of the
display and artist information
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Finding a Station
. To scan preset stations in the . To scan preset stations in the
selected band, press and hold selected band, press and hold
BAND: Press to choose © SEEK for four seconds until a ¨ SEEK for four seconds until a
between FM1, FM2, AM, or XM™ double beep sounds. The radio double beep sounds. The radio
(if equipped) on the Radio with CD goes to a stored preset, plays goes to a stored preset, plays for
(Base). Press to choose between for a few seconds, then goes to a few seconds, then goes to the
FM, AM, XM (if equipped) on the the next stored preset. Press next stored preset. Press
Radio with CD (MP3) and USB Port, © SEEK again to stop scanning ¨ SEEK again to stop scanning
or the Radio with CD (MP3). preset stations. preset stations.
f (Tune): Turn to select radio ¨ SEEK: Press to seek or scan Storing Radio Stations
stations. stations with a strong signal in the
Drivers are encouraged to store
© SEEK: Press to seek or scan selected band.
radio station while the vehicle is
stations with a strong signal in the . To seek stations, press and parked, see Defensive Driving on
selected band.
release ¨ SEEK to go to the page 9‑2. Tune to stored radio
. To seek stations, press and next station and stay there. stations using the presets, favorites
release © SEEK to go to the . To scan stations, press and hold
button, and steering wheel controls,
previous station and stay there. if the vehicle has this feature.
¨ SEEK for a few seconds until
. To scan stations, press and hold the radio beeps once. The radio
© SEEK for a few seconds until goes to a station, plays for a
the radio beeps once. The radio few seconds, then goes to the
goes to a station, plays for a next station. Press ¨ SEEK
few seconds, then goes to the again to stop scanning.
next station. Press © SEEK
again to stop scanning.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Radios that have a FAV button store To store preset stations: The number of favorites pages can
radio stations as favorites, up to 1. Tune to a radio station. be setup using the MENU button. To
36 stations can be programmed as setup the number of favorites
favorites using the 6 softkeys below 2. Press and hold one of the pages:
the radio station frequency tabs and 6 numbered pushbuttons for
3 seconds until a beep sounds. 1. Press the MENU button.
by using the FAV button. Press the
FAV button to go through up to 3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to store 2. Press the softkey located below
6 pages of favorites, each having additional radio stations. the FAV 1-6 tab.
6 favorite stations available per 3. Select the number of favorites
page. Each page of favorites can Storing a Radio Station as a pages by pressing the softkey
contain any combination of AM, FM, Favorite located below the displayed
or XM, if equipped, stations. Radio that have a FAV button store page numbers.
Radios that do not have a FAV radio stations as favorites.
4. Press the FAV button, or let the
button store radio stations as To store a station as a favorite: menu time out, to return to the
presets, up to 18 stations original main radio screen
(6 FM1, 6 FM2, and 6 AM), can be 1. Tune to a radio station.
showing the radio station
programmed on the 6 numbered 2. Press the FAV button to display frequency tabs and to begin the
pushbuttons. the page where the station will process of programming
be stored. favorites.
Storing a Radio Station as a
Preset 3. Press and hold one of the
Radios that have numbered 6 softkeys until a beep sounds.
pushbuttons store radio stations as 4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 to
presets. store additional radio stations.
Up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2,
and six AM), can be programmed on
the six numbered buttons.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Satellite Radio 4 (Information) (XM Satellite Radio If 4 is pressed and the song title or
Service): For vehicles with XM, artist information is longer than
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
press 4 to display additional text what can be displayed, the extra
XM is a satellite radio service that is information related to the current information will page every
based in the 48 contiguous United XM channel. If information is three seconds when Auto Text is
States and 10 Canadian provinces. available, the song title information activated.
XM Satellite Radio has a wide displays on the top line of the
variety of programming and
Finding an XM Channel
display and artist information
commercial-free music, displays on the bottom line. When BAND: Press to switch between
coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality information is not available, “NO AM, FM, or XM™, if equipped.
sound. A service fee is required to INFO” displays. f (Tune): Turn to manually select
receive the XM service. If XM an XM channel.
Service needs to be reactivated, the Auto Text (Satellite Radio
radio will display "No Subscription Service): If additional information is © SEEK: Press to go to the
Please Renew" on channel XM1. available for the current song being previous XM channel.
For more information, contact XM at played, Auto Text will automatically
page/scroll the information every
. To scan stations, press and hold
www.xmradio.com or call © SEEK for a few seconds until
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and three seconds above the FAV
presets on the radio display. By the radio beeps once. The radio
www.xmradio.ca or call goes to a cahnnel, plays for a
1-877-438-9677 in Canada. default, Auto Text is enabled.
few seconds, then goes to the
To change the Auto Text setting:
next station. Press © SEEK
1. Press MENU to display the radio again to stop scanning.
setup menu.
2. Press the softkey under AUTO
TXT tab on the radio display.
3. Press the softkey under the ON
or OFF tabInfoon
rmat
i
theovidradio
onPr edby:
display.

¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next 2. Press either of the two softkeys Adding and Removing Categories
XM channel. below the desired category tab Categories cannot be added or
.
to immediately tune to the first removed while the vehicle is moving
To scan stations, press and hold XM station in that category.
¨ SEEK for a few seconds until faster than 8 km/h (5 mph).
the radio beeps once. The radio To go to the previous or next XM To add or remove a category:
goes to a station, plays for a station in the selected category,
few seconds, then goes to the do one of the following: 1. Press the MENU button.
next station. Press ¨ SEEK . Turn the f knob. 2. Press the softkey located below
again to stop scanning. the XM CAT tab.
. Press the softkey below the
s REV: Press to go to the right or left arrows in the 3. Turn the f knob to display the
previous XM category. category tab. category you want to add or
\ FWD: Press to go to the next remove.
XM category.
. Press © SEEK or ¨ SEEK.
4. Press the softkey located under
3. To exit the category search the Add or Remove tab.
Finding a Category (CAT) mode, press the FAV button or
Channel BAND button to display the To restore all removed
favorites again. categories, press the softkey
To find XM channels in a category: under the Restore All tab.
1. Press the CAT button to display 5. Repeat the steps to remove
the category tabs. Continue more categories.
pressing the CAT button until the
desired category name displays.
. Radios with CD and DVD
can also navigate the
category list by pressing the
\ FWD or the s REV
button. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Storing XM Channels 3. Press and hold one of the XM Radio Messages

6 softkeys until a beep sounds.
Drivers are encouraged to store XL (Explicit Language
radio station while the vehicle is 4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 to Channels): These channels, or any
parked, see Defensive Driving on store additional radio stations. others, can be blocked at a
page 9‑2. Tune to stored radio The number of favorites pages can customer's request, by calling
stations using the presets, favorites be setup using the MENU button. To 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and
button, and steering wheel controls, setup the number of favorites 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
if the vehicle has this feature. pages: XM Updating: The encryption code
Up to 36 stations can be 1. Press the MENU button. in the receiver is being updated, and
programmed as favorites using the no action is required. This process
6 softkeys below the radio station 2. Press the softkey located below should take no longer than
frequency tabs and by using the the FAV 1-6 tab. 30 seconds.
FAV button. Press the FAV button to 3. Select the number of favorites No XM Signal: The system is
go through up to 6 pages of pages by pressing the softkey functioning correctly, but the vehicle
favorites, each having 6 favorite located below the displayed is in a location that is blocking the
stations available per page. Each page numbers. XM™ signal. When the vehicle is
page of favorites can contain any moved into an open area, the signal
combination of AM, FM, or XM, 4. Press the FAV button, or let the
menu time out, to return to the should return.
if equipped, stations.
original main radio screen Loading XM: The audio system is
Storing an XM Channel as a showing the radio station acquiring and processing audio and
Favorite frequency tabs and to begin the text data. No action is needed. This
To store a station as a favorite: process of programming message should disappear shortly.
favorites.
1. Tune to an XM channel. Channel Off Air: This channel is
not currently in service. Tune in to
2. Press the FAV button to display
another channel.
the page where the station will
be stored. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Channel Unauth : This channel is No Subscription Please Renew: Unknown: If this message is
blocked or cannot be received with XM subscription needs to be received when tuned to channel 0,
your XM Subscription package. reactivated. Contact XM at there could be a receiver fault.
Channel Unavail: This previously www.xmradio.com or call Consult with your dealer.
assigned channel is no longer 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and Check Antenna: If this message
assigned. Tune to another station. www.xmradio.ca or call does not clear within a short period
If this station was one of the 1-877-438-9677 in Canada. of time, the receiver or antenna
presets, choose another station for CAT Not Found: There are no could have a fault. Consult with your
that preset button. channels available for the selected dealer.
No Artist Info: No artist category. The system is working Check XM Receivr: If this
information is available at this time properly. message does not clear within a
on this channel. The system is XM Theftlocked: The XM receiver short period of time, the receiver
working properly. in the vehicle could have previously could have a fault. Consult with your
No Title Info: No song title been in another vehicle. For security dealer.
information is available at this time purposes, XM receivers cannot be XM Not Available: If this message
on this channel. The system is swapped between vehicles. If this does not clear within a short period
working properly. message is received after having of time, the receiver could have a
the vehicle serviced, check with fault. Consult with your dealer.
No CAT Info: No category your dealer.
information is available at this time
on this channel. The system is XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,
working properly. this message alternates with the
XM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label.
No Information: No text or This label is needed to activate the
informational messages are service.
available at this time on this
channel. The system is working
properly.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Radio Reception AM causing the sound to fade in and

out. In addition, traveling or standing
Frequency interference and static The range for most AM stations is
under heavy foliage, bridges,
can occur during normal radio greater than for FM, especially at
garages, or tunnels may cause loss
reception if items such as cell phone night. The longer range can cause
of the XM signal for a period of time.
chargers, vehicle convenience station frequencies to interfere with
accessories, and external electronic each other. For better radio Cellular Phone Usage
devices are plugged into the reception, most AM radio stations
boost the power levels during the Cellular phone usage may cause
accessory power outlet. If there is interference with the vehicle's radio.
interference or static, unplug the day, and then reduce these levels
during the night. Static can also This interference may occur when
item from the accessory power making or receiving phone calls,
outlet. occur when things like storms and
power lines interfere with radio charging the phone's battery,
FM reception. When this happens, try or simply having the phone on. This
reducing the treble on the radio. interference can cause an increased
FM signals only reach about 16 to level of static while listening to the
65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although the XM™ Satellite Radio Service radio. If static is received while
radio has a built-in electronic circuit listening to the radio, unplug the
that automatically works to reduce XM Satellite Radio Service gives
cellular phone and turn it off.
interference, some static can occur, digital radio reception from coast to
especially around tall buildings or coast in the 48 contiguous United
hills, causing the sound to fade in States, and in Canada. Just as with
and out. FM, tall buildings or hills can
interfere with satellite radio signals,
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Backglass Antenna not be covered by the vehicle Audio Players

warranty. Do not clear the inside
The AM-FM antenna is integrated rear window with sharp objects.
with the rear window defogger, CD Player
located in the rear window. Make Notice: Do not apply aftermarket
glass tinting with metallic film. Some CD players can play MP3
sure that the inside surface of the CD-R or CD-RW discs, see “MP3”
rear window is not scratched and The metallic film in some tinting
materials will interfere with or later in this section for more
that the lines on the glass are not information.
damaged. If the inside surface is distort the incoming radio
damaged, it could interfere with reception. Any damage caused to The CD player can play the smaller
radio reception. For proper radio your backglass antenna due to 8 cm (3 in) single discs with an
reception, the antenna connector metallic tinting materials will not adapter ring.
needs to be properly attached to the be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Care of the CD Player
post on the glass.
Do not add labels to a disc, it could
If a cellular telephone antenna Satellite Radio Antenna get caught in the CD player. Use a
needs to be attached to the glass,
For vehicles with XM satellite radio marking pen to write on the top of
make sure that the grid lines for the
service, the antenna is located on the disc if a description is needed.
AM-FM antenna are not damaged.
There is enough space between the the roof of the vehicle. Keep the Do not use CD lens cleaners, they
grid lines to attach a cellular antenna clear of obstructions for could damage the CD player.
telephone antenna without clear radio reception.
Notice: If a label is added to a
interfering with radio reception. CD, more than one CD is inserted
Notice: Using a razor blade or into the slot at a time, or an
sharp object to clear the inside attempt is made to play scratched
rear window can damage the rear or damaged CDs, the CD player
window antenna and/or the rear could be damaged. While using
window defogger. Repairs would the CD player, use only CDs in
good condition without any label,
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

load one CD at a time, and keep Inserting a Disc If the ignition or radio is turned off
the CD player and the loading slot when a CD is in the player, the CD
Insert the disc partway into the slot,
free of foreign materials, liquids, stays in the player. If the ignition or
label side up. The player pulls it in
and debris. radio is turned on when a CD is in
and the disc begins playing.
If an error displays, see “CD the player, the CD starts to play
Use an adapter ring when playing where it stopped, if it was the last
Messages” later in this section.
the smaller 8 cm (3 in) discs. selected audio source.
Care of CDs Smaller discs with the adapter ring
are loaded the same way as a Buttons and Knobs
Store a disc in its original case or a full-size disc. The buttons and knobs on the radio
protective case and away from
control the following features.
direct sunlight and dust. If the Ejecting a Disc
bottom of a disc is damaged it may f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on
not play properly or at all. Do not
Z EJECT: Press to eject the disc. the CD.
If the disc is not removed after
touch the bottom of a disc while © SEEK: Press to go to the start of
several seconds, the CD player
handling it, pick it up by grasping the current track, if more than
automatically pulls the disc back in.
the outer edges or the edge of the ten seconds have played. Press and
hole and the outer edge. Playing a CD hold or press multiple times to
If the surface of a disc is dirty, take When a CD is inserted into the continue moving backward through
a soft, lint free cloth or dampen a player the CD symbol displays, and the tracks on the CD.
clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral as each new track starts to play the ¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next
detergent solution mixed with water, track number displays. track. Press and hold or press
and clean it. Make sure the wiping multiple times to continue moving
process starts from the center to forward through the tracks on
the edge. the CD.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold Press this button again and the MP3 Supported Files
to reverse playback quickly within a system automatically searches for
The Radio with CD (MP3), Radio
track. Sound is heard at a reduced an auxiliary input device, such as a
with USB and CD (MP3), have the
volume and the elapsed time of the portable audio player. If a portable
capability of playing an MP3 CD-R
track displays. Release to resume audio player is not connected, No
or CD-RW disc.
playing the track. Aux Input Device Found may
display. The radio can also play discs that
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press contain both uncompressed CD
and hold to advance playback Softkeys audio and MP3 files. When a disc
quickly within a track. Sound is The five softkeys below the radio contains both types of audio, the CD
heard at a reduced volume and the display are used to control functions player reads all MP3 files first, then
elapsed time of the track displays. that display as tabs. the uncompressed CD audio files.
Release to resume playing the
track. The softkeys below the radio display Supported File and Folder
control the following features. Structure
4 (Information): Press to display
available additional information RDM (Random): Tracks can be The radio supports:
about the current track. listened to in random, rather than . Up to 50 folders.
sequential order.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio . Up to 8 folders in depth.
while a CD is playing. The CD To use random:
remains inside the CD player.
. Up to 50 playlists.
1. Press the softkey below RDM
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to tab until Random Current Disc . Up to 255 files.
play a CD while listening to the displays. . Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl
radio or a portable audio device. 2. Press the softkey again to turn extension.
off random play. . Files with an .mp3 or .cda file
extension.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Root Directory Playlists

. Play begins from the first track in
the first folder and continues
The root directory is treated as a Discs that have playlists that sequentially through all tracks in
folder. Files are stored in the root were created using WinAmp™, each folder. When the last track
directory when the disc or storage MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ of the last folder has played,
device does not contain folders. software can be accessed, however, play continues from the first
Files accessed from the root there is no playlist editing capability track of the first folder.
directory of a disc display as using the radio. These playlists are
F1 ROOT. treated as special folders containing When playback starts from a new
compressed audio song files. folder, the new track name displays
Empty Folder unless folder mode has been
Folders that do not contain files are Playing an MP3 chosen as the default display, then
skipped, and the player advances to the new folder name displays.
Order of Play
the next folder that contains files. Buttons and Knobs
Tracks are played in the following
File Naming order: The buttons and knobs on the radio
The song name that displays is the . Play begins from the first track in control the following features.
song name that is contained in the the first playlist and continues f (Tune): Turn to select MP3 files
ID3 tag. If the song name is not sequentially through all tracks in on the disc.
present in the ID3 tag, then the each playlist. When the last
radio displays the file name without track of the last playlist has
© SEEK: Press to go to the start of
the file extension as the track name. the track, if more than ten seconds
played, play continues from the
have played. Press and hold or
Track names longer than first track of the first playlist.
press multiple times to continue
32 characters or four pages are moving backward through tracks.
shortened. The display does not
show parts of words on the last
page of text and the extension of
the filename is not displayed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to RDM (Random): MP3 files can be
track. Press and hold or press play an MP3 disc while listening to listened to on a CD in random,
multiple times to continue moving the radio or a portable audio device. rather than sequential order. To use
forward through tracks. Press this button again and the random:
system automatically searches for
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold an auxiliary input device, such as a
1. Press the softkey under the
to reverse playback quickly. Sound RDM tab until Random Current
portable audio player. If a portable Disc displays to play songs from
is heard at a reduced volume and audio player is not connected, No
the elapsed time of the track the current CD in random order.
Aux Input Device Found may
displays. Release s REV to display. 2. Press the same softkey again to
resume playing. turn off random play.
Softkeys
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press h (Music Navigator): Press the
The five softkeys below the radio
and hold to advance playback softkey below h to have the files
quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced display are used to control functions
that display as tabs. played in order by artist or album.
volume and the elapsed time of the The player scans the disc to sort the
track displays. Release \ FWD to The softkeys below the radio display files by artist and album ID3 tag
resume playing. control the following features. information. It can take several
S c (Previous Folder): Press minutes to scan the disc depending
on the number of files on the disc.
available additional information the softkey below S c to go to the
The radio may begin playing while it
about the current track. first track in the previous folder. is scanning in the background.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio c T (Next Folder): Press the
while an MP3 disc is playing. The softkey below c T to go to the first
MP3 disc remains inside the CD track in the next folder.
player.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

When the scan is finished, the disc The album name displays on the
. The air is very humid. If so, wait
begins playing files in order by second line between the arrows and about an hour and try again.
artist. The current artist playing is songs from the current album . A problem may have occurred
shown on the second line of the begins to play. Once all songs from while burning the disc.
display. Once all songs by that artist that album have played, the player
are played, the player moves to the moves to the next album in
. The label could be caught in the
next artist in alphabetical order and alphabetical order on the disc and CD player.
begins playing files by that artist. begins playing MP3 files from that If the disc is not playing correctly for
To listen to files by another artist, album. any other reason, try a known
press the softkey located below To exit music navigator mode, press good disc.
either arrow tab. The disc goes to the softkey below the Back tab to If any error occurs repeatedly or if
the next or previous artist in return to normal MP3 playback. an error cannot be corrected,
alphabetical order. Continue contact your dealer. If the radio
pressing either softkey below the CD Player Messages displays an error message, write it
arrow tab until the desired artist CHECK DISC: If an error message down and provide it to your dealer
displays. displays and/or the disc comes out, when reporting the problem.
To change from playback by artist to it could be for one of the following
playback by album: reasons: Auxiliary Devices
. The CD player is very hot. When
1. Press the softkey located below This vehicle may have a 3.5 mm
the Sort By tab. the temperature returns to (1/8 in) auxiliary input jack and a
normal, the disc should play. USB port, located on the audio
2. Press one of the softkeys below faceplate. Some portable audio
the album tab from the sort
. The road is very rough. When
the road becomes smoother, the devices such as iPods®, MP3
screen. players, and USB storage devices
disc should play.
3. Press the softkey below the can be connected to the vehicle
back tab to return to the main
. The disc is dirty, scratched, wet, using a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable or a
music navigator screen. or upside down. USB cable.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Drivers are encouraged to set up O (Power/Volume): Turn to adjust that are stored on a USB storage
any auxiliary device while the the volume. Additional volume device as well as tracks that are
vehicle is in P (Park). See adjustments may have to be made stored on an iPod®.
Defensive Driving on page 9‑2 for from the portable device if the
more information on driver USB Supported File and Folder
volume is too quiet or not loud. Structure
distraction.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio The radio supports:
Using the 3.5 mm (1/8 in) while a portable audio device is
Auxiliary Input Jack connected to the auxiliary input. The
. Up to 700 folders.
portable audio device continues . Up to 8 folders in depth.
The radio system may have a
playing until it is stopped or
3.5 mm (1/8 in) auxiliary input jack . Up to 65,535 files.
turned off.
located on the lower right or left side
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to
. Folder and file names up to
of the faceplate. This is not an audio
play a CD while a portable audio 64 bytes.
output; do not plug the headphone
set into the front auxiliary input jack. device is connected to the auxiliary . Files with an .mp3 or .wma file
An external audio device such as an input. Press again and the system extension.
iPod®, laptop computer, MP3 player, begins playing audio from the . AAC files stored on an iPod.
CD changer, etc. can be connected connected portable audio player. If a
to the auxiliary input jack for use as portable audio player is not . FAT16
another audio source. connected, No Aux Input Device . FAT32
may display.
To use a portable audio player, Root Directory
connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable to Using the USB Port
the auxiliary input jack. When a The root directory is treated as a
device is connected, press the CD/ The radio may have a USB port folder. Files are stored in the root
AUX button to begin playing audio located on the lower right side of the directory when the disc or storage
from the device over the vehicle faceplate. Radios that have a USB device does not contain folders.
speakers. port can play .mp3 and .wma files
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Files accessed from the root Order of Play Connecting a USB Storage
directory of a USB device display as Tracks are played in the following Device or iPod
F1 ROOT. order: The radio buttons, knobs and
Empty Folder . Play begins from the first track in softkeys are used to control a USB
Folders that do not contain files are the first playlist and continues storage device or an iPod when it is
skipped, and the player advances to sequentially through all tracks in connected to the USB port.
the next folder that contains files. each playlist. When the last To connect a USB storage device,
track of the last playlist has connect the device to the USB port
File Naming played, play continues from the located on the front of the radio.
The song name that displays is the first track of the first playlist.
To connect an iPod, connect one
song name that is contained in the . Play begins from the first track in end of the USB cable that came
ID3 tag. If the song name is not the first folder and continues with the iPod to the iPod’s dock
present in the ID3 tag, then the sequentially through all tracks in connector and connect the other
radio displays the file name without each folder. When the last track end to the USB port located on the
the file extension as the track name. of the last folder has played, front of the radio. If the vehicle is on
Track names longer than 32 play continues from the first and the USB connection works, “OK
characters or four pages are track of the first folder. to disconnect” and a GM logo may
shortened. The display does not When play enters a new folder, the appear on the iPod and iPod
show parts of words on the last display does not automatically show appears on the radio's display.
page of text and the extension of the new folder name unless the The iPod charges while it is
the filename is not displayed. folder mode has been chosen as connected to the USB port if the
Preprogrammed Playlists the default display. The new track ingition is in the ACC/ACCESSORY
name displays. or ON/RUN position. When the
Playlists that have an .m3u or .pls
ignition is turned OFF, the iPod
file extension and are stored on a
automatically powers off and will not
USB device may be supported by
charge or draw power from the
the radio with a USB port.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: vehicle's battery.

Older iPod's that are not supported s REV (Reverse): Press and hold j (Pause): Press the softkey below
can still be used by connecting it to to reverse playback quickly. Sound j to pause the track. The tab
the 3.5 mm (1/8 in) auxiliary input is heard at a reduced volume. appears raised when pause is being
jack using a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable. Release s REV to resume playing. used. Press the softkey below j
Using a USB Storage Device \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press again to resume playback.
or iPod and hold to advance playback Back: Press the softkey below the
The buttons and knobs on the radio quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced back tab to go back to the main
and the softkeys below the radio volume. Release \ FWD to display screen on an iPod, or the
display are used to control a USB resume playing. root directory on a USB storage
storage device or an iPod. device.
Buttons and Knobs additional information about the c (Folder View): Press the
selected track. softkey below c to view the
The buttons and knobs on the radio
contents of the current folder on the
control the following features. Softkeys USB drive.
f (Tune): Turn to select files. The five softkeys below the radio To browse and select files:
© SEEK: Press to go to the start of display are used to control functions
the track, if more than ten seconds that display as tabs. 1. Press the softkey below c.
have played. Press and hold © To use the softkeys, press a softkey 2. Turn f to scroll through the list
SEEK or press it multiple times to below any tab that is displayed, or if
of folders.
continue moving backward through no tabs are displayed, press the first
tracks. or last softkey below the radio 3. Press f to select the desired
display to display the tabs. folder. If there is more then one
¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next
folder, repeat Steps 1 and 2 until
The softkeys below the radio display
track. Press and hold ¨ SEEK or the desired folder is reached.
control the following features.
press it multiple times to continue
moving forward through tracks.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


. Albums . Third softkey, 5% through the list
4. Turn f to scroll through the files
. Genres each time the softkey is pressed.
in the selected folder.
. Fourth softkey, 10% through the
. Songs
5. Press f to select the desired file list each time the softkey is
to be played. . Composers pressed.
To skip through large lists, the five To select tracks: . Fifth softkey, end of the list.
softkeys can be used to navigate in
the following order: 1. Press the softkey below h. " (Repeat All): Press the softkey
below " to repeat all tracks. The
. First softkey, first item in the list. 2. Turn f to scroll through the list
tab appears lowered when Repeat
. Second softkey, 1% through the of menus. All is being used. This is the default
list each time the softkey is 3. Press f to select the mode when a USB storage device
pressed. desired menu. or iPod is first connected.
. Third softkey, 5% through the list
4. Turn f to scroll through the
' (Repeat Track): Press the
each time the softkey is pressed. softkey below ' to repeat one
folders or files in the
. Fourth softkey, 10% through the selected menu. track. The tab appears raised when
list each time the softkey is Repeat Track is being used.
pressed. 5. Press f to select the track.
Press the softkey below >, 2,
. Fifth softkey, end of the list. To skip through large lists, the five < or = to select between
softkeys can be used to navigate in
h (Music Navigator): Press the the following order:
Shuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs/
softkey below h to view and Shuffle Songs, Shuffle Album,
. First softkey, first item in the list. or Shuffle Folder.
select a track on an iPod. Files are
sorted by: . Second softkey, 1% through the
. Playlists list each time the softkey is
pressed.
. Artists
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


. Review the controls and
> (Shuffle Off): Press the Phone operation of the infotainment
softkey below 2 to turn shuffle system.
off. This is the default mode when a Bluetooth . Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.
USB storage device or iPod is first
connected. For vehicles equipped with The system may not work with
Bluetooth capability, the system can all cell phones. See “Pairing a
2 (Shuffle All Songs / Shuffle interact with many cell phones, Phone” in this section for more
Songs): Press the softkey below allowing: information.
= or < to shuffle all songs on
the USB storage device or iPod.
. Placement and receipt of calls in . If the cell phone has voice
a hands-free mode. dialing capability, learn to use
< (Shuffle Album): Press the that feature to access the
. Sharing of the cell phone’s
softkey below > to shuffle all address book or contact list with address book or contact list. See
songs in the current album on the vehicle. “Voice Pass-Thru” in this section
an iPod. for more information.
To minimize driver distraction,
= (Shuffle Folder): Press the before driving, and with the vehicle
softkey below > to shuffle all parked:
songs in the current folder on a USB . Become familiar with the
storage device.
features of the cell phone.
Organize the phone book and
contact lists clearly and delete
duplicate or rarely used entries.
If possible, program speed dial
or other shortcuts.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


. See “Storing and Deleting Phone system. See www.gm.com/bluetooth Audio System
Numbers” in this section for for more information on compatible
more information. When using the in‐vehicle Bluetooth
phones.
system, sound comes through the
Voice Recognition vehicle's front audio system
{ WARNING speakers and overrides the audio
The Bluetooth system uses voice system. Use the audio system
When using a cell phone, it can recognition to interpret voice
be distracting to look too long or volume knob, during a call, to
commands to dial phone numbers change the volume level. The
too often at the screen of the and name tags. adjusted volume level remains in
phone or the infotainment
For additional information say “Help” memory for later calls. To prevent
(navigation) system. Taking your
while you are in a voice missed calls, a minimum volume
eyes off the road too long or too recognition menu. level is used if the volume is turned
often could cause a crash down too low.
resulting in injury or death. Focus Noise: Keep interior noise levels to
your attention on driving. a minimum. The system may not Bluetooth Controls
recognize voice commands if there
is too much background noise. Use the buttons located on the
Vehicles with a Bluetooth system steering wheel to operate the in‐
can use a Bluetooth capable cell When to Speak: A short tone vehicle Bluetooth system. See
phone with a Hands Free Profile to sounds after the system responds Steering Wheel Controls on
make and receive phone calls. The indicating when it is waiting for a page 5‑2 for more information.
system can be used while the key is voice command. Wait until the tone
and then speak. b g (Push To Talk) : Press to
in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY answer incoming calls, to confirm
position. The range of the Bluetooth How to Speak: Speak clearly in a system information, and to start
system can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft). calm and natural voice. speech recognition.
Not all phones support all functions,
and not all phones are guaranteed x c (Phone On Hook): Press to
to work with the in-vehicle Bluetooth end a call, reject a call, or to cancel
an operation.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Pairing
. Only one paired cell phone can 5. Locate the device named “Your
be connected to the Bluetooth Vehicle” in the list on the cell
A Bluetooth cell phone must be system at a time. phone. Follow the instructions
paired to the Bluetooth system and . If multiple paired cell phones are on the cell phone to enter the
then connected to the vehicle before
within range of the system, the PIN number that was provided in
it can be used. See your cell phone
system connects to the first Step 3. After the PIN number is
manufacturers user guide for
available paired cell phone in the successfully entered, the system
Bluetooth functions before pairing
order that they were first paired prompts you to provide a name
the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone
to the system. To link to a for the paired cell phone. This
is not connected, calls will be made
different paired phone, see name will be used to indicate
using OnStar® Hands‐Free Calling,
“Linking to a Different Phone” which phones are paired and
if available. Refer to the OnStar
later in this section. connected to the vehicle, see
owner's guide for more information.
“Listing All Paired and
Pairing Information Pairing a Phone Connected Phones” later in this
1. Press and hold b g for section for more information.
. Up to five cell phones can be
paired to the Bluetooth system. two seconds. 6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to pair
additional phones.
. The pairing process is disabled 2. Say “Bluetooth.”
when the vehicle is moving. 3. Say “Pair.” The system responds
. Pairing only needs to be with instructions and a four‐digit
completed once, unless the PIN number. The PIN number is
pairing information on the cell used in Step 5.
phone changes or the cell phone 4. Start the pairing process on the
is deleted from the system. cell phone that you want to pair.
For help with this process, see
your cell phone manufacturers
user guide.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Listing All Paired and Connected Connecting to a Different Phone Storing and Deleting Phone
Phones To connect to a different cell phone, Numbers
The system can list all cell phones the Bluetooth system looks for the The system can store up to
paired to it. If a paired cell phone is next available cell phone in the 30 phone numbers as name tags in
also connected to the vehicle, the order in which all the available cell the Hands Free Directory that is
system responds with “is connected” phones were paired. Depending on shared between the Bluetooth and
after that phone name. which cell phone you want to OnStar systems.
connect to, you may have to use
1. Press and hold b g for this command several times. The following commands are used
two seconds. delete and store phone numbers.
2. Say “Bluetooth.”
1. Press and hold b g for Store: This command will store a
two seconds. phone number, or a group of
3. Say “List.”
2. Say “Bluetooth.” numbers as a name tag.
Deleting a Paired Phone 3. Say “Change phone.” Digit Store: This command allows
If the phone name you want to a phone number to be stored as a
. If another cell phone is
delete is unknown, see “Listing All name tag by entering the digits one
found, the response will be
Paired and Connected Phones.” at a time.
“<Phone name> is now
1. Press and hold b g for connected.” Delete: This command is used to
two seconds. delete individual name tags.
. If another cell phone is not
2. Say “Bluetooth.” found, the original phone Delete All Name Tags: This
remains connected. command deletes all stored name
3. Say “Delete.” The system asks tags in the Hands Free Calling
for which phone to delete. Directory and the OnStarTurn by
4. Say the name of the phone you Turn Destinations Directory.
want to delete.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Using the “Store” Command 3. Say each digit, one at a time, To delete all name tags:
that you want to store. After
1. Press and hold b g for each digit is entered, the system 1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds. repeats back the digit it heard two seconds.
2. Say “Store.” followed by a tone. After the last 2. Say “Delete all name tags.”
digit has been entered, say
3. Say the phone number or group “Store,” and then follow the Listing Stored Numbers
of numbers you want to store all directions given by the system to
at once with no pauses, then The list command will list all the
save a name tag for this number. stored numbers and name tags.
follow the directions given by the
system to save a name tag for Using the “Delete” Command Using the “List” Command
this number.
1. Press and hold b g for 1. Press and hold b g for
Using the “Digit Store” Command two seconds. two seconds.
If an unwanted number is 2. Say “Delete.” 2. Say “Directory.”
recognized by the system, say
“Clear” at any time to clear the last 3. Say the name tag you want to 3. Say “Hands Free Calling.”
number. delete.
4. Say “List.”
To hear all of the numbers Using the “Delete All Name Tags”
Command Making a Call
recognized by the system, say
“Verify” at any time. This command deletes all stored Calls can be made using the
name tags in the Hands Free following commands.
1. Press and hold b g for Calling Directory and the
two seconds. Dial or Call: The dial or call
OnStarTurn by Turn Destinations command can be used
2. Say “Digit Store.” Directory. interchangeably to dial a phone
number or a stored name tag.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Digit Dial: This command allows a If an unwanted number is Using the “Re‐dial” Command
phone number to be dialed by recognized by the system, say
entering the digits one at a time. “Clear” at any time to clear the last 1. Press and hold b g for
number. two seconds.
Re‐dial : This command is used to
dial the last number used on the cell To hear all of the numbers 2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial.”
phone. recognized by the system, say Once connected, the person called
“Verify” at any time. will be heard through the audio
Using the “Dial” or “Call”
speakers.
Command 1. Press and hold b g for
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. Receiving a Call
two seconds. 2. Say “Digit Dial.” When an incoming call is received,
3. Say each digit, one at a time, the audio system mutes and a ring
2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”
that you want to dial. After each tone is heard in the vehicle.
3. Say the entire number without digit is entered, the system
pausing or say the name tag.
. Press b g to answer the call.
repeats back the digit it heard
Once connected, the person called followed by a tone. After the last . Press x c to ignore a call.
will be heard through the audio digit has been entered,
speakers. say “Dial.” Call Waiting
Using the “Digit Dial” Command Once connected, the person called Call waiting must be supported on
will be heard through the audio the cell phone and enabled by the
The digit dial command allows a wireless service carrier.
speakers.
phone number to be dialed by
entering the digits one at a time. . Press b g to answer an
After each digit is entered, the incoming call when another call
system repeats back the digit it is active. The original call is
heard followed by a tone. placed on hold.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

. Press b g again to return to the Ending a Call To Transfer Audio From the
original call. Bluetooth System to a Cell Phone
Press x c to end a call.
. To ignore the incoming call, no During a call with the audio in the
action is required. Muting a Call vehicle:
. Press x c to disconnect the During a call, all sounds from inside 1. Press b g.
current call and switch to the call the vehicle can be muted so that the
person on the other end of the call 2. Say “Transfer Call.”
on hold.
cannot hear them. To Transfer Audio to the Bluetooth
Three‐Way Calling System From a Cell Phone
To mute a call, press b g, and then
Three‐way calling must be say “Mute Call.” During a call with the audio on the
supported on the cell phone and
cell phone, press b g. The audio
enabled by the wireless service To cancel mute, press b g, and transfers to the vehicle. If the audio
carrier. then say “Un‐mute Call.”
does not transfer to the vehicle, use
1. While on a call, press b g. Transferring a Call the audio transfer feature on the cell
phone. See your cell phone
2. Say “Three‐way call.” Audio can be transferred between manufacturers user guide for more
3. Use the dial or call command to the Bluetooth system and the cell information.
dial the number of the third party phone.
to be called. The cell phone must be paired and
4. Once the call is connected, connected with the Bluetooth
system before a call can be
press b g to link all the callers transferred. The connection process
together. can take up to two minutes after the
ignition is turned to ON/RUN.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Voice Pass-Thru Dual Tone Multi-Frequency Clearing the System

Voice pass‐thru allows access to the (DTMF) Tones Unless information is deleted out of
voice recognition commands on the The Bluetooth system can send the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system, it
cell phone. See your cell phone numbers and the numbers stored as will be retained indefinitely. This
manufacturers user guide to see if name tags during a call. You can includes all saved name tags in the
the cell phone supports this feature. use this feature when calling a phone book and phone pairing
To access contacts stored in the cell menu driven phone system. Account information. For information on how
phone: numbers can also be stored for use. to delete this information, see the
previous sections on Deleting a
1. Press and hold b g for Sending a Number or Name Tag Paired Phone and Deleting
During a Call Name Tags.
two seconds.
2. Say “Bluetooth.” The system 1. Press b g. The system Other Information
responds “Bluetooth ready,” responds “Ready,” followed by
a tone. The Bluetooth® word mark and
followed by a tone.
logos are owned by the Bluetooth®
3. Say “Voice.” The system 2. Say “Dial.” SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
responds “OK, accessing 3. Say the number or name tag by General Motors is under license.
<phone name>.” to send. Other trademarks and trade names
. The cell phone's normal are those of their respective owners.
prompt messages will go See Radio Frequency Statement on
through its cycle according page 13‑19 for FCC information.
to the phone's operating
instructions.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Climate Controls 8-1
Climate Controls Climate Control Systems

The heating, cooling and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled with
Climate Control Systems this system.
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Automatic Climate Control
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Air Vents
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
A. Fan Control E. Air Delivery Mode Control

B. Recirculation F. Air Conditioning
C. Temperature Control G. Rear Window Defogger
D. Outside Air
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

8-2 Climate Controls
Operation Select from the following: light will turn on. If the button is
H (Vent): Air is directed to the pressed again, the light will turn off.
Temperature Control: Turn
instrument panel outlets. The recirculation mode cannot be
clockwise or counterclockwise to
selected while in the defog mode.
increase or decrease the ) (Bi-Level): Air is divided Do not drive the vehicle until all the
temperature inside the vehicle. between the instrument panel and windows are clear.
When it is cold outside −18°C (0°F) floor outlets. Some air will be
or lower, use the engine coolant directed toward the side windows. 1 (Defrost): This mode quickly
clears the windshield of fog or frost.
heater, if vehicle has one, to provide 6 (Floor): Air is directed to the Air is directed to the windshield with
warmer air faster to the vehicle. An floor outlets with some air directed some air directed to the floor vents.
engine coolant heater warms the to the windshield and side window In this mode, outside air is pulled
coolant the engine uses that outlets. into the vehicle. The air-conditioning
provides heat to warm the inside of
- (Defog): This mode clears the compressor will not run unless the
the vehicle. For more information,
windows of fog or moisture. Air is outside temperature is at or below
see Engine Heater on page 9‑19.
directed to the windshield and floor freezing. The air-conditioning
9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise outlets, with some air directed to the compressor operates although the
or counterclockwise to increase or side windows. When this mode is indicator light is not on. The
decrease the fan speed. The fan selected, the system automatically air-conditioning indicator light turns
must be on to run the turns off recirculation and runs the off when defrost is selected. If the
air-conditioning compressor. air-conditioning compressor unless air-conditioning button is pressed
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn the outside temperature is at or while in defrost mode, the indicator
clockwise or counterclockwise to below freezing. The air-conditioning light turns on. If the button is
change the current airflow mode. compressor operates although the pressed again, the light turns off.
indicator light is not on. The Recirculation cannot be selected
air-conditioning indicator light turns while in the defrost mode.
off when defog is selected. If the
air-conditioning button is pressed
while in defogInmode,
f
ormat
ionPr
the
ovi
indicator
dedby:

To help clear the windshield quickly, For quick cool down on hot days, do cannot be used with the
do the following: the following: recirculation mode. Press : to
1. Select 0. 1. Select the C vent mode. cancel the recirculation mode.
2. Select the highest temperature. 2. Select the highest fan speed. ? (Recirculation): Press to turn
the recirculation mode on. An
3. Select the highest fan speed. 3. Select # air conditioning. indicator light comes on to show
# (Air Conditioning): Press to that it is on. This mode recirculates
4. Select the ? and helps to quickly cool the air
turn the air conditioning system on
or off. An indicator light comes on to recirculation mode. inside the vehicle. It can be used to
show it is on. 5. Select the coolest temperature. prevent outside air and odors
from entering the vehicle. The
The air-conditioning system Using these settings together for recirculation indicator light blinks
removes moisture from the air, so a long periods of time can cause the three times if you try to use
small amount of water might drip air inside of the vehicle to become recirculation in a mode in which it
under the vehicle while it is idling or too dry. To prevent this from cannot function.
after the engine is turned off is happening, after the air in the
normal. vehicle has cooled, turn the Pressing this button cancels the
recirculation mode off. outside air mode. When switching to
Maximum Air Conditioning the defog or defrost modes the
: (Outside Air): Press to turn system automatically moves from
On hot days, open the windows to the outside air mode on. An
let hot inside air escape; then close recirculation to outside air. When
indicator light comes on to show the vehicle or fan is turned off and
them. This helps reduce the time it that it is on. Air from outside the
takes for the vehicle to cool down. back on, the system defaults to
vehicle will circulate throughout the outside air automatically. Only use
It also helps the air conditioning vehicle. The outside air mode can
system operate more efficiently. recirculation mode when it is
be used with all modes, but it needed for comfort, since window
fogging can occur.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Rear Window Defogger If the vehicle has heated outside Remote Start Climate Control
mirrors, the surface of the outside Operation
The rear window defogger uses a
mirrors heat when the rear window For vehicles with the remote start
warming grid to remove fog or frost
defogger is activated. See Heated feature, when it is activated the
from the rear window.
Mirrors on page 2‑14. climate control system heats or
< REAR: Press to turn the rear Notice: Do not use anything cools the inside of the vehicle using
window defogger on or off. An
sharp on the inside of the rear the modes that were set before the
indicator light comes on to show
window. If you do, you could cut vehicle was turned off. The climate
that the rear window defogger is on.
or damage the warming grid, and control knobs will remain active
Be sure to clear as much snow from
the repairs would not be covered during a remote start. However, the
the rear window as possible.
by the vehicle warranty. Do not climate control buttons will be
If driving below 80 km/h (50 mph), attach a temporary vehicle inactive until the ignition is turned
the rear window defogger turns off license, tape, a decal, or anything on by the key. If the fan is off, the
about 15 minutes after the button is similar to the defogger grid. climate control system will not
pressed. If turned on again, the operate during remote start. See
defogger only runs for about Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
seven minutes before turning off. System Operation on page 2‑3.
The defogger can also be turned off
by turning off the engine.
If the vehicle's speed is maintained
above 80 km/h (50 mph), the rear
window defogger remains on once
the button is pressed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Automatic Climate Control System Automatic Operation

For vehicles with this system, the heating, cooling, and ventilation can be AUTO (Automatic): Select AUTO
automatically controlled. on both the fan speed control and
the air delivery mode control knobs
to activate the automatic system.
When automatic operation is active
the system controls the inside
temperature and air delivery.
To place the system in automatic
mode do the following:
1. Turn the fan knob and the mode
knob to the AUTO position.
The current set temperature
displays. When AUTO is
selected, the air conditioning
operation and air inlet is
A. Fan Control E. Rear Window Defogger automatically controlled. The air
conditioning compressor runs
B. Air Conditioning F. Air Delivery Mode Control
while the outside temperature is
C. Recirculation G. Display over about 40°F (4°C). The air
D. Outside Air H. Temperature Control inlet will normally be set to
outside air. If it is hot outside,
the air inlet may automatically
switch to recirculate inside air to
help quickly cool down the
vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

2. Set the temperature. To avoid blowing cold air at Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn
An initial setting of 73°F (23°C) engine start-up in cold weather, clockwise or counterclockwise to
is recommended. Allow about the system delays turning on the change the direction of the airflow in
20 minutes for the system to fan until warm air is available. the vehicle.
The length of delay depends on
regulate. Press w or x to the engine coolant temperature.
Select from the following:
adjust the temperature setting as Turning the fan knob overrides H (Vent): Air is directed to the
necessary. If the temperature is this delay and changes the fan instrument panel outlets.
set at 60°F (15°C) the system to the selected speed.
remains at the maximum cooling ) (Bi-Level): Air is divided
setting. If the temperature is set Manual Operation between the instrument panel
at 90°F (32°C) the system outlets and the floor outlets.
9 (Off): Select this position on the
remains at the maximum heat fan knob to turn off the entire 6 (Floor): Air is directed to the
setting. Choosing either climate control system. Outside air floor outlets with some air directed
maximum setting does not cause still enters the vehicle. The airflow to the side window outlets.
the vehicle to heat or cool any direction and temperature can be - (Defog): This mode clears the
faster. adjusted. windows of fog or moisture. Air is
Do not to cover the sensor x / w Temperature Control: directed to the floor and windshield
located on the top of the Press the arrows to increase or outlets.
instrument panel near the decrease the temperature inside the 0 (Defrost): This mode clears the
windshield. This sensor vehicle. windows of fog or frost more quickly.
regulates air temperature based The system automatically controls
on the intensity of the sun. 9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise
or counterclockwise to increase or the fan speed if defrost is selected
Also do not cover the sensor decrease the fan speed. from the AUTO mode. If the outside
grille on the lower right side of temperature is 4°C (40°F) or
the climate control faceplate, as warmer, the air conditioning
this regulates the inside compressor automatically runs to
temperature. help dehumidify the air and dry the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

windshield. The air conditioning In AUTO mode the system cools h (Recirculation): Press to turn
indicator light blinks three times if and dehumidifies the air inside the the recirculation mode on. An
the compressor is turned off while in vehicle. Also while in AUTO mode, indicator light above the button
this mode. the system maximizes its comes on to show it is on. This
# (Air Conditioning): Press turn performance by using recirculation mode recirculates and helps to
the air conditioning on and off. An as necessary. quickly cool the air inside the
indicator light turns on to show the Heating: On cold days when using vehicle. It can be used to help
air conditioning is on. manual operation of the automatic prevent outside air and odors
system, use floor mode to deliver air from entering the vehicle. The
When air conditioning is selected or recirculation indicator light blinks
is in AUTO mode, the system runs to the floor outlets. To warm or cool
the air delivered, press x or w to three times if you try to use
the air conditioning automatically to recirculation in a mode in which it
cool and dehumidify the air entering the desired temperature setting.
cannot function.
the vehicle. To use the automatic mode, turn the
Pressing this button cancels the
On hot days, open the windows long knob to AUTO and press x or w to auto recirculation feature. Each time
enough to let hot inside air escape. adjust the temperature. the vehicle is started, the system
This reduces the time it takes for the reverts to the auto recirculation
vehicle to cool down. Then keep the : (Outside Air): Press to turn
the outside air mode on. An function.
windows closed for the air
conditioner to work its best. indicator light comes on to show it is The recirculation mode cannot be
on. Air from outside the vehicle will used with the floor, defrost, or defog
On cool, but sunny days while using circulate throughout the vehicle. The modes. If recirculation is selected in
manual operation of the automatic outside air mode can be used with these modes, the indicator flashes
system, use bi-level to deliver warm all modes, but it cannot be used three times and turns off to indicate
air to the floor and cooler air to the with the recirculation mode. that this is not allowed. This is to
instrument panel outlets. To warm or Pressing this button cancels the prevent window fogging.
cool the air delivered, press the recirculation mode.
temperature buttons to the desired
setting. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

When the weather is cool or damp, For vehicles with heated outside If the fan is off, the climate control
operating the system in recirculation mirrors, the surface of the outside system will not operate during
for extended periods of time can mirrors will also heat when the rear remote start.
cause fogging of the vehicle's window defogger is activated. See With the automatic climate control
windows. To clear the fog, select Heated Mirrors on page 2‑14. system, the climate control displays
either defog or defrost. Make sure Notice: Do not use a razor blade “RS” in place of the temperature to
the air conditioning is on. Allow the or sharp object to clear the inside indicate that remote start is
air conditioning to run automatically rear window. Do not adhere activated. For best performance,
to help dehumidify the air. anything to the defogger grid turn both the fan and mode knobs to
Rear Window Defogger lines in the rear glass. These AUTO. If the temperature is cold
actions may damage the rear enough and the mode knob is set to
The rear window defogger uses a defogger. Repairs would not be AUTO, the system begins in defrost
warming grid to remove fog from the covered by your warranty. to clear the windows. See Remote
rear window. Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Remote Start Climate Control
< (Rear): Press to turn the rear
Operation
Operation on page 2‑3.
window defogger on or off. An
indicator light comes on to show For vehicles with remote start, when
that the rear window defogger is on. it is activated the climate control
system heats and cools the inside of
If driving below 80 km/h (50 mph), the vehicle using the previous
the rear window defogger turns off
system settings before the vehicle
about 15 minutes after the button is
was turned off. The climate control
pressed. If additional warming time knobs will remain active during a
is needed, press the button again. remote start. However, the climate
If the vehicle's speed is maintained control buttons will be inactive until
above 80 km/h (50 mph), the rear the ignition is turned on by the key.
window defogger remains on once
the button is pressed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


. Keep the path under the front
Air Vents seats clear of objects to help
Use the lever located in the center circulate the air inside of the
of each outlet by moving it either up vehicle more effectively.
and down or side-to-side, to change . When an objectionable odor
the direction and amount of airflow outside the vehicle is
in the vehicle. encountered, use the
Operation Tips recirculation mode, with the
temperature knob at a
. Clear away any ice, snow, comfortable setting to prevent
or leaves from the air inlets at the odor from entering the
the base of the windshield that vehicle through the ventilation
may block the flow of air into the system. This can be helpful
vehicle. when driving through a long
. Do not use non-GM approved tunnel with poor ventilation.
hood deflectors as they could However, extended usage of this
adversely affect the performance mode in cold or cool weather
of the system. can cause window fogging.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

2 NOTES
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Driving and Operating 9-1
Driving and Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20

Shifting Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Fuel
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Operating Parking Over Things
That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Gasoline Specifications (U.S.
and Canada Only) . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
Engine Exhaust California Fuel
Driving Information Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
Running the Vehicle While Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-36
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Automatic Transmission Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 9-37
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Automatic Transmission . . . . . 9-24 Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25 Filling a Portable Fuel
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Brakes
Antilock Brake Towing
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27 General Towing
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-8
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Driving Characteristics and
If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-11 Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 Ride Control Systems Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45
Starting and Operating Traction Control Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-16 System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Electronic Stability Conversions and Add-Ons
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16 Add-On Electrical
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-18 Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19 Cruise Control
Retained Accessory Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

9-2 Driving and Operating
Driving Information Drunk Driving

{ WARNING
Defensive Driving Assume that other road users { WARNING
(pedestrians, bicyclists, and other
Defensive driving means “always Drinking and then driving is
expect the unexpected.” The first drivers) are going to be careless
and make mistakes. Anticipate very dangerous. Your reflexes,
step in driving defensively is to wear perceptions, attentiveness, and
the safety belt. See Safety Belts on what they might do and be ready.
In addition: judgment can be affected by even
page 3‑9. a small amount of alcohol. You
. Allow enough following can have a serious — or even
distance between you and fatal — collision if you drive after
the driver in front of you.
drinking. Do not drink and drive or
. Focus on the task of driving. ride with a driver who has been
Driver distraction can cause drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if
collisions resulting in injury or you are with a group, designate a
possible death. These simple driver who will not drink.
defensive driving techniques
could save your life. Death and injury associated with
drinking and driving is a global
tragedy.
Alcohol affects four things that
anyone needs to drive a vehicle:
judgment, muscular coordination,
vision, and attentiveness.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Police records show that almost passenger — is in a crash, that Braking

40 percent of all motor person's chance of being killed or
vehicle-related deaths involve permanently disabled is higher than See Brake System Warning Light on
alcohol. In most cases, these if the person had not been drinking. page 5‑18.
deaths are the result of someone Braking action involves perception
who was drinking and driving. In Control of a Vehicle time and reaction time. Deciding to
recent years, more than push the brake pedal is perception
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related The following three systems help
time. Actually doing it is
deaths have been associated with to control the vehicle while
reaction time.
the use of alcohol, with about driving — brakes, steering, and
250,000 people injured. accelerator. At times, as when Average reaction time is about
driving on snow or ice, it is easy to three‐fourths of a second. But that is
For persons under 21, it is against ask more of those control systems only an average. It might be less
the law in every U.S. state to drink than the tires and road can provide. with one driver and as long as
alcohol. There are good medical, Meaning, you can lose control of the two or three seconds or more with
psychological, and developmental vehicle. another. Age, physical condition,
reasons for these laws. alertness, coordination, and
Adding non‐dealer accessories can
The obvious way to eliminate the eyesight all play a part. So do
affect vehicle performance. See
leading highway safety problem is alcohol, drugs, and frustration. But
Accessories and Modifications on
for people never to drink alcohol even in three‐fourths of a second, a
page 10‑3.
and then drive. vehicle moving at 100 km/h
(60 mph) travels 20 m (66 ft). That
Medical research shows that could be a lot of distance in an
alcohol in a person's system can emergency, so keeping enough
make crash injuries worse, space between the vehicle and
especially injuries to the brain, others is important.
spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has
been drinking — driver or
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

And, of course, actual stopping down. If the engine stops, there will If you turn the steering wheel in
distances vary greatly with the still be some power brake assist but either direction several times until it
surface of the road, whether it is it will be used when the brake is stops, or hold the steering wheel in
pavement or gravel; the condition of applied. Once the power assist is the stopped position for an
the road, whether it is wet, dry, used up, it can take longer to stop extended amount of time, you may
or icy; tire tread; the condition of the and the brake pedal will be harder notice a reduced amount of power
brakes; the weight of the vehicle; to push. steering assist. The normal amount
and the amount of brake force Adding non‐dealer accessories can of power steering assist should
applied. affect vehicle performance. See return shortly after a few normal
Avoid needless heavy braking. Accessories and Modifications on steering movements.
Some people drive in page 10‑3. The electric power steering
spurts — heavy acceleration system does not require regular
followed by heavy braking — rather Steering maintenance. If you suspect
than keeping pace with traffic. This steering system problems, contact
is a mistake. The brakes might not Electric Power Steering your dealer for service repairs.
have time to cool between hard If the vehicle has the electric power
stops. The brakes will wear out Hydraulic Power Steering
steering system and the engine
much faster with a lot of heavy stalls while driving, the power If the vehicle has the hydraulic
braking. Keeping pace with the steering assist system will continue power steering system and power
traffic and allowing realistic following to operate until you are able to stop steering assist is lost because the
distances eliminates a lot of the vehicle. If power steering assist engine stops or the power steering
unnecessary braking. That means is lost because the electric power system is not functioning, the
better braking and longer brake life. steering system is not functioning, vehicle can be steered but it will
If the engine ever stops while the the vehicle can be steered but it will take more effort.
vehicle is being driven, brake take more effort.
normally but do not pump the
brakes. If the brakes are pumped,
the pedal could get harder to push I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Steering Tips Steering in Emergencies

It is important to take curves at a There are times when steering can
reasonable speed. be more effective than braking. For
Traction in a curve depends on the example, you come over a hill and
condition of the tires and the road find a truck stopped in your lane,
surface, the angle at which the or a car suddenly pulls out from
curve is banked, and vehicle speed. nowhere, or a child darts out from
While in a curve, speed is the one between parked cars and stops right
factor that can be controlled. in front of you. These problems can
be avoided by braking — if you can
If there is a need to reduce speed, stop in time. But sometimes you
do it before entering the curve, while cannot stop in time because there is
the front wheels are straight. no room. That is the time for An emergency like this requires
Try to adjust the speed so you can evasive action — steering around close attention and a quick decision.
drive through the curve. Maintain a the problem. If holding the steering wheel at the
reasonable, steady speed. Wait to The vehicle can perform very well in recommended 9 and 3 o'clock
accelerate until out of the curve, and emergencies like these. First apply positions, it can be turned a full
then accelerate gently into the the brakes. See Braking on 180 degrees very quickly without
straightaway. page 9‑3. It is better to remove as removing either hand. But you have
much speed as possible from a to act fast, steer quickly, and just as
collision. Then steer around the quickly straighten the wheel once
problem, to the left or right you have avoided the object.
depending on the space available. The fact that such emergency
situations are always possible is a
good reason to practice defensive
driving at all times and wear safety
belts properly.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Off-Road Recovery tire contacts the pavement edge. The three types of skids correspond
Then turn the steering wheel to go to the vehicle's three control
The vehicle's right wheels can drop straight down the roadway. systems. In the braking skid, the
off the edge of a road onto the wheels are not rolling. In the
shoulder while driving. Loss of Control steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes
Let us review what driving experts tires to slip and lose cornering force.
say about what happens when the And in the acceleration skid, too
three control systems — brakes, much throttle causes the driving
steering, and acceleration — do not wheels to spin.
have enough friction where the tires
meet the road to do what the driver If the vehicle starts to slide, ease
has asked. your foot off the accelerator pedal
and quickly steer the way you want
In any emergency, do not give up. the vehicle to go. If you start
Keep trying to steer and constantly steering quickly enough, the vehicle
seek an escape route or area of may straighten out. Always be ready
less danger. for a second skid if it occurs.
Skidding Of course, traction is reduced when
If the level of the shoulder is only
In a skid, a driver can lose control of water, snow, ice, gravel, or other
slightly below the pavement,
the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid material is on the road. For safety,
recovery should be fairly easy. Ease
most skids by taking reasonable slow down and adjust your driving to
off the accelerator and then, if there
care suited to existing conditions, these conditions. It is important to
is nothing in the way, steer so that
and by not overdriving those slow down on slippery surfaces
the vehicle straddles the edge of the
conditions. But skids are always because stopping distance is longer
pavement. Turn the steering wheel
possible. and vehicle control more limited.
8 to 13 cm (3 to 5 in), about
one-eighth turn, until the right front
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

While driving on a surface with Driving on Wet Roads WARNING (Continued)

reduced traction, try to avoid
sudden steering, acceleration, Rain and wet roads can reduce
or braking, including reducing vehicle traction and affect your Flowing or rushing water creates
vehicle speed by shifting to a lower ability to stop and accelerate. strong forces. Driving through
gear. Any sudden changes could Always drive slower in these types flowing water could cause the
cause the tires to slide. You might of driving conditions and avoid vehicle to be carried away. If this
not realize the surface is slippery driving through large puddles and happens, you and other vehicle
until the vehicle is skidding. Learn to deep‐standing or flowing water. occupants could drown. Do not
recognize warning clues — such as ignore police warnings and be
enough water, ice, or packed snow { WARNING very cautious about trying to drive
on the road to make a mirrored through flowing water.
surface — and slow down when you Wet brakes can cause crashes.
have any doubt. They might not work as well in a
quick stop and could cause Hydroplaning
Remember: Antilock brakes help
avoid only the braking skid. pulling to one side. You could Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water
lose control of the vehicle. can build up under the vehicle's
After driving through a large tires so they actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is
puddle of water or a car/vehicle
wet enough and you are going fast
wash, lightly apply the brake enough. When the vehicle is
pedal until the brakes work hydroplaning, it has little or no
normally. contact with the road.
(Continued)
There is no hard and fast rule about
hydroplaning. The best advice is to
slow down when the road is wet.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Other Rainy Weather Tips Highway Hypnosis Hill and Mountain Roads
Besides slowing down, other wet Always be alert and pay attention to Driving on steep hills or through
weather driving tips include: your surroundings while driving. mountains is different than driving
. Allow extra following distance. If you become tired or sleepy, find a on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for
safe place to park the vehicle driving in these conditions include:
. Pass with caution. and rest. . Keep the vehicle serviced and in
. Keep windshield wiping Other driving tips include: good shape.
equipment in good shape.
. Keep the vehicle well ventilated. . Check all fluid levels and brakes,
. Keep the windshield washer fluid tires, cooling system, and
reservoir filled.
. Keep interior temperature cool.
transmission.
. Have good tires with proper
. Keep your eyes moving — scan .
the road ahead and to the sides. Shift to a lower gear when going
tread depth. See Tires on down steep or long hills.
page 10‑42. . Check the rearview mirror and
. Turn off cruise control. vehicle instruments often.
{ WARNING
If you do not shift down, the
brakes could get so hot that they
would not work well. You would
then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could
crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep
downhill slope.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


. Pay attention to special road Try not to break the fragile traction.
{ WARNING signs (falling rocks area, winding If you accelerate too fast, the drive
roads, long grades, passing or wheels will spin and polish the
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) no-passing zones) and take surface under the tires even more.
or with the ignition off is appropriate action.
dangerous. The brakes will have The Antilock Brake System (ABS)
on page 9‑27 improves vehicle
to do all the work of slowing down Winter Driving stability during hard stops on
and they could get so hot that
they would not work well. You Driving on Snow or Ice slippery roads, but apply the brakes
sooner than when on dry pavement.
would then have poor braking or Drive carefully when there is snow
even none going down a hill. You or ice between the tires and the Allow greater following distance on
could crash. Always have the road, creating less traction or grip. any slippery road and watch for
engine running and the vehicle in Wet ice can occur at about 0°C slippery spots. Icy patches can
gear when going downhill. (32°F) when freezing rain begins to occur on otherwise clear roads in
fall, resulting in even less traction. shaded areas. The surface of a
Avoid driving on wet ice or in curve or an overpass can remain icy
. Stay in your own lane. Do not when the surrounding roads are
freezing rain until roads can be
swing wide or cut across the clear. Avoid sudden steering
treated with salt or sand.
center of the road. Drive at maneuvers and braking while
speeds that let you stay in your Drive with caution, whatever the on ice.
own lane. condition. Accelerate gently so
traction is not lost. Accelerating too Turn off cruise control on slippery
. Top of hills: Be surfaces.
quickly causes the wheels to spin
alert — something could
and makes the surface under the
be in your lane (stalled car,
tires slick, so there is even less
accident).
traction.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Blizzard Conditions
WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)
Being stuck in snow can be a
serious situation. Stay with the If the vehicle is stuck in the snow: For more information about
vehicle unless there is help nearby. carbon monoxide, see Engine
. Clear away snow from around
If possible, use the Roadside Exhaust on page 9‑22.
the base of your vehicle,
Assistance Program (U.S. and
especially any that is blocking Snow can trap exhaust gases
Canada) on page 13‑8 or Roadside
the exhaust pipe. under your vehicle. This can
Assistance Program (Mexico) on
page 13‑10. To get help and keep . Check again from time to cause deadly CO (Carbon
everyone in the vehicle safe: time to be sure snow does Monoxide) gas to get inside. CO
not collect there. could overcome you and kill you.
. Turn on the hazard warning
You cannot see it or smell it, so
flashers. . Open a window about 5 cm
(2 in) on the side of the you might not know it is in your
. Tie a red cloth to an outside vehicle. Clear away snow from
vehicle that is away from the
mirror. around the base of your vehicle,
wind to bring in fresh air.
especially any that is blocking the
{ WARNING . Fully open the air outlets on
or under the instrument
exhaust.
Snow can trap engine exhaust panel.
under the vehicle. This may Run the engine for short periods
. Adjust the climate control only as needed to keep warm, but
cause exhaust gases to get system to a setting that
inside. Engine exhaust contains be careful.
circulates the air inside the
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which vehicle and set the fan speed To save fuel, run the engine for only
cannot be seen or smelled. It can to the highest setting. See short periods as needed to warm
cause unconsciousness and even Climate Control System in the the vehicle and then shut the engine
death. Index. off and close the window most of
(Continued) the way to save heat. Repeat this
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
until help arrives but only when you

feel really uncomfortable from the Rocking the Vehicle to Get

cold. Moving about to keep warm { WARNING it Out
also helps.
If the vehicle's tires spin at high Turn the steering wheel left and
If it takes some time for help to speed, they can explode, and you right to clear the area around the
arrive, now and then when you run or others could be injured. The front wheels. Turn off any traction or
the engine, push the accelerator vehicle can overheat, causing an stability system. Shift back and forth
pedal slightly so the engine runs engine compartment fire or other between R (Reverse) and a forward
faster than the idle speed. This damage. Spin the wheels as little gear, spinning the wheels as little as
keeps the battery charged to restart possible. To prevent transmission
as possible and avoid going
the vehicle and to signal for help wear, wait until the wheels stop
above 55 km/h (35 mph).
with the headlamps. Do this as little spinning before shifting gears.
as possible to save fuel. Release the accelerator pedal while
For information about using tire shifting, and press lightly on the
If the Vehicle is Stuck chains on the vehicle, see Tire accelerator pedal when the
Chains on page 10‑65. transmission is in gear. Slowly
Slowly and cautiously spin the
wheels to free the vehicle when spinning the wheels in the forward
stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. and reverse directions causes a
rocking motion that could free the
If the vehicle has a traction system, vehicle. If that does not get the
it can often help to free a stuck vehicle out after a few tries, it might
vehicle. Refer to the vehicle's need to be towed out. If the vehicle
traction system in the Index. If stuck does need to be towed out, see
too severely for the traction system Towing the Vehicle on page 10‑88.
to free the vehicle, turn the traction
system off and use the rocking
method.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle Load Limits WARNING (Continued)

pillar (B-pillar). With the driver's
door open, you will find the label
It is very important to know how attached below the door lock
much weight the vehicle can vehicle handles. This could
cause loss of control and a post. The Tire and Loading
carry. This weight is called the Information label shows the
vehicle capacity weight and crash. Overloading can also
shorten the life of the vehicle. number of occupant seating
includes the weight of all positions (A), and the maximum
occupants, cargo and all vehicle capacity weight (B) in
nonfactory‐installed options. Tire and Loading Information kilograms and pounds.
Two labels on the vehicle show Label
how much weight it may The Tire and Loading
properly carry, the Tire and Information label also shows the
Loading Information label and tire size of the original
the Certification label. equipment tires (C) and the
recommended cold tire inflation
{ WARNING pressures (D). For more
information on tires and inflation
Do not load the vehicle any see Tires on page 10‑42 and
heavier than the Gross Tire Pressure on page 10‑51.
Vehicle Weight Rating There is also important loading
(GVWR), or either the information on the Certification
maximum front or rear Gross label. It tells you the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Label Example
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
This can cause systems to A vehicle-specific Tire and and the Gross Axle Weight
break and change the way the Loading Information label is
(Continued) attached to the vehicle's center
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Rating (GAWR) for the front and there will be five 150 lb
rear axle. See “Certification passengers in your vehicle,
Label” later in this section. the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is
Steps for Determining Correct
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150)
Load Limit
= 650 lbs).
1. Locate the statement
5. Determine the combined
“The combined weight of
weight of luggage and cargo
occupants and cargo should
being loaded on the vehicle.
never exceed XXX kg or
That weight may not safely
XXX lbs” on your vehicle's
exceed the available cargo
placard. Example 1
and luggage load capacity
2. Determine the combined calculated in Step 4. A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
weight of the driver and Example 1 = 453 kg
6. If your vehicle will be towing
passengers that will be riding (1,000 lbs).
a trailer, the load from your
in your vehicle.
trailer will be transferred to B. Subtract Occupant Weight
3. Subtract the combined your vehicle. Consult this @ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 =
weight of the driver and manual to determine how this 136 kg (300 lbs).
passengers from XXX kg or reduces the available cargo
XXX lbs. C. Available Occupant and
and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle. Cargo Weight = 317 kg
4. The resulting figure equals (700 lbs).
the available amount of cargo See Trailer Towing on page 9‑45
and luggage load capacity. for important information on
For example, if the “XXX” towing a trailer, towing safety
amount equals 1400 lbs and rules, andInftrailering
ormat
ionPr
ovi
tips.
dedby:

seating positions. The combined

weight of the driver, passengers,
and cargo should never exceed
the vehicle's capacity weight.
Certification Label
Example 2 Example 3
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 2 = 453 kg Example 3 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs). (1,000 lbs).
B. Subtract Occupant Weight B. Subtract Occupant Weight
@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = @ 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = Label Example
340 kg (750 lbs). 453 kg (1,000 lbs). A vehicle-specific Certification
C. Available Cargo Weight = C. Available Cargo Weight = label is attached to the driver
113 kg (250 lbs). 0 kg (0 lbs). side center pillar (B-pillar). The
Refer to the vehicle's Tire and label tells the gross weight
Loading Information label for capacity of the vehicle, called
specific information about the the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
vehicle's capacity weight and (GVWR). The GVWR includes
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: the weight of the vehicle, all

occupants, fuel, and cargo. If you put things inside the

Never exceed the GVWR for vehicle — like suitcases, tools, WARNING (Continued)
the vehicle, or the Gross Axle packages, or anything . Never stack heavier
Weight Rating (GAWR) for either else — they will go as fast as the things, like suitcases,
the front or rear axle. vehicle goes. If you have to stop inside the vehicle so that
And, if there is a heavy load, it or turn quickly, or if there is a some of them are above
should be spread out. See crash, they will keep going. the tops of the seats.
“Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit” earlier in this { WARNING . Do not leave an
unsecured child restraint
section. Things inside the vehicle can in the vehicle.
strike and injure people in a
{ WARNING sudden stop or turn, or in a
. Secure loose items in the
vehicle.
Do not load the vehicle any crash.
. Do not leave a seat folded
heavier than the Gross . Put things in the cargo down unless needed.
Vehicle Weight Rating area of the vehicle. In the
(GVWR), or either the cargo area, put them as
maximum front or rear Gross far forward as possible.
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Try to spread the weight
This can cause systems to evenly.
break and change the way the (Continued)
vehicle handles. This could
cause loss of control and a
crash. Overloading can also
shorten the life of the vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


. Avoid making hard stops for
Starting and the first 322 km (200 miles) or
Ignition Positions
Operating so. During this time the new
brake linings are not yet
New Vehicle Break-In broken in. Hard stops with
new linings can mean
Notice: The vehicle does not premature wear and earlier
need an elaborate break-in. But it replacement. Follow this
will perform better in the long run breaking-in guideline every
if you follow these guidelines: time you get new brake
. Do not drive at any one linings.
constant speed, fast or slow, . Do not tow a trailer during
for the first 805 km break-in. See Trailer Towing
(500 miles). Do not make on page 9‑45 for the trailer
full-throttle starts. Avoid towing capabilities of the
downshifting to brake or vehicle and more The ignition switch has four different
slow the vehicle. information. positions.
Following break‐in, engine speed To shift out of P (Park), the ignition
and load can be gradually must be in ON/RUN or ACC/
increased. ACCESSORY and the brake pedal
must be applied.
Notice: Using a tool to force the
key to turn in the ignition could
cause damage to the switch or
break the key. Use the correct
key, make sure it is all the way in,
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

and turn it only with your hand. 2. Shift the vehicle to neutral. This R (ON/RUN): This position can be
If the key cannot be turned by can be done while the vehicle is used to operate the electrical
hand, see your dealer. moving. After shifting to neutral, accessories and to display some
9 (STOPPING THE ENGINE/ firmly apply the brakes and steer instrument panel warning lights. The
LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle is the vehicle to a safe location. switch will stay in this position while
stopped, turn the ignition switch to 3. Come to a complete stop, shift the engine is running.
LOCK/OFF to turn the engine off. to P (Park), and turn the ignition If you leave the key in the ACC/
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) to LOCK/OFF. On vehicles with ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position
will remain active. See Retained an automatic transmission, the with the engine off, the battery could
Accessory Power (RAP) on shift lever must be in P (Park) to be drained. You may not be able to
page 9‑20 turn the ignition switch to the start the vehicle if the battery is
This position locks the ignition. LOCK/OFF position. allowed to drain for an extended
It also locks the transmission. The 4. Set the parking brake. See period of time.
key can only be removed in Parking Brake on page 9‑28 / (START): This position starts the
LOCK/OFF. The steering can bind with the engine. When the engine starts,
Do not turn the engine off when the wheels turned off center. If this release the key. The ignition switch
vehicle is moving. This will cause a happens, move the steering wheel will return to the ON/RUN position
loss of power assist in the brake from right to left while turning the for driving.
and steering systems and disable key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this A warning tone will sound when the
the airbags. doesn't work, the vehicle needs driver door is opened, the ignition is
In an emergency: service. in ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF
ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY): This and the key is in the ignition.
1. Brake using a firm and steady
pressure. Do not pump the position lets you use things like the
brakes repeatedly. This may radio and windshield wipers while
deplete power assist, requiring the engine is not running.
increased brake pedal force.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Starting the Engine components. If the ignition key is 2. If the engine does not start after
turned to the START position, 5 to 10 seconds, especially in
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or and then released when the very cold weather (below −18°C
N (Neutral). The engine will not start engine begins cranking, the or 0°F), it could be flooded with
in any other position. To restart the engine will continue cranking for too much gasoline. Try pushing
engine when the vehicle is already a few seconds or until the the accelerator pedal all the way
moving, use N (Neutral) only. vehicle starts. If the engine does to the floor and holding it there
Notice: Do not try to shift to not start and the key is held in as you hold the key in START
P (Park) if the vehicle is moving. START, cranking will be stopped for up to a maximum of
If you do, you could damage the after 15 seconds to prevent 15 seconds. Wait at least
transmission. Shift to P (Park) cranking motor damage. To 15 seconds between each try, to
only when the vehicle is stopped. prevent gear damage, this allow the cranking motor to cool
system also prevents cranking if down. When the engine starts,
Starting Procedure the engine is already running. let go of the key and accelerator.
1. With your foot off the accelerator Engine cranking can be stopped If the vehicle starts briefly but
pedal, turn the ignition to START. by turning the ignition switch to then stops again, repeat these
When the engine starts, let go of the ACC/ACCESSORY or steps. This clears the extra
the key. The idle speed will slow LOCK/OFF position. gasoline from the engine. Do not
down as the engine warms. Do Notice: Cranking the engine for race the engine immediately
not race the engine immediately long periods of time, by returning after starting it. Operate the
after starting it. Operate the the key to the START position engine and transmission gently
engine and transmission gently immediately after cranking has until the oil warms up and
to allow the oil to warm up and ended, can overheat and damage lubricates all moving parts.
lubricate all moving parts. the cranking motor, and drain the Notice: The engine is designed to
The vehicle has a battery. Wait at least 15 seconds work with the electronics in the
Computer-Controlled Cranking between each try, to let the vehicle. If you add electrical parts
System. This feature assists in cranking motor cool down. or accessories, you could change
starting the engine and protects the way the engine operates.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Before adding electrical To Use the Engine Coolant

equipment, check with your Heater WARNING (Continued)
dealer. If you do not, the engine
might not perform properly. Any 1. Turn off the engine. the cord into a properly grounded
resulting damage would not be 2. Open the hood and unwrap the three-prong 110-volt AC outlet.
covered by the vehicle warranty. electrical cord. With a 4 cylinder If the cord will not reach, use a
engine, the engine coolant heavy-duty three-prong extension
Engine Heater heater cord is located near the cord rated for at least 15 amps.
air cleaner box on the passenger
The engine coolant heater can side of the engine compartment.
provide easier starting and better 3. Plug the cord into a normal,
With a V6 engine, the engine grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
fuel economy during engine warm‐ coolant heater cord is located on
up in cold weather conditions at or the driver side around the 4. Before starting the engine, be
below −18°C (0°F). Vehicles with an battery box. See Engine sure to unplug and store the
engine coolant heater should be Compartment Overview on cord as it was before to keep it
plugged in at least four hours before page 10‑6 for more information away from moving engine parts
starting the vehicle. An internal on location. and prevent damage.
thermostat in the plug-end of the
The length of time the heater should
cord may exist which will prevent
engine coolant heater operation at { WARNING remain plugged in depends on
several factors. Ask a dealer in the
temperatures above −18°C (0°F).
Plugging the cord into an area where you will be parking the
ungrounded outlet could cause an vehicle for the best advice on this.
electrical shock. Also, the wrong
kind of extension cord could
overheat and cause a fire. You
could be seriously injured. Plug
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Retained Accessory Shifting Into Park 2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)
by holding in the button on the
Power (RAP) shift lever and pushing the shift
These vehicle accessories can be { WARNING lever all the way toward the front
used for up to 10 minutes after the It can be dangerous to get out of of the vehicle.
engine is turned off: the vehicle if the shift lever is not 3. Turn the ignition key to
. Audio System fully in P (Park) with the parking LOCK/OFF.
. Power Windows brake firmly set. The vehicle can 4. Remove the key and take it with
roll. If you have left the engine you. If you can leave the vehicle
. Heated Seats (if equipped) running, the vehicle can move with the ignition key in your
. Sunroof (if equipped) suddenly. You or others could be hand, the vehicle is in P (Park).
These features continue to work up injured. To be sure the vehicle will
to 10 minutes after the ignition is not move, even when you are on
turned to LOCK/OFF. fairly level ground, use the steps
that follow. If you are pulling a
The power windows, heated seats, trailer, see Driving Characteristics
and sunroof will work until any door and Towing Tips on page 9‑42.
is opened.
The radio continues to work until the
1. Hold the brake pedal down and
driver door is opened.
set the parking brake. See
All these features operate when the Parking Brake on page 9‑28 for
key is in the ON/RUN or ACC/ more information.
ACCESSORY.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Leaving the Vehicle with the If you can, it means that the shift Shifting Out of Park
Engine Running lever was not fully locked in
P (Park). This vehicle is equipped with an
electronic shift lock release system.
{ WARNING Torque Lock The shift lock release is
Torque lock is when the weight designed to:
It can be dangerous to leave the
vehicle with the engine running. of the vehicle puts too much force . Prevent ignition key removal
The vehicle could move suddenly on the parking pawl in the unless the shift lever is in
if the shift lever is not fully in transmission. This happens when P (Park) with the shift lever
P (Park) with the parking brake parking on a hill and shifting the button fully released.
firmly set. And, if you leave the transmission into P (Park) is not . Prevent movement of the shift
done properly and then it is difficult
vehicle with the engine running, it lever out of P (Park), unless the
to shift out of P (Park). To prevent
could overheat and even catch ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/
torque lock, set the parking brake
fire. You or others could be ACCESSORY and the brake
and then shift into P (Park). To find
injured. Do not leave the vehicle pedal is applied.
out how, see “Shifting Into Park”
with the engine running. listed previously. The shift lock release is always
functional except in the case of an
If torque lock does occur, your
If you have to leave the vehicle with uncharged or low voltage (less than
vehicle may need to be pushed
the engine running, be sure the 9 volt) battery.
uphill by another vehicle to relieve
vehicle is in P (Park) and the the parking pawl pressure, so you If the vehicle has an uncharged
parking brake is firmly set before can shift out of P (Park). battery or a battery with low voltage,
you leave it. After you have moved try charging or jump starting the
the shift lever into P (Park), hold the battery. See Jump Starting on
regular brake pedal down. Then, page 10‑84
see if you can move the shift lever
away from P (Park) without first
pushing the button.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

To shift out of P (Park): Parking Over Things Engine Exhaust

1. Apply the brake pedal. That Burn
2. Press the shift lever button. { WARNING
3. Move the shift lever to the { WARNING
Engine exhaust contains Carbon
desired position. Things that can burn could touch Monoxide (CO) which cannot be
If still unable to shift out of P (Park): hot exhaust parts under the seen or smelled. Exposure to CO
1. Fully release the shift lever vehicle and ignite. Do not park can cause unconsciousness and
button. over papers, leaves, dry grass, even death.
or other things that can burn. Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
2. Hold the brake pedal down and
press the shift lever button . The vehicle idles in areas
again. with poor ventilation (parking
3. Move the shift lever to the garages, tunnels, deep snow
desired position. that may block underbody
airflow or tail pipes).
If you are still having a problem
. The exhaust smells or
shifting, see your dealer.
sounds strange or different.
. The exhaust system leaks
due to corrosion or damage.
. The vehicle exhaust system
has been modified, damaged
or improperly repaired.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Running the Vehicle

WARNING (Continued)
While Parked
{ WARNING
. There are holes or openings It can be dangerous to get out of
It is better not to park with the
in the vehicle body from the vehicle if the automatic
engine running. But if you ever have
damage or after-market transmission shift lever is not fully
to, here are some things to know.
modifications that are not in P (Park) with the parking brake
completely sealed. firmly set. The vehicle can roll. Do
If unusual fumes are detected or
{ WARNING not leave the vehicle when the
if it is suspected that exhaust is Idling a vehicle in an enclosed engine is running unless you
coming into the vehicle: area with poor ventilation is have to. If you have left the
dangerous. Engine exhaust may engine running, the vehicle can
. Drive it only with the windows
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust move suddenly. You or others
completely down.
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) could be injured. To be sure the
. Have the vehicle repaired which cannot be seen or smelled. vehicle will not move, even when
immediately. you are on fairly level ground,
It can cause unconsciousness
Never park the vehicle with the and even death. Never run the always set the parking brake and
engine running in an enclosed engine in an enclosed area that move the shift lever to P (Park).
area such as a garage or a has no fresh air ventilation. For
building that has no fresh air more information, see Engine Follow the proper steps to be sure
ventilation. Exhaust on page 9‑22. the vehicle will not move. See
Shifting Into Park on page 9‑20.
If parking on a hill and pulling a
trailer, see Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips on page 9‑42.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Automatic { WARNING
brake pedal then press the shift
lever button before you can shift
Transmission It is dangerous to get out of the
from P (Park) while the ignition key
is in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully of P (Park), ease pressure on the
in P (Park) with the parking brake shift lever and push the shift lever
firmly set. The vehicle can roll. all the way into P (Park) as you
Do not leave the vehicle when the maintain brake application. Then
engine is running unless you move the shift lever into another
have to. If you have left the gear. See Shifting Out of Park on
engine running, the vehicle can page 9‑21.
move suddenly. You or others R (Reverse): Use this gear to
could be injured. To be sure the back up.
vehicle will not move, even when Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)
you are on fairly level ground, while the vehicle is moving
always set the parking brake and forward could damage the
The automatic transmission has a move the shift lever to P (Park). transmission. The repairs would
shift lever located on the console See Shifting Into Park on not be covered by the vehicle
between the seats. page 9‑20. If you are pulling a warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only
P (Park): This position locks the trailer, see Trailer Towing on after the vehicle is stopped.
front wheels. It is the best position page 9‑45. To rock the vehicle back and forth to
to use when you start the engine get out of snow, ice, or sand without
because the vehicle cannot move Make sure the shift lever is fully in damaging the transmission, see If
easily. P (Park) before starting the engine. the Vehicle is Stuck on page 9‑11.
The vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control
system. You must fully apply the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

N (Neutral): In this position, the Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or Manual Mode
engine does not connect with the N (Neutral) with the engine
wheels. To restart the engine when running at high speed may Driver Shift Control (DSC)
the vehicle is already moving, use damage the transmission. The To use this feature, do the following:
N (Neutral) only. Also, use repairs would not be covered by
N (Neutral) when the vehicle is the vehicle warranty. Be sure the 1. Move the shift lever from
being towed. engine is not running at high D (Drive) rearward to
speed when shifting the vehicle. M (Manual).
{ WARNING D (Drive): This position is for While driving in manual mode,
normal driving. It provides the best the transmission will remain in
Shifting into a drive gear while the fuel economy. If you need more the driver selected gear. When
engine is running at high speed is power for passing, and you are: coming to a stop in the manual
dangerous. Unless your foot is position, the vehicle will
firmly on the brake pedal, the
. Going less than 56 km/h automatically shift into
vehicle could move very rapidly. (35 mph), push the accelerator 2 (Second) gear.
pedal about halfway down.
You could lose control and hit
. Going about 56 km/h (35 mph) or
people or objects. Do not shift
into a drive gear while the engine more, push the accelerator all
is running at high speed. the way down.
M (Manual Mode): This position,
allows you to change gears similar
to a manual transmission. If the
vehicle has this feature, see Driver
Shift Control (DSC).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

While using the DSC feature the Second or Third Gear Start
transmission will have firmer shifting Feature
and sportier performance. You can When accelerating the vehicle from
use this for sport driving or when a stop in snowy and icy conditions,
climbing hills to stay in gear longer you may want to shift the gear
or to downshift for more power or select tap switch into Second or
engine braking. Third gear. A higher gear allows you
The transmission will only allow to gain more traction on slippery
you to shift into gears appropriate surfaces.
for the vehicle speed and engine With the DSC feature, the vehicle
revolutions per minute (RPM): can be set to pull away in Second or
. The transmission will not Third gear.
2. Press the + (plus) end of the automatically shift to the next
button on the side of the shifter 1. Move the shift lever from
higher gear if the vehicle speed D (Drive) into the
to upshift, or push the − (minus) or engine RPM is too low.
end of the button to downshift. M (Manual Mode).
. The transmission will not allow
The Driver Information Center (DIC) 2. With the vehicle stopped,
shifting to the next lower gear if press (+) end of the button to
in the instrument cluster will change the vehicle speed or engine
from the currently displayed select Second or Third gear. The
RPM is too high. vehicle will start from a stop
message to the letter “M”, for
Manual position, and a number position in Second or Third gear.
indicating the requested gear. 3. Once moving select the desired
drive gear.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Brakes If driving safely on a wet road and it suddenly slows or stops. Always
becomes necessary to slam on the leave enough room up ahead to
brakes and continue braking to stop, even with ABS.
Antilock Brake avoid a sudden obstacle, a
System (ABS) computer senses that the wheels Using ABS
are slowing down. If one of the Do not pump the brakes. Just hold
This vehicle has the Antilock Brake
wheels is about to stop rolling, the the brake pedal down firmly and let
System (ABS), an advanced
computer will separately work the ABS work. You might hear the ABS
electronic braking system that helps
brakes at each wheel. pump or motor operating and feel
prevent a braking skid.
ABS can change the brake pressure the brake pedal pulsate, but this is
When the engine is started and the normal.
to each wheel, as required, faster
vehicle begins to drive away, ABS
than any driver could. This can help Braking in Emergencies
checks itself. A momentary motor or
the driver steer around the obstacle
clicking noise might be heard while ABS allows the driver to steer and
while braking hard.
this test is going on, and it might brake at the same time. In many
even be noticed that the brake As the brakes are applied, the emergencies, steering can help
pedal moves a little. This is normal. computer keeps receiving updates more than even the very best
on wheel speed and controls braking.
braking pressure accordingly.
Remember: ABS does not change
the time needed to get a foot up to
the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too
close to the vehicle in front of you,
If there is a problem with ABS, this there will not be enough time to
warning light stays on. See Antilock apply the brakes if that vehicle
Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
on page 5‑19.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Parking Brake begin to drive, the brake system Brake Assist

warning light comes on and a chime
sounds as a warning that the This vehicle has a brake assist
parking brake is still on. feature designed to assist the driver
in stopping or decreasing vehicle
The PUSH PARK PEDAL message speed in emergency driving
will also display in the Driver conditions. This feature uses the
Information Center (DIC) as a stability system hydraulic brake
reminder to release the parking control module to supplement the
brake. See Brake System Messages power brake system under
on page 5‑26. conditions where the driver has
Notice: Driving with the parking quickly and forcefully applied the
brake on can overheat the brake brake pedal in an attempt to quickly
system and cause premature stop or slow down the vehicle. The
wear or damage to brake system stability system hydraulic brake
To set the parking brake, push down parts. Make sure that the parking control module increases brake
the parking brake pedal with your brake is fully released and the pressure at each corner of the
left foot. If the ignition is on, the brake warning light is off before vehicle until the ABS activates.
brake system warning light will driving. Minor brake pedal pulsation or
come on. See Brake System pedal movement during this time is
If you are towing a trailer and are
Warning Light on page 5‑18. normal and the driver should
parking on a hill, see Driving
continue to apply the brake pedal as
To release the parking brake, hold Characteristics and Towing Tips on
the driving situation dictates. The
the regular brake pedal down with page 9‑42.
brake assist feature will
your right foot. Push down automatically disengage when the
momentarily on the parking brake brake pedal is released or brake
pedal with your left foot until you pedal pressure is quickly
feel the pedal release. If the parking decreased.
brake is not released when you
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Ride Control Systems The system may be heard or felt The Traction Control System is
while it is working, but this is automatically enabled whenever the
normal. vehicle is started. To limit wheel
Traction Control spin, especially in slippery road
If the vehicle is in cruise control
System (TCS) when TCS begins to limit wheel conditions, always leave the system
spin, the cruise control will enabled. TCS can be turned off if
The vehicle may have a Traction
automatically disengage. The cruise needed.
Control System (TCS) that limits
wheel spin. This is especially useful control may be re-engaged when It is recommended to leave the
in slippery road conditions. The road conditions allow. See Cruise system on for normal driving
system operates only if it senses Control on page 9‑32. conditions, but it may be necessary
that the front wheels are spinning to turn the system off if the vehicle
too much or are beginning to lose is stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow,
traction. When this happens, the and you want to “rock” the vehicle to
system works the front brakes and attempt to free it. It may also be
reduces engine power by closing necessary to turn off the system
the throttle and managing engine when driving in extreme off-road
spark to limit wheel spin. conditions where high wheel spin is
When this light is on solid and either required. See If the Vehicle is Stuck
the SERVICE TRACTION or on page 9‑11.
TRACTION OFF message is
displayed, the system will not limit
wheel spin.
Adjust your driving accordingly. See
Ride Control System Messages on
This light will flash when the traction page 5‑27 for more information.
control system is limiting wheel spin.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

driving. For more information on the misuse of the vehicle is not

LOW TRACTION message, see covered. See your warranty book
Ride Control System Messages on for additional information.
page 5‑27. The traction control system may
Notice: If the wheel(s) of one axle activate on dry or rough roads or
are allowed to spin excessively under conditions such as heavy
To turn the system off or on, press while the ESC/TCS, ABS and acceleration while turning or
and release this button located on Brake warning lights and the abrupt upshifts/downshifts of the
the center console. SERVICE ESC and/or SERVICE transmission. When this happens, a
The DIC will display the appropriate TRACTION messages are reduction in acceleration may be
message as described previously displayed, the differential could noticed, or a noise or vibration may
when the button is pressed. be damaged. The repairs would be heard. This is normal.
not be covered by the vehicle If the vehicle is in cruise control
Traction Control Operation warranty. Reduce engine power when the system activates, the
Traction control limits wheel spin by and do not spin the wheel(s) ESC/TCS light will flash and the
reducing engine power to the excessively while these lights and cruise control will automatically
wheels (engine speed management) this message are displayed. disengage. The cruise control
and by applying brakes to each Notice: When traction control is may be re-engaged when road
individual wheel (brake-traction turned off, it is possible to lose conditions allow. See Cruise Control
control) as necessary. traction. If you attempt to shift on page 9‑32.
The traction control system is with the front wheels spinning Adding non‐dealer accessories can
enabled automatically when the with a loss of traction, it is affect the vehicle's performance.
vehicle is started, and it will activate possible to cause damage to the See Accessories and Modifications
and flash the ESC/TCS light and transmission. Do not attempt to on page 10‑3 for more information.
display the LOW TRACTION shift when the front wheels do not
message if it senses either of the have traction. Damage caused by
front wheels are spinning or
beginning to lose traction while I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Electronic Stability For more information, see Ride The Electronic Stability Control
Control System Messages on (ESC) system is automatically
Control (ESC) page 5‑27. enabled whenever the vehicle is
The vehicle has an Electronic started. To assist the driver with
Stability Control (ESC) system vehicle directional control,
which combines antilock brake, especially in slippery road
traction and stability control systems conditions, the system should
and helps the driver maintain always be left on. But, ESC can be
directional control of the vehicle in turned off if needed.
most driving conditions. If the vehicle is in cruise control
When you first start the vehicle and This light will flash on the instrument when the system begins to assist
begin to drive away, the system panel cluster when the ESC system the driver maintain directional
performs several diagnostic checks is both on and activated. control of the vehicle, the ESC/TCS
to ensure there are no problems. The system may be heard or felt light will flash and the cruise control
The system may be heard or felt while it is working; this is normal. will automatically disengage. The
while it is working. This is normal cruise control system may be
When the light is on solid and either
and does not mean there is a re-engaged when road conditions
the SERVICE ESC or ESC OFF
problem with the vehicle. The allow. See Cruise Control on
message is displayed, the system
system should initialize before the page 9‑32.
will not assist the driver in
vehicle reaches 32 km/h (20 mph). maintaining directional control of the
If the system fails to turn on or vehicle. Adjust your driving
activate, the ESC/TCS light will be accordingly. See Ride Control
on solid, and the ESC OFF or System Messages on page 5‑27.
SERVICE ESC message will be
displayed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

when driving in extreme off-road Cruise Control

conditions where high wheel spin is
required. See If the Vehicle is Stuck Cruise control lets a speed of about
on page 9‑11. 40 km/h (25 mph) or more be
maintained without keeping your
ESC may also turn off automatically
foot on the accelerator. This can
if it determines that a problem exists
The ESC/TCS button is located on really help on long trips. Cruise
with the system. The ESC OFF and
the instrument panel. control does not work at speeds
SERVICE ESC messages and the
below 40 km/h (25 mph).
The traction control system can be ESC/TCS light will be on solid to
turned off or back on by pressing warn the driver that ESC is disabled When the brakes are applied, the
the ESC/TCS button. To disable and requires service. If the problem cruise control shuts off.
both traction control and ESC, press does not clear after restarting the If the vehicle is in cruise control and
and hold the button briefly. vehicle, see your dealer for service. the Traction Control System (TCS)
See Ride Control System Messages or Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
When the ESC system is turned off,
on page 5‑27 for more information. begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise
the TRACTION OFF and ESC OFF
messages will appear, and the ESC/ Adding non‐dealer accessories can control automatically disengages.
TCS light will be on solid to warn affect the vehicle's performance. See Traction Control System (TCS)
the driver that both traction control See Accessories and Modifications on page 9‑29 and Electronic
and ESC are disabled. on page 10‑3 for more information. Stability Control (ESC) on
page 9‑31. When road conditions
It is recommended to leave the
allow, the cruise control can be
system on for normal driving
used again.
conditions, but it may be necessary
to turn the system off if the vehicle
is stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow,
and you want to “rock” the vehicle to
attempt to free it. It may also be
necessary to turn off the system
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Setting Cruise Control

{ WARNING If the cruise button is on when not in
Cruise control can be dangerous use, it could get bumped and go into
where you cannot drive safely at cruise when not desired. Keep the
a steady speed. So, do not use cruise control switch off when cruise
the cruise control on winding is not being used.
roads or in heavy traffic. 1. Press I to turn cruise control
Cruise control can be dangerous on. The indicator light on the
on slippery roads. On such roads, button comes on.
fast changes in tire traction can 2. Get up to the desired speed.
cause excessive wheel slip, and
The cruise control buttons are 3. Press the SET− and release it.
you could lose control. Do not use
located on the steering wheel. The cruise symbol displays in
cruise control on slippery roads.
the instrument panel cluster to
I (On/Off): Press to turn the show the system is engaged.
cruise control system on and off.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator
RES+ (Resume): Press briefly to pedal.
make the vehicle resume a
previously set speed or press and
hold to accelerate.
SET− (Set): Press to set the speed
and activate cruise control or make
the vehicle decelerate.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Resuming a Set Speed

. To increase the vehicle speed in Using Cruise Control on Hills
small amounts, press the RES+
If the cruise control is set at a button briefly. Each time this is How well the cruise control works
desired speed and then the brakes done, the vehicle goes about on hills depends upon the vehicle
are applied, the cruise control is 1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster. speed, load, and the steepness of
disengaged without erasing the set the hills. When going up steep hills,
speed from memory. The cruise Reducing Speed While Using you might have to step on the
symbol in the instrument panel Cruise Control accelerator pedal to maintain the
cluster also goes out indicating If the cruise control system is vehicle speed. When going
cruise is no longer engaged. Once already activated, downhill, you might have to brake or
the vehicle speed is 40 km/h shift to a lower gear to keep the
(25 mph) or greater, press the RES+
. Press and hold the SET− on the vehicle at a lower speed. When the
button on the steering wheel. The steering wheel until the lower brakes are applied this ends the
vehicle returns to the previously set speed desired is reached, then cruise control.
speed and stays there. release it.
Ending Cruise Control
Increasing Speed While Using
. To slow down in small amounts,
press the SET− button briefly. There are two ways to end cruise
Cruise Control control:
Each time this is done, the
If the cruise control system is vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h . To disengage the cruise control,
already activated, (1 mph) slower. step lightly on the brake pedal.
. Press and hold the RES+ button Passing Another Vehicle While . To turn off cruise control, press
on the steering wheel until the Using Cruise Control
desired speed is reached, then the I button.
release it. Use the accelerator pedal to
increase the vehicle speed. When Erasing Speed Memory
you take your foot off the pedal, the The cruise control set speed is
vehicle will slow down to the erased from memory, by pressing
previously set cruise control speed. the I button or if the ignition is
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: turned off.

Fuel use only the unleaded gasoline

described under Recommended
Use of the recommended fuel Fuel on page 9‑35.
is an important part of the proper
maintenance of this vehicle. To help Recommended Fuel
keep the engine clean and maintain
optimum vehicle performance, we If the vehicle has the 2.4L L4 engine
recommend the use of gasoline (VIN Code 1) or the 2.4L L4 engine
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent (VIN Code U), use regular unleaded
Gasoline. gasoline with a posted octane rating
of 87 or higher. If the octane rating
Look for the TOP TIER label on the is less than 87, an audible knocking
fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets noise, commonly referred to as
enhanced detergency standards The eighth digit of the Vehicle spark knock, might be heard when
developed by auto companies. A list Identification Number (VIN) shows driving. If this occurs, use a
of marketers providing TOP TIER the code letter or number that gasoline rated at 87 octane or
Detergent Gasoline can be found at identifies the vehicle's engine. The higher as soon as possible. If heavy
www.toptiergas.com. VIN is at the top left of the knocking is heard when using
instrument panel. See Vehicle gasoline rated at 87 octane or
Identification Number (VIN) on higher, the engine needs service.
page 12‑1.
If the vehicle has the 3.6L V6 engine
Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badge (VIN Code 7), use regular unleaded
and a yellow fuel cap can use either gasoline with a posted octane
unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel rating of 87 or higher. For best
containing up to 85% ethanol (E85). performance or trailer towing, you
See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on could choose to use middle grade
page 9‑37. For all other vehicles, 89 octane unleaded gasoline. If the
octane rating is less than 87, an
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

audible knocking noise, commonly California Fuel Fuels in Foreign

referred to as spark knock, might be
heard when driving. If this occurs,
Requirements Countries
use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or If the vehicle is certified to meet Never use leaded gasoline or any
higher as soon as possible. If heavy California Emissions Standards, it is other fuel not recommended in the
knocking is heard when using designed to operate on fuels that previous text on fuel. Costly repairs
gasoline rated at 87 octane or meet California specifications. See caused by use of improper fuel
higher, the engine needs service. the underhood emission control would not be covered by the vehicle
label. If this fuel is not available in warranty.
Gasoline Specifications states adopting California Emissions To check the fuel availability, ask an
(U.S. and Canada Only) Standards, the vehicle will operate auto club, or contact a major oil
satisfactorily on fuels meeting company that does business in the
At a minimum, gasoline should federal specifications, but emission country where you will be driving.
meet ASTM specification D 4814 in control system performance might
the United States or CAN/ be affected. The malfunction
CGSB‐3.5 or 3.511 in Canada. indicator lamp could turn on and the Fuel Additives
Some gasolines contain an vehicle might fail a smog‐check test. To provide cleaner air, all gasolines
octane-enhancing additive called See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on in the United States are now
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese page 5‑15. If this occurs, return to required to contain additives that
tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend your authorized dealer for diagnosis. help prevent engine and fuel system
against the use of gasolines If it is determined that the condition deposits from forming, allowing the
containing MMT. See Fuel Additives is caused by the type of fuel used, emission control system to work
on page 9‑36 for additional repairs might not be covered by the properly. In most cases, nothing
information. vehicle warranty. should have to be added to the fuel.
However, some gasolines contain
only the minimum amount of
additive required to meet U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

regulations. To help keep fuel Gasolines containing oxygenates, fuel contains MMT. We recommend
injectors and intake valves clean such as ethers and ethanol, and against the use of such gasolines.
and avoid problems due to dirty reformulated gasolines might be Fuels containing MMT can reduce
injectors or valves, look for gasoline available in your area. We spark plug life and affect emission
that is advertised as TOP TIER recommend that you use these control system performance. The
Detergent Gasoline. Look for the gasolines, if they comply with the malfunction indicator lamp might
TOP TIER label on the fuel pump to specifications described earlier. turn on. If this occurs, return to your
ensure gasoline meets enhanced However, E85 (85% ethanol) and dealer for service.
detergency standards developed by other fuels containing more than
the auto companies. A list of 10% ethanol must not be used in Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)
marketers providing TOP TIER vehicles that were not designed for
Detergent Gasoline can be found at those fuels. Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badge
www.toptiergas.com. and a yellow fuel cap can use either
Notice: This vehicle was not unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel
For customers who do not use TOP designed for fuel that contains containing up to 85% ethanol (E85).
TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly, methanol. Do not use fuel For all other vehicles, use only the
one bottle of GM Fuel System containing methanol. It can unleaded gasoline described under
Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel corrode metal parts in the fuel Recommended Fuel on page 9‑35.
tank at every engine oil change, can system and also damage plastic
help clean deposits from fuel and rubber parts. That damage We encourage the use of E85 in
injectors and intake valves. GM Fuel would not be covered under the vehicles that are designed to use it.
System Treatment PLUS is the only vehicle warranty. The ethanol in E85 is a “renewable”
gasoline additive recommended by fuel, meaning it is made from
Some gasolines that are renewable sources such as corn
General Motors. It is available at not reformulated for low
your dealer. and other crops.
emissions can contain an
octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant
where you Ibuy
nf
ormat
igasoline
onPr dedby: whether the
ovi

Many service stations will not have To ensure quick starts in the E85 has less energy per liter
an 85% ethanol fuel (E85) pump wintertime, the E85 fuel must be (gallon) than gasoline, so you will
available. The U.S. Department of formulated properly for your climate need to refill the fuel tank more
Energy has an alternative fuels according to ASTM specification often when using E85 than when
website (www.afdc.energy.gov/afdc/ D 5798. If you have trouble starting you are using gasoline. See Filling
locator/stations/) that can help you on E85, it could be because the E85 the Tank on page 9‑39.
find E85 fuel. Those stations that do fuel is not properly formulated for Notice: Some additives are not
have E85 should have a label your climate. If this happens, compatible with E85 fuel and can
indicating ethanol content. Do not switching to gasoline or adding harm the vehicle's fuel system.
use the fuel if the ethanol content is gasoline to the fuel tank can Do not add anything to E85.
greater than 85%. improve starting. For good starting Damage caused by additives
At a minimum, E85 should meet and heater efficiency below 0°C would not be covered by the
ASTM Specification D 5798. By (32°F), the fuel mix in the fuel tank vehicle warranty.
definition, this means that fuel should contain no more than
70% ethanol. It is best not to Notice: This vehicle was not
labeled E85 will have an ethanol designed for fuel that contains
content between 70% and 85%. alternate repeatedly between
gasoline and E85. If you do switch methanol. Do not use fuel
Filling the fuel tank with fuel containing methanol. It can
mixtures that do not meet ASTM fuels, it is recommended that you
add as much fuel as possible — do corrode metal parts in the fuel
specifications can affect driveability system and also damage plastic
and could cause the malfunction not add less than 11 L (3 gal) when
refueling. You should drive the and rubber parts. That damage
indicator lamp to come on. would not be covered under the
vehicle immediately after refueling
for at least 11 km (7 mi) to allow the vehicle warranty.
vehicle to adapt to the change in
ethanol concentration.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Filling the Tank Turn the tethered fuel cap

counterclockwise to remove. If the
vehicle has E85 fuel capability, the
{ WARNING fuel cap will be yellow and state that
Fuel vapor burns violently and a E85 or gasoline can be used. See
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on
fuel fire can cause bad injuries.
page 9‑37. While refueling, hang the
To help avoid injuries to you and
tethered fuel cap from the hook on
others, read and follow all the the fuel door. Reinstall the cap by
instructions on the fuel pump turning it clockwise until it clicks.
island. Turn off the engine when
refueling. Do not smoke near fuel If the cap is not properly installed,
or when refueling the vehicle. Do the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
not use cellular phones. Keep The fuel cap is behind the fuel come on. See Malfunction Indicator
sparks, flames, and smoking door on the vehicle's passenger Lamp on page 5‑15 for more
side. To open the fuel door, push the information.
materials away from fuel. Do not
leave the fuel pump unattended rearward center edge in and release
when refueling the vehicle. This is and it will open.
against the law in some places.
Do not re-enter the vehicle while
pumping fuel. Keep children away
from the fuel pump; never let
children pump fuel.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Filling a Portable Fuel

{ WARNING { WARNING Container
Fuel can spray out on you if you If a fire starts while you are
open the fuel cap too quickly.
If you spill fuel and then
refueling, do not remove the
nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
{ WARNING
something ignites it, you could be shutting off the pump or by Never fill a portable fuel container
badly burned. This spray can notifying the station attendant. while it is in the vehicle. Static
happen if the tank is nearly full, Leave the area immediately. electricity discharge from the
and is more likely in hot weather. container can ignite the fuel
Open the fuel cap slowly and wait Notice: If a new fuel cap is vapor. You can be badly burned
for any hiss noise to stop. Then needed, be sure to get the right and the vehicle damaged if this
unscrew the cap all the way. type of cap from your dealer. The occurs. To help avoid injury to you
wrong type of fuel cap might not and others:
Do not top off or overfill the tank and fit properly, might cause the . Dispense fuel only into
wait a few seconds before removing malfunction indicator lamp to approved containers.
the nozzle. Clean fuel from painted light, and could damage the fuel
tank and emissions system. See
. Do not fill a container while it
surfaces as soon as possible. See is inside a vehicle, in a
Exterior Care on page 10‑90. Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 5‑15. vehicle's trunk, pickup bed,
or on any surface other than
the ground.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

WARNING (Continued) Towing See the following trailer towing

information in this section:
. Bring the fill nozzle in contact General Towing . For information on driving while
with the inside of the fill towing a trailer, see “Driving
Information Characteristics and
opening before operating the
nozzle. Contact should be Only use towing equipment that has Towing Tips.”
maintained until the filling is been designed for the vehicle. . For maximum vehicle and trailer
complete. Contact your dealer or trailering weights, see “Trailer Towing.”
dealer for assistance with preparing
. Do not smoke while the vehicle for towing a trailer. . For information on equipment to
pumping fuel. tow a trailer, see “Towing
Equipment.”
. Do not use a cellular phone
while pumping fuel. For information on towing a disabled
vehicle, see Towing the Vehicle on
page 10‑88. For information on
towing the vehicle behind another
vehicle such as a motor home, see
Recreational Vehicle Towing on
page 10‑88.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


. Do not tow a trailer at all during
Driving Characteristics The vehicle can tow a trailer when
the first 1 600 km (1,000 miles)
equipped with the proper trailer
and Towing Tips towing equipment. For trailering the new vehicle is driven. The
capacity, see Trailer Towing on engine, axle or other parts could
{ WARNING page 9‑45. Trailering changes be damaged.
handling, acceleration, braking, . During the first 800 km
The driver can lose control when durability and fuel economy. With (500 miles) that a trailer is
pulling a trailer if the correct the added weight, the engine, towed, do not drive over 80 km/h
equipment is not used or the transmission, wheel assemblies and (50 mph) and do not make starts
vehicle is not driven properly. For tires are forced to work harder and at full throttle. This reduces wear
example, if the trailer is too under greater loads. The trailer also on the vehicle.
heavy, the brakes may not work adds wind resistance, increasing the
well — or even at all. The driver pulling requirements. For safe
. The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).
trailering, correctly use the proper Use a lower gear if the
and passengers could be
trailering equipment. transmission shifts too often.
seriously injured. The vehicle may
also be damaged; the resulting The following information has
. Obey speed limit restrictions. Do
repairs would not be covered by important trailering tips and rules for not drive faster than the
the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer your safety and that of your maximum posted speed for
only if all the steps in this section passengers. Read this section trailers, or no more than 90 km/h
have been followed. Ask your carefully before pulling a trailer. (55 mph), to reduce wear on the
dealer for advice and information vehicle.
about towing a trailer with the Pulling a Trailer
vehicle. Here are some important points:
. There are many laws, including
speed limit restrictions that apply
to trailering. Check for legal
requirements with state or
provincial Ipolice.
nf
ormat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Driving with a Trailer Towing with a Stability Control Backing Up

Towing a trailer requires experience. System Hold the bottom of the steering
Get familiar with handling and When towing, the sound of the wheel with one hand. To move the
braking with the added trailer stability control system might be trailer to the left, move that hand to
weight. The vehicle is now longer heard. The system is reacting to the the left. To move the trailer to the
and not as responsive as the vehicle movement caused by the right, move your hand to the right.
vehicle is by itself. trailer, which mainly occurs during Always back up slowly and,
Check all trailer hitch parts and cornering. This is normal when if possible, have someone
attachments, safety chains, towing heavier trailers. guide you.
electrical connectors, lamps, tires Following Distance Making Turns
and mirror adjustments. If the trailer
has electric brakes, start the vehicle Stay at least twice as far behind the Notice: Making very sharp turns
and trailer moving and then apply vehicle ahead as you would when while trailering could cause the
the trailer brake controller by hand driving the vehicle without a trailer. trailer to come in contact with the
to be sure the brakes are working. This can help to avoid situations vehicle. The vehicle could be
that require heavy braking and damaged. Avoid making very
During the trip, check regularly to be sudden turns. sharp turns while trailering.
sure that the load is secure, and the
lamps and trailer brakes are working Passing When turning with a trailer, make
properly. wider turns than normal so the
More passing distance is needed trailer will not strike soft shoulders,
when towing a trailer. Because the curbs, road signs, trees or other
rig is longer, it is necessary to go objects. Use the turn signal well in
farther beyond the passed vehicle advance and avoid jerky or sudden
before returning to the lane. maneuvers.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Turn Signals When Towing a The vehicle can tow in D (Drive). Parking on Hills
Trailer Use a lower gear if the transmission
The turn signal indicators
shifts too often. { WARNING
on the instrument panel flash When towing at high altitude on
whenever signaling a turn or lane steep uphill grades, engine coolant Parking the vehicle on a hill with
change. Properly hooked up, the boils at a lower temperature than at the trailer attached can be
trailer lamps also flash, telling other normal altitudes. If the engine is dangerous. If something goes
drivers the vehicle is turning, turned off immediately after towing wrong, the rig could start to move.
changing lanes or stopping. at high altitude on steep uphill People can be injured, and both
grades, the vehicle could show the vehicle and the trailer can be
When towing a trailer, the arrows on signs similar to engine overheating. damaged. When possible, always
the instrument panel flash for turns To avoid this, let the engine run park the rig on a flat surface.
even if the bulbs on the trailer are while parked, preferably on level
burned out. Check occasionally to ground, with the transmission in
be sure the trailer bulbs are still P (Park) for a few minutes before If parking the rig on a hill:
working. turning the engine off. If the 1. Press the brake pedal, but do
Driving on Grades overheat warning comes on, see not shift into P (Park) yet. Turn
Engine Overheating on page 10‑20. the wheels into the curb if facing
Reduce speed and shift to a downhill or into traffic if facing
lower gear before starting down a uphill.
long or steep downgrade. If the
transmission is not shifted down, the 2. Have someone place chocks
brakes might have to be used so under the trailer wheels.
much that they would get hot and no 3. When the wheel chocks are in
longer work well. place, release the brake pedal
until the chocks absorb the load.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then Maintenance When Trailer Trailer Towing
apply the parking brake and shift Towing
into P (Park). Before pulling a trailer, there are
The vehicle needs service more three important considerations that
5. Release the brake pedal. often when pulling a trailer. See this have to do with weight:
Leaving After Parking on a Hill manual's Maintenance Schedule or . The weight of the trailer.
Index for more information. Things
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal. that are especially important in . The weight of the trailer tongue.
2. Start the engine. trailer operation are automatic . The total weight on your
transmission fluid, engine oil, axle vehicle's tires.
3. Shift into a gear. lubricant, belts, cooling system and
4. Release the parking brake. brake system. Inspect these before Weight of the Trailer
and during the trip.
5. Let up on the brake pedal. How heavy can a trailer safely be?
Check periodically to see that all
6. Drive slowly until the trailer is It should never weigh more than
hitch nuts and bolts are tight.
clear of the chocks. 454 kg (1,000 lbs). But even that
Engine Cooling When Trailer can be too heavy.
7. Stop and have someone pick up
and store the chocks. Towing It depends on how the rig is used.
The cooling system may temporarily For example, speed, altitude, road
overheat during severe operating grades, outside temperature and
conditions. See Engine Overheating how much the vehicle is used to pull
on page 10‑20. a trailer are all important. It can
depend on any special equipment
on the vehicle, and the amount of
tongue weight the vehicle can carry.
See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue”
later in this section for more
information.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Maximum trailer weight is calculated If there are a lot of options, After loading the trailer, weigh the
assuming only the driver is in the equipment, passengers or cargo in trailer and then the tongue,
tow vehicle and it has all the the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue separately, to see if the weights are
required trailering equipment. The weight the vehicle can carry, which proper. If they are not, adjustments
weight of additional optional will also reduce the trailer weight the might be made by moving some
equipment, passengers and cargo in vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer, items around in the trailer.
the tow vehicle must be subtracted the tongue load must be added to
from the maximum trailer weight. the GVW because the vehicle will Total Weight on Your Vehicle's
be carrying that weight, too. See Tires
Ask your dealer for trailering
information or advice, or write us at Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑12 Be sure the vehicle's tires are
our Customer Assistance Offices. for more information. inflated to the upper limit for cold
See Customer Assistance Offices tires. These numbers can be found
(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑5 or on the Tire-Loading Information
Customer Assistance Offices label. See Vehicle Load Limits on
(Mexico) on page 13‑5 for more page 9‑12. Make sure not to go over
information. the GVW limit for the vehicle,
including the weight of the trailer
Weight of the Trailer Tongue tongue.
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is
an important weight to measure
because it affects the total gross
weight of the vehicle. The Gross
Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the
curb weight of the vehicle, any
cargo carried in it, and the people The trailer tongue (A) should weigh
who will be riding in the vehicle. 10‐15 percent of the total loaded
trailer weight (B).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Towing Equipment Safety Chains Conversions and

Hitches Always attach chains between the Add-Ons
vehicle and the trailer. Cross the
Use the correct hitch equipment. safety chains under the tongue of
See your dealer or a hitch dealer for the trailer to help prevent the tongue Add-On Electrical
assistance. from contacting the road if it Equipment
. The rear bumper on the vehicle becomes separated from the hitch.
Notice: Do not add anything
is not intended for hitches. Do Leave enough slack so the rig can
electrical to the vehicle unless
not attach rental hitches or other turn. Never allow safety chains to
you check with your dealer first.
bumper-type hitches to it. Use drag on the ground.
Some electrical equipment can
only a frame-mounted hitch that Trailer Brakes damage the vehicle and the
does not attach to the bumper. damage would not be covered by
Does the trailer have its own the vehicle's warranty. Some
. Will any holes be made in the brakes? Be sure to read and follow
body of the vehicle when the add-on electrical equipment can
the instructions for the trailer brakes keep other components from
trailer hitch is installed? If there so they are installed, adjusted, and
are, seal the holes when the working as they should.
maintained properly.
hitch is removed. If the holes are Add-on equipment can drain the
not sealed, dirt, water, and Because the vehicle has antilock vehicle's 12‐volt battery, even if the
deadly carbon monoxide (CO) brakes, do not tap into the vehicle's vehicle is not operating.
from the exhaust can get into the brake system. If this is done, both
vehicle. See Engine Exhaust on brake systems will not work well, The vehicle has an airbag system.
page 9‑22. or at all. Before attempting to add anything
electrical to the vehicle, see
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 3‑36 and Adding
Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 3‑37.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

2 NOTES
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle Care 10-1
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-22

Vehicle Care Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Electrical System
Electrical System
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24 Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
General Information Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Engine Compartment Fuse
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-27 Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
California Proposition Automatic Transmission Shift Instrument Panel Fuse
65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Lock Control Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
California Perchlorate Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 Rear Compartment Fuse
Materials Requirements . . . . 10-3 Ignition Transmission Lock Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Accessories and Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Park Brake and P (Park) Wheels and Tires
Vehicle Checks Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-28 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Doing Your Own Wiper Blade Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-44
Headlamp Aiming Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Engine Compartment Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Tire Terminology and
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 Bulb Replacement Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-13 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Tire Pressure for High-Speed
Automatic Transmission Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14 Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Tire Pressure Monitor
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-14 Stoplamps (LS and LT) . . . . 10-30 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Tire Pressure Monitor
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Stoplamps (LTZ) . . . . . . . . . . 10-32 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-20 Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33 Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Overheated Engine License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-34 Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Protection Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21 I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

10-2 Vehicle Care
When It Is Time for New Jump Starting General Information

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59 For service and parts needs, visit
Different Size Tires and Towing your dealer. You will receive
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61 Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-88 genuine GM parts and GM-trained
Uniform Tire Quality Recreational Vehicle and supported service people.
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88
Genuine GM parts have one of
Wheel Alignment and Tire Appearance Care these marks:
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-64
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-94
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-97
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67
Storing the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74
Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-83
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle Care 10-3
California Proposition California Perchlorate Accessories and

65 Warning Materials Requirements Modifications
Most motor vehicles, including this Certain types of automotive Adding non‐dealer accessories to
one, contain and/or emit chemicals applications, such as airbag the vehicle can affect vehicle
known to the State of California to initiators, seat belt pretensioners, performance and safety, including
cause cancer and birth defects or and lithium batteries contained in such things as airbags, braking,
other reproductive harm. Engine Remote Keyless Entry transmitters, stability, ride and handling,
exhaust, many parts and systems, may contain perchlorate materials. emissions systems, aerodynamics,
many fluids, and some component Special handling may be necessary. durability, and electronic systems
wear by-products contain and/or For additional information, see like antilock brakes, traction control,
emit these chemicals. www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ and stability control. Some of these
perchlorate. accessories could even cause
malfunction or damage not covered
by the vehicle warranty.
Damage to vehicle components
resulting from the installation or use
of non‐GM certified parts, including
control module modifications, is not
covered under the terms of the
vehicle warranty and may affect
remaining warranty coverage for
affected parts.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

10-4 Vehicle Care
GM Accessories are designed to Vehicle Checks If doing some of your own service
complement and function with other work, use the proper service
systems on the vehicle. Your GM manual. It tells you much more
dealer can accessorize the vehicle Doing Your Own about how to service the vehicle
using genuine GM Accessories. Service Work than this manual can. To order the
When you go to your GM dealer and proper service manual, see Service
ask for GM Accessories, you will
know that GM-trained and
{ WARNING Publications Ordering Information
on page 13‑15.
supported service technicians will You can be injured and the This vehicle has an airbag system.
perform the work using genuine GM vehicle could be damaged if you Before attempting to do your own
Accessories. try to do service work on a vehicle service work, see Servicing the
Also, see Adding Equipment to the without knowing enough about it. Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on . Be sure you have page 3‑36.
page 3‑37. sufficient knowledge, Keep a record with all parts receipts
experience, the proper and list the mileage and the date of
replacement parts, and tools any service work performed. See
before attempting any vehicle Maintenance Records on page 11‑8.
maintenance task.
. Be sure to use the proper
nuts, bolts, and other
fasteners. Metric and English
fasteners can be easily
confused. If the wrong
fasteners are used, parts can
later break or fall off. You
could be hurt.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle Care 10-5
Hood 3. Lift the hood.

To open the hood: 4. After the hood is slightly lifted, it
will continue to open to the full
position. Before closing the
hood, be sure all the filler caps
are on properly. Lower the hood
until the lifting force of the strut
is reduced, then release the
hood to latch fully. Check to
make sure the hood is closed
1. Pull the hood release handle and repeat the process if
with this symbol on it. It is necessary.
located inside the vehicle to the
2. Then go to the front of the
left of the steering column.
vehicle and push the secondary
hood release handle toward the
driver side of the vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

10-6 Vehicle Care
Engine Compartment Overview
2.4 L L4 Engine
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle Care 10-7
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on E. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. H. Battery on page 10‑26.
page 10‑14. See Engine Coolant on I. Windshield Washer Fluid
B. Engine Cooling Fan (Out of page 10‑16. Reservoir. See “Adding Washer
View). See Cooling System on F. Pressure Cap. See Cooling Fluid” under Washer Fluid on
page 10‑16. System on page 10‑16. page 10‑23.
C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When G. Brake Master Cylinder J. See Engine Compartment Fuse
to Add Engine Oil” under Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid” Block on page 10‑36.
Engine Oil on page 10‑9. under Brakes on page 10‑24.
D. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of
View). See “Checking Engine
Oil” under Engine Oil on
page 10‑9.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

10-8 Vehicle Care
3.6 L V6 Engine
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle Care 10-9
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on G. Pressure Cap. See Cooling Engine Oil

page 10‑14. System on page 10‑16.
To ensure proper engine
B. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. H. Brake Master Cylinder performance and long life, careful
See Power Steering Fluid on Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid” attention must be paid to engine oil.
page 10‑22. under Brakes on page 10‑24. Following these simple, but
C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When I. Automatic Transmission Fluid important steps will help protect
to Add Engine Oil” under Dipstick (Out of View). See your investment:
Engine Oil on page 10‑9. “Checking the Fluid Level” . Always use engine oil approved
D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See under Automatic Transmission to the proper specification and of
“Checking Engine Oil” under Fluid on page 10‑14. the proper viscosity grade. See
Engine Oil on page 10‑9. J. See Battery on page 10‑26. “Selecting the Right Engine Oil”
in this section.
E. Electric Engine Cooling Fans K. Engine Compartment Fuse
(Out of View). See Cooling Block on page 10‑36. . Check the engine oil level
System on page 10‑16. regularly and maintain the
L. Windshield Washer Fluid proper oil level. See “Checking
F. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. Reservoir. See “Adding Washer Engine Oil” and “When to Add
See Engine Coolant on Fluid” under Washer Fluid on Engine Oil” in this section.
page 10‑16. page 10‑23.
. Change the engine oil at the
appropriate time. See Engine Oil
Life System on page 10‑13.
. Always dispose of engine oil
properly. See “What to Do with
Used Oil” in this section.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

10-10 Vehicle Care
Checking Engine Oil When to Add Engine Oil Notice: Do not add too much oil.
Oil levels above or below the
It is a good idea to check the engine
acceptable operating range
oil level at each fuel fill. In order to
shown on the dipstick are harmful
get an accurate reading, the vehicle
to the engine. If you find that you
must be on level ground. The
have an oil level above the
engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow
operating range, i.e., the engine
loop. See Engine Compartment
has so much oil that the oil level
Overview on page 10‑6 for the L4 Engine gets above the upper mark that
location of the engine oil dipstick.
shows the proper operating
Obtaining an accurate oil level range, the engine could be
reading is essential: damaged. You should drain out
1. If the engine has been running the excess oil or limit driving of
recently, turn off the engine and the vehicle and seek a service
allow several minutesfor the oil professional to remove the
to drain back into the oil pan. excess amount of oil.
V6 Engine
Checking the oil level too soon See Engine Compartment Overview
after engine shutoff will not If the oil is below the MIN on page 10‑6 for the location of the
provide an accurate oil level (minimum) mark for the L4 engine or engine oil fill cap.
reading. below the cross‐hatched area at the
tip of the dipstick for the V6 engine, Add enough oil to put the level
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it add 1 L (1 qt) of the recommended somewhere in the proper operating
with a paper towel or cloth, then oil and then recheck the level. See range. Push the dipstick all the way
push it back in all the way. “Selecting the Right Engine Oil” in back in when through.
Remove it again, keeping the tip this section for an explanation of
down, and check the level. what kind of oil to use. For engine
oil crankcase capacity, see
Capacities and Specifications on
page 12‑2. InformationProvidedby:

Vehicle Care 10-11
Selecting the Right Engine Oil Use of Substitute Engine Oils if

dexos is unavailable: In the event
Selecting the right engine oil
that dexos‐approved engine oil is
depends on both the proper oil
not available at an oil change or for
specification and viscosity grade:
maintaining proper oil level, you
Specification may use substitute engine oil
displaying the API Starburst symbol
Use and ask for engine oils with the This vehicle was filled at the factory and of SAE 5W-30 viscosity grade.
dexos™ certification mark. Oils with dexos‐approved engine oil. Use of oils that do not meet the
meeting the requirements of the
Notice: Use only engine oil that is dexos specification, however, may
vehicle should have the dexos
approved to the dexos result in reduced performance under
certification mark on the container.
specification or an equivalent certain circumstances.
This certification mark indicates that
engine oil of the appropriate
the oil has been approved to the Viscosity Grade
viscosity grade. Engine oils
dexos specification.
approved to the dexos SAE 5W-30 is the best viscosity
specification will show the dexos grade for the vehicle. Do not use
symbol on the container. Failure other viscosity oils such as
to use the recommended engine SAE 10W‐30, 10W‐40, or 20W-50.
oil or equivalent can result in
engine damage not covered by
the vehicle warranty. If you are
unsure whether the oil is
approved to the dexos
specification, ask your service
provider.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

10-12 Vehicle Care
(−20°F), an SAE 0W-30 oil should What to Do with Used Oil

be used. An oil of this viscosity
Used engine oil contains certain
grade will provide easier cold
elements that can be unhealthy for
starting for the engine at extremely
your skin and could even cause
low temperatures. When selecting
cancer. Do not let used oil stay on
an oil of the appropriate viscosity
your skin for very long. Clean your
grade, be sure to always select
skin and nails with soap and water,
an oil that meets the required
or a good hand cleaner. Wash or
specification, dexos. See
properly dispose of clothing or rags
“Specification” earlier in this
containing used engine oil. See the
section for more information.
manufacturer's warnings about the
Engine Oil Additives/Engine use and disposal of oil products.
Oil Flushes Used oil can be a threat to the
Do not add anything to the oil. The environment. If you change your
recommended oils with the dexos own oil, be sure to drain all the oil
specification and displaying the from the filter before disposal. Never
dexos certification mark are all that dispose of oil by putting it in the
is needed for good performance and trash or pouring it on the ground,
engine protection. into sewers, or into streams or
bodies of water. Recycle it by taking
Engine oil system flushes are not it to a place that collects used oil.
recommended and could cause
engine damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty.
Cold Temperature Operation: In an
area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −29°C
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle Care 10-13
Engine Oil Life System best conditions, the oil life system How to Reset the Engine Oil
might indicate that an oil change is Life System
When to Change Engine Oil not necessary for up to a year. The
engine oil and filter must be Reset the system whenever the
This vehicle has a computer system engine oil is changed so that the
that indicates when to change the changed at least once a year and,
at this time, the system must be system can calculate the next
engine oil and filter. This is based engine oil change. To reset the
on engine revolutions and engine reset. Your dealer has trained
service people who will perform this system:
temperature, and not on mileage.
Based on driving conditions, the work and reset the system. It is also 1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
mileage at which an oil change is important to check the oil regularly with the engine off.
indicated can vary considerably. For over the course of an oil drain
2. Press and hold the DIC INFO
the oil life system to work properly, interval and keep it at the proper
and reset buttons, on the left
the system must be reset every time level.
side of the steering wheel, at the
the oil is changed. If the system is ever reset same time to enter the
When the system has calculated accidentally, the oil must be personalization menu. The OIL
that oil life has been diminished, it changed at 5 000 km (3,000 miles) LIFE RESET message displays.
indicates that an oil change is since the last oil change. See Driver Information Center
necessary. A CHANGE OIL SOON Remember to reset the oil life (DIC) on page 5‑22 and Engine
message comes on. See Engine Oil system whenever the oil is changed. Oil Messages on page 5‑26.
Messages on page 5‑26. Change 3. Press and hold the reset button
the oil as soon as possible within until the DIC display shows
the next 1 000 km (600 miles). It is ACKNOWLEDGED.
possible that, if driving under the
4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
The system is reset when the
CHANGE OIL SOON message
is off.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

10-14 Vehicle Care
If the CHANGE OIL SOON Notice: Use of the incorrect When to Inspect the Engine Air
message comes back on when the automatic transmission fluid may Cleaner/Filter
vehicle is started, the engine oil life damage the vehicle, and the
system has not reset. Repeat the damages may not be covered by Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the
procedure. the vehicle warranty. Always use scheduled maintenance intervals
the automatic transmission fluid and replace it at the first oil change
after each 80 000 km (50,000 mi)
Automatic Transmission listed in Recommended Fluids
interval. See Scheduled
and Lubricants on page 11‑6.
Fluid Maintenance on page 11‑2 for more
For the 2.4 L and 3.6 L engines, the information. If driving in dusty/dirty
It is not necessary to check
transmission fluid will not reach the conditions, inspect the filter at each
the transmission fluid level.
end of the dipstick unless the engine oil change.
A transmission fluid leak is the
transmission is at operating
only reason for fluid loss. If a leak How to Inspect the Engine Air
temperature. If the transmission fluid
occurs, take the vehicle to the Cleaner/Filter
level needs to be checked, please
dealer and have it repaired as soon
take the vehicle to the dealer. To inspect the air cleaner/filter,
as possible.
remove the filter from the vehicle
Change the fluid and filter at the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter and lightly shake the filter to release
intervals listed in Scheduled loose dust and dirt. If the filter
Maintenance on page 11‑2, and be See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10‑6 for the location of the remains covered with dirt, a new
sure to use the transmission fluid filter is required.
listed in Recommended Fluids and engine air cleaner/filter.
Lubricants on page 11‑6.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle Care 10-15
To inspect or replace the engine air

cleaner/filter: { WARNING
Operating the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off can cause you or
others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it
helps to stop flames if the engine
backfires. Use caution when
working on the engine and do not
drive with the air cleaner/filter off.
3. Inspect or replace the engine air Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is

cleaner/filter. off, dirt can easily get into the
engine, which could damage it.
1. Remove the spring clamps that 4. Align the filter correctly using the Always have the air cleaner/filter
hold the cover on. alignment tab. in place when you are driving.
2. Lift off the cover. 5. Install the cover by guiding the
tabs on the rim of the top cover
into the bottom hinges and turn
the cover down to close it.
6. The spring clips will engage
easily, if the cover is properly
seated.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

10-16 Vehicle Care
Cooling System Notice: Using coolant other than

{ WARNING DEX-COOL® can cause premature
The cooling system allows the engine, heater core, or radiator
engine to maintain the correct An electric engine cooling fan corrosion. In addition, the engine
working temperature. under the hood can start up even coolant could require changing
when the engine is not running sooner, at 50 000 km (30,000 mi)
and can cause injury. Keep or 24 months, whichever occurs
hands, clothing, and tools away first. Any repairs would not be
from any underhood electric fan. covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always use DEX-COOL
(silicate-free) coolant in the
vehicle.
{ WARNING
Heater and radiator hoses, and Engine Coolant
other engine parts, can be very The cooling system in the vehicle is
hot. Do not touch them. If you do, filled with DEX-COOL® engine
you can be burned. coolant. This coolant is designed to
3.6 L V6 Engine Shown, 2.4 L L4 remain in the vehicle for 5 years or
Engine Similar Do not run the engine if there is a
240 000 km (150,000 mi), whichever
leak. If you run the engine, it
A. Engine Cooling Fans occurs first.
could lose all coolant. That could
(Out of View) cause an engine fire, and you The following explains the cooling
B. Engine Coolant Surge Tank could be burned. Get any leak system and how to check and add
fixed before you drive the vehicle. coolant when it is low. If there is a
C. Pressure Cap problem with engine overheating,
see Engine Overheating on
page 10‑20.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle Care 10-17
What to Use Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, Never dispose of engine coolant by
drinkable water and DEX-COOL putting it in the trash, pouring it on
{ WARNING coolant. If using this mixture,
nothing else needs to be added.
the ground, or into sewers, streams,
or bodies of water. Have the coolant
Adding only plain water or some This mixture: changed by an authorized service
other liquid to the cooling system . Gives freezing protection down center, familiar with legal
can be dangerous. Plain water to −37°C (−34°F), outside requirements regarding used
and other liquids, can boil before temperature. coolant disposal. This will help
the proper coolant mixture will. protect the environment and your
. Gives boiling protection up to health.
The coolant warning system is set 129°C (265°F), engine
for the proper coolant mixture. temperature. Checking Coolant
With plain water or the wrong
. Protects against rust and The vehicle must be on a level
mixture, the engine could get too
corrosion. surface when checking the coolant
hot but you would not get the
level.
overheat warning. The engine . Will not damage aluminum parts.
could catch fire and you or others Check to see if coolant is visible in
. Helps keep the proper engine the coolant surge tank. If the coolant
could be burned. Use a temperature.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable inside the coolant surge tank is
water and DEX-COOL coolant. Notice: If an improper coolant boiling, do not do anything else until
mixture is used, the engine could it cools down. If coolant is visible
overheat and be badly damaged. but the coolant level is not at or
The repair cost would not be above the FULL COLD mark, add a
covered by the vehicle warranty. 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
Too much water in the mixture water and DEX-COOL coolant at the
can freeze and crack the engine, coolant surge tank, but be sure the
radiator, heater core, and other cooling system is cool before this is
parts. done. See Engine Overheating on
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

10-18 Vehicle Care
The coolant level should be at or

above the FULL COLD mark on the { WARNING { WARNING
coolant surge tank. If it is not, there
may be a leak at the pressure cap Steam and scalding liquids from a You can be burned if you spill
or in the radiator hoses, heater hot cooling system can blow out coolant on hot engine parts.
hoses, radiator, water pump, and burn you badly. They are Coolant contains ethylene glycol
or somewhere else in the cooling under pressure, and if you turn and it will burn if the engine parts
system. the surge tank pressure are hot enough. Do not spill
cap — even a little — they can coolant on a hot engine.
How to Add Coolant to the come out at high speed. Never
Coolant Surge Tank turn the cap when the cooling Notice: This vehicle has a
system, including the surge tank specific coolant fill procedure.
{ WARNING pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the Failure to follow this procedure
cooling system and surge tank could cause the engine to
An electric engine cooling fan pressure cap to cool if you ever overheat and be severely
under the hood can start up even have to turn the pressure cap. damaged.
when the engine is not running
and can cause injury. Keep If coolant is needed, add the proper
hands, clothing, and tools away DEX-COOL coolant mixture at the
from any underhood electric fan. coolant surge tank.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle Care 10-19
2. Keep turning the pressure cap By this time, the coolant level
slowly, and remove it. inside the coolant surge tank
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with might be lower. If the level is
the proper mixture, to the FULL lower than the FULL COLD
COLD mark. Wait about mark, add more of the proper
five minutes, then check to see if mixture to the coolant surge tank
1. Remove the coolant surge tank the level is below the mark. If the until the level reaches the FULL
pressure cap when the cooling level is below the FULL COLD COLD mark.
system, including the coolant mark, add additional coolant to 5. Replace the pressure cap. Be
surge tank pressure cap and bring the level up to the mark. sure the pressure cap is
upper radiator hose, is no longer Repeat this procedure until the hand-tight and fully seated.
hot. Turn the pressure cap level remains constant at the Notice: If the pressure cap is not
slowly counterclockwise about FULL COLD mark for at least tightly installed, coolant loss and
two or two and one-half turns. five minutes. possible engine damage may
If a hiss is heard, wait for that to 4. With the coolant surge tank occur. Be sure the cap is properly
stop. This will allow any pressure cap off, start the and tightly secured.
pressure still left to be vented engine and let it run until the
out the discharge hose. upper radiator hose can be felt
getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fans.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

10-20 Vehicle Care
Engine Overheating Then check to see if the engine

WARNING (Continued)
cooling fans are running. If the
The vehicle has several indicators engine is overheating, both fans
to warn of engine overheating. should be running. If they are not, If you keep driving when the
do not continue to run the engine engine is overheated, the liquids
There is an engine coolant
and have the vehicle serviced. in it can catch fire. You or others
temperature gauge as well as an
engine coolant temperature warning could be badly burned. Stop the
Notice: Engine damage from engine if it overheats, and get out
light on the vehicle's instrument running the engine without
panel cluster. See Engine Coolant of the vehicle until the engine
coolant is not covered by the
Temperature Gauge on page 5‑11 is cool.
warranty.
and Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light on page 5‑20. If Steam is Coming from the If No Steam is Coming from
If it is decided not to lift the hood Engine Compartment the Engine Compartment
when this warning appears, but
instead get service help right away. { WARNING If an engine overheat warning is
displayed but no steam can be seen
See Roadside Assistance Program or heard, the problem may not be
(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑8 or Steam from an overheated engine
can burn you badly, even if you too serious. Sometimes the engine
Roadside Assistance Program can get a little too hot when the
(Mexico) on page 13‑10. just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear vehicle:
If it is decided to lift the hood, make . Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
steam coming from it. Just turn it
sure the vehicle is parked on a level
off and get everyone away from . Stops after high-speed driving.
surface.
the vehicle until it cools down.
Wait until there is no sign of
. Idles for long periods in traffic.
steam or coolant before you open . Tows a trailer.
the hood.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle Care 10-21
If the overheat warning is displayed If the warning continues, pull over, and engine performance will be
with no sign of steam: stop, and park the vehicle noticed. The temperature gauge will
1. Turn the air off. right away. indicate an overheat condition
If there is no sign of steam, idle the exists. Driving extended km (mi)
2. Turn the heater on to the highest and/or towing a trailer in the
temperature and to the highest engine for three minutes while
parked. If the warning is still overheat protection mode should be
fan speed. Open the windows as avoided.
necessary. displayed, turn off the engine until it
cools down. Also, see “Overheated Notice: After driving in the
3. In heavy traffic, let the engine Engine Protection Operating Mode” overheated engine protection
idle in N (Neutral) while stopped. following. operating mode, to avoid engine
If it is safe to do so, pull off the damage, allow the engine to cool
road, shift to P (Park) or Overheated Engine before attempting any repair. The
N (Neutral) and let the engine oil will be severely
engine idle. Protection degraded. Repair the cause of
If the temperature overheat gauge
Operating Mode coolant loss, change the oil and
is no longer in the overheat zone or This emergency operating mode reset the oil life system. See
an overheat warning no longer allows the vehicle to be driven to a Engine Oil on page 10‑9.
displays, the vehicle can be driven. safe place in an emergency
Continue to drive the vehicle slowly situation. If an overheated engine
for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe condition exists, an overheat
vehicle distance from the vehicle in protection mode which alternates
front. If the warning does not come firing groups of cylinders helps
back on, continue to drive normally. prevent engine damage. In this
mode, a significant loss in power
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

10-22 Vehicle Care
Power Steering Fluid It is not necessary to regularly The fluid level should be between
check power steering fluid unless a the MIN (Minimum) and MAX
leak is suspected in the system, (Maximum) marks when the engine
or an unusual noise is heard. A fluid is cold, and at the MAX mark when
loss in this system could indicate a the engine is hot. If the fluid is at the
problem. Have the system inspected MIN mark when the engine is cold
and repaired. or hot, power steering fluid should
be added.
How to Check Power Steering
See Engine Compartment Overview Fluid The fluid level should be within the
on page 10‑6 for reservoir location. crosshatch area on the dipstick.
To check the power steering fluid:
If the fluid is at or below the ADD or
When to Check Power Steering 1. Turn the key off and let the MIN mark on the dipstick, add just
Fluid engine compartment cool down. enough fluid to bring the level within
Power steering fluid is used in all 2. Wipe the cap and the top of the the crosshatch area.
vehicles with the V6 engine. reservoir clean.
Vehicles with the 4-cylinder engine What to Use
have electric power steering and do 3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the
To determine what kind of fluid to
not use power steering fluid. dipstick with a clean rag.
use, see Recommended Fluids and
4. Replace the cap and completely Lubricants on page 11‑6. Always
tighten it. use the proper fluid.
5. Remove the cap again and look
at the fluid level on the dipstick.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle Care 10-23

. Fill the washer fluid tank
Washer Fluid only three-quarters full
What to Use when it is very cold. This
allows for fluid expansion if
When windshield washer fluid is freezing occurs, which could
needed, be sure to read the damage the tank if it is
manufacturer's instructions before completely full.
use. If operating the vehicle in an Open the cap with the washer
area where the temperature may fall symbol on it. Add washer fluid until . Do not use engine coolant
below freezing, use a fluid that has the tank is full. See Engine (antifreeze) in the windshield
sufficient protection against Compartment Overview on washer. It can damage the
freezing. page 10‑6 for reservoir location. windshield washer system
and paint.
Adding Washer Fluid Notice:
When the windshield washer fluid
. When using concentrated
reservoir is low, a LOW WASHER washer fluid, follow the
FLUID message displays on the manufacturer's instructions
Driver Information Center (DIC). for adding water.
See Driver Information Center (DIC) . Do not mix water with
on page 5‑22 for more information. ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution
to freeze and damage the
washer fluid tank and other
parts of the washer system.
Also, water does not clean as
well as washer fluid.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

10-24 Vehicle Care
Brakes Some driving conditions or climates Brake Adjustment

can cause a brake squeal when the
This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc Every time the brakes are applied,
brakes are first applied or lightly
brake pads have built-in wear with or without the vehicle moving,
applied. This does not mean
indicators that make a high-pitched the brakes adjust for wear.
something is wrong with the brakes.
warning sound when the brake pads Replacing Brake System Parts
are worn and new pads are needed. Properly torqued wheel nuts are
The sound can come and go or be necessary to help prevent brake The braking system on a vehicle is
heard all the time the vehicle is pulsation. When tires are rotated, complex. Its many parts have to be
moving, except when applying the inspect brake pads for wear and of top quality and work well together
brake pedal firmly. evenly tighten wheel nuts in the if the vehicle is to have really good
proper sequence to torque braking. The vehicle was designed
specifications in Capacities and
{ WARNING Specifications on page 12‑2.
and tested with top-quality brake
parts. When parts of the braking
The brake wear warning sound Brake linings should always be system are replaced, be sure to get
means that soon the brakes will replaced as complete axle sets. new, approved replacement parts.
not work well. That could lead to If this is not done, the brakes might
a crash. When the brake wear
Brake Pedal Travel not work properly. For example,
warning sound is heard, have the See your dealer if the brake pedal installing disc brake pads that are
does not return to normal height, wrong for the vehicle, can change
vehicle serviced.
or if there is a rapid increase in the balance between the front and
pedal travel. This could be a sign rear brakes — for the worse. The
Notice: Continuing to drive with that brake service might be braking performance expected can
worn-out brake pads could result required. change in many other ways if the
in costly brake repair. wrong replacement brake parts are
installed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle Care 10-25

. A fluid leak in the brake
Brake Fluid hydraulic system can also cause { WARNING
a low fluid level. Have the brake
hydraulic system fixed, since a If too much brake fluid is added, it
leak means that sooner or later can spill on the engine and burn,
the brakes will not work well. if the engine is hot enough. You
Do not top off the brake fluid. or others could be burned, and
Adding fluid does not correct a leak. the vehicle could be damaged.
If fluid is added when the linings are Add brake fluid only when work is
The brake master cylinder reservoir done on the brake hydraulic
worn, there will be too much fluid
is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid as system.
when new brake linings are
indicated on the reservoir cap. See
installed. Add or remove brake fluid,
Engine Compartment Overview on
as necessary, only when work is When the brake fluid falls to a low
page 10‑6 for the location of the
done on the brake hydraulic system. level, the brake warning light comes
reservoir.
on. See Brake System Warning
There are only two reasons why the Light on page 5‑18.
brake fluid level in the reservoir
might go down: What to Add
. The brake fluid level goes down Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid
because of normal brake lining from a sealed container. See
wear. When new linings are Recommended Fluids and
installed, the fluid level goes Lubricants on page 11‑6.
back up.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

10-26 Vehicle Care
Always clean the brake fluid

. If brake fluid is spilled on the Vehicle Storage
reservoir cap and the area around vehicle's painted surfaces,
the paint finish can be
the cap before removing it. This
helps keep dirt from entering the damaged. Be careful not to { WARNING
reservoir. spill brake fluid on the Batteries have acid that can burn
vehicle. If you do, wash it off
you and gas that can explode.
immediately.
{ WARNING You can be badly hurt if you are
not careful. See Jump Starting on
With the wrong kind of fluid in the Battery page 10‑84 for tips on working
brake hydraulic system, the Refer to the replacement number around a battery without
brakes might not work well. This shown on the original battery label getting hurt.
could cause a crash. Always use when a new battery is needed. See
the proper brake fluid. Engine Compartment Overview on
page 10‑6 for battery location. Infrequent Usage: Remove the
black, negative (−) cable from the
Notice: battery to keep the battery from
. Using the wrong fluid can
{ DANGER running down.
badly damage brake Battery posts, terminals, and Extended Storage: Remove the
hydraulic system parts. For related accessories contain lead black, negative (−) cable from the
example, just a few drops of and lead compounds, chemicals battery or use a battery trickle
mineral-based oil, such as known to the State of California to charger.
engine oil, in the brake
cause cancer and reproductive
hydraulic system can
harm. Wash hands after handling.
damage brake hydraulic
system parts so badly that
they will have to be replaced.
Do not let someone put in
the wrong kind of fluid.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle Care 10-27
Starter Switch Check 3. Try to start the engine in each 2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
gear. The vehicle should start See Parking Brake on
only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). page 9‑28.
{ WARNING If the vehicle starts in any other Be ready to apply the regular
When you are doing this position, contact your dealer for brake immediately if the vehicle
service. begins to move.
inspection, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If the vehicle 3. With the engine off, turn the
moves, you or others could be Automatic Transmission
ignition on, but do not start the
injured. Shift Lock Control engine. Without applying the
Function Check regular brake, try to move the
1. Before starting this check, be shift lever out of P (Park) with
sure there is enough room { WARNING normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of P (Park), contact
around the vehicle.
When you are doing this your dealer for service.
2. Firmly apply both the parking
inspection, the vehicle could
brake and the regular brake.
move suddenly. If the vehicle
See Parking Brake on
page 9‑28. moves, you or others could be
injured.
Do not use the accelerator
pedal, and be ready to turn off
the engine immediately if it 1. Before starting this check, be
starts. sure there is enough room
around the vehicle. It should be
parked on a level surface.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

10-28 Vehicle Care
Ignition Transmission Park Brake and P (Park) Park on a fairly steep hill, with the
vehicle facing downhill. Keeping
Lock Check Mechanism Check your foot on the regular brake, set
While parked, and with the parking the parking brake.
brake set, try to turn the ignition to { WARNING . To check the parking brake's
LOCK/OFF in each shift lever holding ability: With the engine
position. When you are doing this check,
the vehicle could begin to move. running and the transmission in
. The ignition should turn to You or others could be injured N (Neutral), slowly remove foot
LOCK/OFF only when the shift pressure from the regular brake
and property could be damaged.
lever is in P (Park). pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
Make sure there is room in front
held by the parking brake only.
. The ignition key should come of the vehicle in case it begins to
out only in LOCK/OFF. roll. Be ready to apply the regular . To check the P (Park)
brake at once should the vehicle mechanism's holding ability:
Contact your dealer if service is
begin to move. With the engine running, shift to
required.
P (Park). Then release the
parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Contact your dealer if service is
required.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle Care 10-29
Wiper Blade Replacement To replace the wiper blade: Headlamp Aiming

Windshield wiper blades should be 1. Pull the windshield wiper arm
Headlamp aim has been preset at
inspected for wear or cracking. See connector away from the
the factory and should need no
Scheduled Maintenance on windshield.
further adjustment.
However, if the vehicle is damaged
It is a good idea to clean or replace in a crash, the headlamp aim may
the wiper blade assembly on a be affected. Aim adjustment to the
regular basis or when worn. For low-beam headlamps may be
proper windshield wiper blade necessary if oncoming drivers flash
length and type, see Maintenance their high-beam headlamps at you
Replacement Parts on page 11‑7. (for vertical aim).
Notice: Allowing the wiper blade If the headlamps need to be
arm to touch the windshield when re-aimed, it is recommended that
no wiper blade is installed could the vehicle be taken to a dealer for
damage the windshield. Any service.
damage that occurs would not be
covered by your warranty. Do not 2. Press the button in the middle of
allow the wiper blade arm to the wiper arm connector, and
touch the windshield. pull the wiper blade away from
the arm connector.
3. Remove the wiper blade.
4. Reverse steps 1 through 3 for
wiper blade replacement.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

10-30 Vehicle Care
Bulb Replacement Halogen Bulbs Taillamps, Turn Signal,

For the proper type of replacement and Stoplamps
bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on { WARNING (LS and LT)
page 10‑34.
Halogen bulbs have pressurized
For any bulb‐changing procedure gas inside and can burst if you
not listed in this section, contact drop or scratch the bulb. You or
your dealer. others could be injured. Be sure
to read and follow the instructions
on the bulb package.
A. Back‐up Lamp
B. Stoplamp, Taillamp and Turn
Signal Lamp
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle Care 10-31
2. Remove the two rear 3. Remove the three wing nuts (A), 5. Turn the bulb socket (B)
convenience net hooks holding which hold the taillamp counterclockwise to remove it
the trunk trim and move the trim assembly, from inside the trunk. from the lamp assembly (A).
aside. 4. Remove the taillamp assembly. 6. Pull the bulb from the socket (B).
7. Install a new bulb.
8. Reverse Steps 2 through 5 to
reinstall the taillamp
assembly (A).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

10-32 Vehicle Care
Taillamps, Turn Signal,

and Stoplamps (LTZ)
2. Remove the two rear 3. Remove the three wing nuts (A),
convenience net hooks holding which hold the taillamp
the trunk trim and move the trim assembly, from inside the trunk.
A. Back‐up Lamp aside. 4. Remove the taillamp assembly.
B. Stoplamp, Taillamp and Turn
Signal Lamp
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle Care 10-33
Back-Up Lamps
5. Disconnect the wiring harness 2. Remove the push pins holding

connector (C) from the LED (B). the trunk trim (B).
6. Turn the LED (B) 1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on 3. Move the trim aside far enough
counterclockwise to remove it. page 2‑9 for more information. to gain access to the bulb
7. Install a new LED (B). assembly (A).
8. Reverse Steps 2 through 6 to

reinstall the taillamp
assembly (A).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

10-34 Vehicle Care
License Plate Lamp 4. Push the new bulb in and turn it

clockwise to install.
To replace the license plate
lamp bulb: 5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to
reinstall.
Replacement Bulbs
Bulb
Exterior Lamp
Number
Back-up Lamp 921
License Plate Lamp 168
4. Turn the bulb socket (B) Rear Turn Signal
counterclockwise to remove from Lamp/Taillamp 3157K LL
the lamp assembly. (LS and LT)
5. Pull the bulb (A) from the Rear LED Turn
GM P/N
socket (B). 1. Remove the license plate bezel Signal Lamp/
25874489
assembly by turning the two Taillamp (LTZ)
6. Install the new bulb.
screws counterclockwise.
7. Reverse Steps 1 through 4 to For replacement bulbs not listed
reinstall. 2. Turn and pull the license plate
here, contact the dealer.
lamp assembly forward through
the fascia opening.
3. Turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise and pull the
bulb straight out of the socket.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle Care 10-35
Electrical System If there is a problem on the road and

a fuse needs to be replaced, the
If the overload is caused by an
electrical problem and not snow or
same amperage fuse can be ice, be sure to get it fixed.
Electrical System borrowed. Choose some feature of
Overload the vehicle that is not needed to use Fuses
and replace it as soon as possible.
The vehicle has fuses and circuit The wiring circuits in the vehicle are
breakers to protect against an Headlamp Wiring protected from short circuits by
electrical system overload. fuses. This greatly reduces the
An electrical overload may cause
When the current electrical load is chance of damage caused by
the lamps to go on and off, or in
too heavy, the circuit breaker opens electrical problems.
some cases to remain off. Have the
and closes, protecting the circuit headlamp wiring checked right away To check a fuse, look at the
until the current load returns to if the lamps go on and off or silver-colored band inside the fuse.
normal or the problem is fixed. This remain off. If the band is broken or melted,
greatly reduces the chance of circuit replace the fuse. Be sure to replace
overload and fire caused by Windshield Wipers a bad fuse with a new one of the
electrical problems. If the wiper motor overheats due to identical size and rating.
Fuses and circuit breakers protect heavy snow or ice, the windshield Fuses of the same amperage can
the following in the vehicle: wipers will stop until the motor cools be temporarily borrowed from
and will then restart. another fuse location, if a fuse goes
. Headlamp Wiring
.
Although the circuit is protected out. Replace the fuse as soon as
Windshield Wiper Motor from electrical overload, overload possible.
. Power Windows and Other due to heavy snow or ice may
Power Accessories cause wiper linkage damage.
Replace a bad fuse with a new one Always clear ice and heavy snow
of the identical size and rating. from the windshield before using the
windshield wipers.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

10-36 Vehicle Care
To identify and check fuses, circuit

breakers, and relays, see Engine
Compartment Fuse Block on
page 10‑36, Instrument Panel Fuse
Block on page 10‑38, and Rear
Compartment Fuse Block on
page 10‑40.
Engine Compartment
Fuse Block
The engine compartment fuse block
is located on the driver side of the
engine compartment, near the
battery.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any
electrical component on the
vehicle may damage it. Always
keep the covers on any electrical The vehicle may not be equipped Fuses Usage
component. with all of the fuses, relays, and
features shown. 3 Not Used
Fuses Usage Transmission Control
4
Module Ignition 1
1 Air Conditioner Clutch
Mass Airflow
Electronic Throttle 5
2 Sensor (LY7)
Control
6 Emission
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle Care 10-37
Fuses Usage Fuses Usage Fuses Usage

Left Headlamp 18 Cooling Fan 2 Transmission Control
7 42
Low-Beam Module Battery
Run Relay, Heating,
8 Horn 19 Ventilation, Air Ignition Module
Conditioning Blower (LE9 & LE5);
Right Headlamp 43
9 Injectors, Ignition
Low-Beam Body Control
20 Coils Odd (LY7)
Module 1
10 Front Fog Lamps
Injectors (LE9 & LE5);
Body Control Module
Left Headlamp 21 44 Injectors, Ignition
11 Run/Crank
High-Beam Coils Even (LY7)
Rear Electrical
Right Headlamp 22 Post Cat 02 Sensor
12 Center 1 45
High-Beam Heaters (LY7)
Rear Electrical
Engine Control 23 Daytime Running
13 Center 2 46
Module BATT Lamps
Antilock Brake
14 Windshield Wiper 24 Center High-Mounted
System 47
Antilock Brake Stoplamp
15 Body Control
System (IGN 1) 25 50 Driver Power Window
Module 2
Engine Control 51 Not Used
16 26 Starter
Module IGN 1
52 AIR Solenoid
Electric Power
17 Cooling Fan 1 41
Steering Regulated Voltage
54
Control
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

10-38 Vehicle Care
Fuses Usage Relays Usage Instrument Panel Fuse

55 DC/AC Inverter 36 Front Fog Lamps Block
Antilock Brake 37 Horn
56
System BATT
38 Low-Beam Headlamp
Relays Usage 39 Windshield Wiper 1
28 Cooling Fan 1 40 Windshield Wiper 2
Cooling Fan Series/ Daytime Running

29 48
Parallel Lamps
30 Cooling Fan 2 49 Stoplamps
31 Starter 53 AIR Solenoid
32 Run/Crank, Ignition
Diodes Usage
33 Powertrain The instrument panel fuse block is
27 Wiper located on the instrument panel
Air Conditioning near the floor on the passenger side
34
Clutch of the vehicle.
35 High Beam Remove the panel cover to access
the fuse block, then remove the fuse
block cover to access the fuses.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle Care 10-39
Fuses Usage
Heating Ventilation
HVAC
Air Conditioning
BLOWER
Blower - High
HIGH
Speed Relay
Instrument Panel
CLUSTER/
Cluster, Theft
THEFT
Deterrent System
OnStar®
ONSTAR
(If Equipped)
NOT
Not Used
INSTALLED
AIRBAG
Airbag (Ignition)
(IGN)
Heating Ventilation
The vehicle may not be equipped Air Conditioning
Fuses Usage HVAC
with all of the fuses, relays and Control Diagnostic
CTRL (BATT)
features shown. Cruise Control Link Connector
Switch, Passenger (Battery)
Fuses Usage RUN/CRANK
Airbag Status PEDAL Not Used
POWER Indicator
Power Mirrors Windshield Wiper/
MIRRORS WIPER SW
Washer Switch
Electronic Power
EPS IGN
Steering Ignition Switch
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
SENSOR

10-40 Vehicle Care
Fuses Usage Fuses Usage Rear Compartment Fuse

STRG WHL Steering Wheel NOT Block
Not Used
ILLUM Illumination INSTALLED
NOT AIRBAG
Not Used Airbag (Battery)
INSTALLED (BATT)
RADIO Audio System SPARE
FUSE Spare Fuse Holder
INTERIOR
Interior Lamps HOLDER
LIGHTS
SPARE
NOT
Not Used FUSE Spare Fuse Holder
INSTALLED
HOLDER
POWER
Power Windows SPARE
WINDOWS
Heating Ventilation HOLDER The rear compartment fuse block is
HVAC
Air Conditioning located in the trunk of the vehicle.
CTRL (IGN) SPARE
Control (Ignition) Access the fuse block through the
Heating Ventilation HOLDER trunk panel on the driver side of the
HVAC
Air Conditioning rear cargo area.
BLOWER FUSE
Blower Switch Fuse Puller
PULLER
DOOR LOCK Door Locks
ROOF/ Sunroof,
HEAT SEAT Heated Seat
NOT
Not Used
INSTALLED I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle Care 10-41
Fuses Usage
7 Not Used
8 Not Used
9 Not Used
10 Sunroof Controls
11 Not Used
12 Not Used
13 Audio Amplifier
14 Heated Seat Controls
15 Not Used
Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System, XM™
16
Satellite Radio
The vehicle may not be equipped (If Equipped)
Fuses Usage
with all of the fuses, relays, and 17 Back-up Lamps
features shown. 4 Not Used
18 Not Used
Fuses Usage Emission 2, Canister
5 19 Not Used
Vent Solenoid
Passenger Seat
1 Auxiliary Power
Controls Park Lamps, 20
6 Instrument Panel Outlets
2 Driver Seat Controls
Dimming 21 Not Used
3 Not Used
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

10-42 Vehicle Care
Fuses Usage Relays Usage Wheels and Tires

22 Trunk Release 30 Not Used
Tires
23 Rear Defog 31 Not Used
Your new vehicle comes with
24 Heated Mirrors 32 Not Used
high-quality tires made by a
25 Fuel Pump 33 Back-up Lamps leading tire manufacturer. If you
34 Not Used ever have questions about your
Relays Usage tire warranty and where to
35 Not Used obtain service, see your vehicle
Rear Window
26 36 Trunk Release Warranty booklet for details. For
Defogger
37 Fuel Pump additional information refer to
27 Park Lamps the tire manufacturer.
28 Not Used 38 (Diode) Cargo Lamp
29 Not Used { WARNING

. Poorly maintained and
improperly used tires are
dangerous.
. Overloading the tires can
cause overheating as a result
of too much flexing. There
could be a blowout and a
serious crash. See Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑12.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle Care 10-43
WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)

Winter Tires
Consider installing winter tires on
. Underinflated tires pose the . Improperly repaired tires can the vehicle if frequent driving on
same danger as overloaded cause a crash. Only the snow or ice covered roads is
tires. The resulting crash dealer or an authorized tire expected. All season tires provide
could cause serious injury. service center should repair, good overall performance on most
Check all tires frequently to replace, dismount, and mount surfaces, but they may not offer the
maintain the recommended the tires. traction or the same level of
pressure. Tire pressure . Do not spin the tires in performance as winter tires on
should be checked when the excess of 55 km/h (35 mph) snow or ice covered roads.
tires are cold. on slippery surfaces such as Winter tires, in general, are
. Overinflated tires are more snow, mud, ice, etc. designed for increased traction on
likely to be cut, punctured, Excessive spinning may snow and ice covered roads. With
or broken by a sudden cause the tires to explode. winter tires, there may be decreased
impact — such as when dry road traction, increased road
hitting a pothole. Keep tires at noise, and shorter tread life. After
See Tire Pressure for High-Speed
the recommended pressure. changing to winter tires, be alert for
Operation on page 10‑52 for
. Worn or old tires can cause a inflation pressure adjustment for changes in vehicle handling and
crash. If the tread is badly high-speed driving. braking.
worn, replace them.
. Replace any tires that have
been damaged by impacts
with potholes, curbs, etc.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

10-44 Vehicle Care
See your dealer for details Low-Profile Tires Tire and/or wheel assembly
regarding winter tire availability and damage can occur when
proper tire selection. Also, see If your vehicle has P225/50R18 coming into contact with road
Buying New Tires on page 10‑59. or P225/50R17 size tires, they hazards like, potholes,
If using snow tires: are classified as low‐profile or sharp edged objects,
performance tires. These tires or when sliding into a curb.
. Use tires of the same brand and are designed for very responsive
tread type on all four wheel The vehicle warranty does not
driving on wet or dry pavement. cover this type of damage.
positions.
You may also notice more road Keep tires set to the correct
. Use only radial ply tires of the noise with low‐profile
same size, load range, and inflation pressure and, when
performance tires and that they possible avoid contact with
speed rating as the original tend to wear faster.
equipment tires. curbs, potholes, and other
Winter tires with the same speed
Notice: If the vehicle has road hazards.
rating as the original equipment tires low‐profile tires, they are more
may not be available for H, V, W, Y, susceptible to damage from Tire Sidewall Labeling
and ZR speed rated tires. If winter road hazards or curb impact Useful information about a tire is
tires with a lower speed rating are than standard profile tires. molded into its sidewall. The
chosen, never exceed the tire's
maximum speed capability.
examples below show a typical
passenger vehicle tire and a
compact spare tire sidewall.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle Care 10-45
(B) TPC Spec (Tire (D) Tire Identification Number

Performance Criteria (TIN): The letters and numbers
Specification): Original following the DOT (Department
equipment tires designed to of Transportation) code are
GM's specific tire performance the Tire Identification Number
criteria have a TPC specification (TIN). The TIN shows the
code molded onto the sidewall. manufacturer and plant code,
GM's TPC specifications meet or tire size, and date the tire was
exceed all federal safety manufactured. The TIN is
guidelines. molded onto both sides of the
(C) DOT (Department of tire, although only one side may
Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire Example Transportation): The have the date of manufacture.
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a Department of Transportation (E) Tire Ply Material : The type
combination of letters and (DOT) code indicates that the of cord and number of plies in
numbers used to define a tire is in compliance with the sidewall and under the tread.
particular tire's width, height, the U.S. Department of (F) Uniform Tire Quality
aspect ratio, construction type, Transportation Motor Vehicle Grading (UTQG): Tire
and service description. See the Safety Standards. manufacturers are required to
“Tire Size” illustration later in this grade tires based on three
section for more detail. performance factors: treadwear,
traction, and temperature
resistance. For more information
see Uniform Tire Quality
Grading on page 10‑62.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

10-46 Vehicle Care
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation (B) Temporary Use Only: The (D) Maximum Cold Inflation
Load Limit: Maximum load that compact spare tire or temporary Load Limit: Maximum load
can be carried and the use tire has a tread life of that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to approximately 5 000 km maximum pressure needed to
support that load. (3,000 mi) and should not be support that load.
driven at speeds over 105 km/h (E) Tire Inflation: The
(65 mph). The compact spare temporary use tire or compact
tire is for emergency use when a spare tire should be inflated to
regular road tire has lost air and 420 kPa (60 psi). For more
gone flat. If the vehicle has a information on tire pressure and
compact spare tire, see inflation see Tire Pressure on
Compact Spare Tire on page 10‑51.
page 10‑83 and If a Tire Goes
Flat on page 10‑65. (F) Tire Size: A combination of
letters and numbers define a
(C) Tire Identification Number tire's width, height, aspect ratio,
(TIN): The letters and numbers construction type, and service
Compact Spare Tire Example following the DOT (Department description. The letter T as the
of Transportation) code is first character in the tire size
(A) Tire Ply Material: The type
the Tire Identification Number means the tire is for temporary
of cord and number of plies in
(TIN). The TIN shows the use only.
the sidewall and under the tread.
manufacturer and plant code,
tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is
molded onto both sides of the
tire, although only one side may
have the dateInf
oroftionmanufacture.
ma Pr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle Care 10-47
(G) TPC Spec (Tire item C of the illustration, it would

Performance Criteria mean that the tire's sidewall is
Specification): Original 60 percent as high as it is wide.
equipment tires designed to (D) Construction Code: A
GM's specific tire performance letter code is used to indicate
criteria have a TPC specification the type of ply construction in
code molded onto the sidewall. (A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire:
The United States version of a the tire. The letter R means
GM's TPC specifications meet or radial ply construction; the
exceed all federal safety metric tire sizing system. The
letter P as the first character in letter D means diagonal or bias
guidelines. ply construction; and the letter B
the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to means belted‐bias ply
Tire Designations construction.
standards set by the U.S. Tire
Tire Size and Rim Association. (E) Rim Diameter : Diameter of
The following is an example of a (B) Tire Width: The three‐digit the wheel in inches.
typical passenger vehicle number indicates the tire section (F) Service Description: These
tire size. width in millimeters from characters represent the load
sidewall to sidewall. index and speed rating of the
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digit tire. The load index represents
number that indicates the tire the load carrying capacity a tire
height‐to‐width measurements. is certified to carry. The speed
For example, if the tire size rating is the maximum speed a
aspect ratio is 60, as shown in tire is certified to carry a load.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

10-48 Vehicle Care
Tire Terminology and Bead: The tire bead contains DOT Markings: A code molded
Definitions steel wires wrapped by steel into the sidewall of a tire
cords that hold the tire onto signifying that the tire is in
Air Pressure: The amount of the rim. compliance with the U.S.
air inside the tire pressing Department of Transportation
outward on each square inch of Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire
in which the plies are laid at (DOT) Motor Vehicle Safety
the tire. Air pressure is Standards. The DOT code
expressed in psi (pounds per alternate angles less than
90 degrees to the centerline of includes the Tire Identification
square inch) or kPa (kilopascal). Number (TIN), an alphanumeric
the tread.
Accessory Weight: The designator which can also
combined weight of optional Cold Tire Pressure: The identify the tire manufacturer,
accessories. Some examples of amount of air pressure in a tire, production plant, brand, and
optional accessories are, measured in kPa (kilopascal) date of production.
automatic transmission, power or psi (pounds per square inch)
before a tire has built up heat GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight
steering, power brakes, power Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits
windows, power seats, and air from driving. See Tire Pressure
on page 10‑51. on page 9‑12.
conditioning.
Curb Weight: The weight of a GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight
Aspect Ratio: The relationship Rating for the front axle. See
of a tire's height to its width. motor vehicle with standard and
optional equipment including the Vehicle Load Limits on
Belt: A rubber coated layer of maximum capacity of fuel, oil, page 9‑12.
cords that is located between and coolant, but without
the plies and the tread. Cords passengers and cargo.
may be made from steel or other
reinforcing materials.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle Care 10-49
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Maximum Inflation Pressure: Outward Facing Sidewall: The
Rating for the rear axle. See The maximum air pressure to side of an asymmetrical tire that
Vehicle Load Limits on which a cold tire can be inflated. has a particular side that faces
page 9‑12. The maximum air pressure is outward when mounted on a
Intended Outboard Sidewall : molded onto the sidewall. vehicle. The side of the tire that
The side of an asymmetrical tire, Maximum Load Rating: The contains a whitewall, bears
that must always face outward load rating for a tire at the white lettering, or bears
when mounted on a vehicle. maximum permissible inflation manufacturer, brand, and/or
pressure for that tire. model name molding that is
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric higher or deeper than the same
unit for air pressure. Maximum Loaded Vehicle moldings on the other sidewall
Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: A Weight: The sum of curb of the tire.
tire used on light duty trucks and weight, accessory weight,
vehicle capacity weight, and Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A
some multipurpose passenger tire used on passenger cars and
vehicles. production options weight.
some light duty trucks and
Load Index: An assigned Normal Occupant Weight: The multipurpose vehicles.
number ranging from 1 to 279 number of occupants a vehicle
is designed to seat multiplied by Recommended Inflation
that corresponds to the load Pressure: Vehicle
carrying capacity of a tire. 68 kg (150 lbs). See Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑12. manufacturer's recommended
tire inflation pressure as shown
Occupant Distribution : on the tire placard. See Tire
Designated seating positions. Pressure on page 10‑51 and
Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9‑12.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

10-50 Vehicle Care
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic Treadwear Indicators: Narrow Vehicle Capacity Weight:
tire in which the ply cords that bands, sometimes called wear The number of designated
extend to the beads are laid at bars, that show across the tread seating positions multiplied by
90 degrees to the centerline of of a tire when only 1.6 mm 68 kg (150 lbs) plus the rated
the tread. (1/16 in) of tread remains. See cargo load. See Vehicle Load
Rim: A metal support for a tire When It Is Time for New Tires Limits on page 9‑12.
and upon which the tire beads on page 10‑59. Vehicle Maximum Load on the
are seated. UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Tire: Load on an individual tire
Sidewall: The portion of a tire Grading Standards): A tire due to curb weight, accessory
between the tread and the bead. information system that weight, occupant weight, and
provides consumers with cargo weight.
Speed Rating: An ratings for a tire's traction,
alphanumeric code assigned Vehicle Placard: A label
temperature, and treadwear. permanently attached to a
to a tire indicating the maximum Ratings are determined by
speed at which a tire can vehicle showing the vehicle
tire manufacturers using capacity weight and the original
operate. government testing procedures. equipment tire size and
Traction: The friction between The ratings are molded into the recommended inflation pressure.
the tire and the road surface. sidewall of the tire. See Uniform See “Tire and Loading
The amount of grip provided. Tire Quality Grading on Information Label” under Vehicle
page 10‑62. Load Limits on page 9‑12.
Tread: The portion of a tire that
comes into contact with
the road.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle Care 10-51
Tire Pressure Overinflated tires, or tires that For additional information

have too much air, can regarding how much weight the
Tires need the correct amount of result in: vehicle can carry, and an
air pressure to operate example of the Tire and Loading
effectively. . Unusual wear.
Information label, see Vehicle
Notice: Neither tire . Poor handling. Load Limits on page 9‑12. How
underinflation nor . Rough ride. you load the vehicle affects
overinflation is good. vehicle handling and ride
Underinflated tires, or tires
. Needless damage from comfort. Never load the vehicle
that do not have enough air, road hazards. with more weight than it was
can result in: A vehicle-specific Tire and designed to carry.
. Tire overloading and Loading Information label is
attached to the vehicle. This When to Check
over-heating which could
label shows the vehicle's original Check the tires once a month or
lead to a blowout.
equipment tires and the correct more. Do not forget to check the
. Premature or inflation pressures for the tires compact spare tire, if the vehicle
irregular wear. when they are cold. The has one. The compact spare
. Poor handling. recommended cold tire inflation should be at 420 kPa (60 psi).
pressure, shown on the label, is For additional information
. Reduced fuel economy. the minimum amount of air regarding the compact spare
pressure needed to support the tire, seeCompact Spare Tire on
vehicle's maximum load carrying page 10‑83.
capacity.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

10-52 Vehicle Care
How to Check If you overfill the tire, release air

by pushing on the metal stem in WARNING (Continued)
Use a good quality pocket-type
gauge to check tire pressure. the center of the tire valve. Re‐ inflation pressure adjustment for
You cannot tell if the tires are check the tire pressure with the high speed operation. When
properly inflated simply by tire gauge. speed limits and road conditions
looking at them. Radial tires may Be sure to put the valve caps are such that a vehicle can be
look properly inflated even when back on the valve stems. They driven at high speeds, make sure
they are underinflated. Check help prevent leaks by keeping the tires are rated for high speed
the tire's inflation pressure when out dirt and moisture. operation, in excellent condition,
the tires are cold. Cold means and set to the correct cold tire
inflation pressure for the
the vehicle has been sitting for Tire Pressure for vehicle load.
at least three hours or driven no High-Speed Operation
more than 1.6 km (1 mi).
Set the cold tire inflation pressure to
Remove the valve cap from the { WARNING 35 psi (241 kPa) for the front and
tire valve stem. Press the tire rear tires, when operating your
Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h
gauge firmly onto the valve to vehicle at high-speed conditions.
(100 mph) or higher, puts an
get a pressure measurement. When you end high-speed driving
additional strain on tires.
If the cold tire inflation pressure Sustained high-speed driving
return the tires to the cold inflation
matches the recommended pressure shown on the Tire and
causes excessive heat build up Loading Information label. See
pressure on the Tire and and can cause sudden tire failure.
Loading Information label, no Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑12
You could have a crash and you and Tire Pressure on page 10‑51.
further adjustment is necessary. or others could be killed. Some
If the inflation pressure is low, high-speed rated tires require
add air until you reach the (Continued)
recommended amount.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle Care 10-53
Tire Pressure Monitor pressure telltale when one or more The TPMS malfunction indicator is
of your tires is significantly combined with the low tire pressure
System under‐inflated. telltale. When the system detects a
The Tire Pressure Monitor System Accordingly, when the low tire malfunction, the telltale will flash for
(TPMS) uses radio and sensor pressure telltale illuminates, you approximately one minute and then
technology to check tire pressure should stop and check your tires as remain continuously illuminated.
levels. The TPMS sensors monitor soon as possible, and inflate them This sequence will continue upon
the air pressure in your tires and to the proper pressure. Driving on a subsequent vehicle start‐ups as
transmit tire pressure readings to a significantly under‐inflated tire long as the malfunction exists.
receiver located in the vehicle. causes the tire to overheat and can When the malfunction indicator is
Each tire, including the spare lead to tire failure. Under‐inflation illuminated, the system may not be
(if provided), should be checked also reduces fuel efficiency and tire able to detect or signal low tire
monthly when cold and inflated to tread life, and may affect the pressure as intended. TPMS
the inflation pressure recommended vehicle's handling and stopping malfunctions may occur for a variety
by the vehicle manufacturer on the ability. of reasons, including the installation
vehicle placard or tire inflation Please note that the TPMS is of replacement or alternate tires or
pressure label. (If your vehicle has not a substitute for proper tire wheels on the vehicle that prevent
tires of a different size than the size maintenance, and it is the driver's the TPMS from functioning properly.
indicated on the vehicle placard or responsibility to maintain correct tire Always check the TPMS malfunction
tire inflation pressure label, you pressure, even if under‐inflation has telltale after replacing one or more
should determine the proper tire not reached the level to trigger tires or wheels on your vehicle to
inflation pressure for those tires.) illumination of the TPMS low tire ensure that the replacement or
pressure telltale. alternate tires and wheels allow the
As an added safety feature, your
TPMS to continue to function
vehicle has been equipped with a Your vehicle has also been properly.
tire pressure monitoring system equipped with a TPMS malfunction
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire indicator to indicate when the See Tire Pressure Monitor
system is not operating properly. Operation on page 10‑54 for
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: additional information.

10-54 Vehicle Care
Federal Communications about the DIC operation and

Commission (FCC) and displays see Tire Messages on
Industry Canada page 5‑29.
See Radio Frequency Statement on The low tire pressure warning light
page 13‑19 for information may come on in cool weather when
regarding Part 15 of the Federal the vehicle is first started, and then
Communications Commission (FCC) When a low tire pressure condition turn off as the vehicle is driven. This
rules and Industry Canada is detected, the TPMS turns on the could be an early indicator that the
Standards RSS-210/220/310. low tire pressure warning light air pressure is getting low and
located on the instrument cluster. needs to be inflated to the proper
If the warning light comes on, stop pressure.
Tire Pressure Monitor as soon as possible and inflate the
Operation A Tire and Loading Information label
tires to the recommended pressure
shows the size of the original
This vehicle may have a Tire shown on the tire loading
equipment tires and the correct
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). information label. See Vehicle Load
inflation pressure for the tires when
The TPMS is designed to warn the Limits on page 9‑12.
they are cold. See Vehicle Load
driver when a low tire pressure A message to check the pressure in Limits on page 9‑12, for an example
condition exists. TPMS sensors are a specific tire displays in the Driver of the Tire and Loading Information
mounted onto each tire and wheel Information Center (DIC). The low label and its location. Also see Tire
assembly, excluding the spare tire tire pressure warning light and the Pressure on page 10‑51.
and wheel assembly. The TPMS DIC warning message come on at
sensors monitor the air pressure in The TPMS system can warn about
each ignition cycle until the tires are
the tires and transmits the tire a low tire pressure condition but it
inflated to the correct inflation
pressure readings to a receiver does not replace normal tire
pressure. Using the DIC, tire
located in the vehicle. maintenance. See Tire Inspection
pressure levels can be viewed. For
on page 10‑57, Tire Rotation on
additional information and details
page 10‑57 and Tires on
page 10‑42.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle Care 10-55
Notice: Tire sealant materials are TPMS Malfunction Light and

. The TPMS sensor matching
not all the same. A non-approved Message process was not done or not
tire sealant could damage the completed successfully after
TPMS sensors. TPMS sensor The TPMS will not function properly rotating the tires. The
damage caused by using an if one or more of the TPMS sensors malfunction light and the DIC
incorrect tire sealant is not are missing or inoperable. When the message should go off after
covered by the vehicle warranty. system detects a malfunction, the successfully completing the
Always use only the low tire pressure warning light sensor matching process. See
GM-approved tire sealant flashes for about one minute and "TPMS Sensor Matching
available through your dealer or then stays on for the remainder of Process" later in this section.
included in the vehicle. the ignition cycle. A DIC warning
message also displays. The
. One or more TPMS sensors are
Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kits malfunction light and DIC warning missing or damaged. The
use a GM approved liquid tire message come on at each ignition malfunction light and the DIC
sealant. Using non-approved tire cycle until the problem is corrected. message should go off when the
sealants could damage the TPMS Some of the conditions that can TPMS sensors are installed and
sensors. See Tire Sealant and cause these to come on are: the sensor matching process is
Compressor Kit on page 10‑67 for performed successfully. See
information regarding the inflator kit
. One of the road tires has been your dealer for service.
materials and instructions. replaced with the spare tire. The
spare tire does not have a
. Replacement tires or wheels do
TPMS sensor. The malfunction not match the original equipment
light and the DIC message tires or wheels. Tires and wheels
should go off after the road tire other than those recommended
is replaced and the sensor could prevent the TPMS from
matching process is performed functioning properly. See Buying
successfully. See "TPMS Sensor New Tires on page 10‑59.
Matching Process" later in this
section.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

10-56 Vehicle Care

. Operating electronic devices or using a TPMS relearn tool, in the 4. Start with the driver side front
being near facilities using radio following order: driver side front tire, tire. The driver side front turn
wave frequencies similar to the passenger side front tire, passenger signal also comes on to indicate
TPMS could cause the TPMS side rear tire, and driver side rear. that corner's sensor is ready to
sensors to malfunction. See your dealer for service or to be learned.
If the TPMS is not functioning purchase a relearn tool. 5. Place the relearn tool against
properly, it cannot detect or signal a There are two minutes to match the tire sidewall, near the valve
low tire condition. See your dealer the first tire/wheel position, and stem. Then press the button to
for service if the TPMS malfunction five minutes overall to match all activate the TPMS sensor.
light and DIC message come on four tire/wheel positions. If it takes A horn chirp confirms that the
and stay on. longer, the matching process stops sensor identification code has
TPMS Sensor Matching and must be restarted. been matched to this tire and
The TPMS matching process is: wheel position.
Process
1. Set the parking brake. 6. The passenger side front turn
Each TPMS sensor has a unique
signal comes on to indicate that
identification code. The identification 2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with corner sensor is ready to be
code needs to be matched to a new the engine off. learned. Proceed to the
tire/wheel position after rotating the
3. Press and hold the Remote passenger side front tire and
vehicle’s tires or replacing one or
Keyless Entry (RKE) repeat the procedure in Step 5.
more of the TPMS sensors. The
TPMS sensor matching process transmitter's LOCK and 7. The passenger side rear turn
should also be performed after UNLOCK buttons, at the same signal comes on to indicate that
replacing a spare tire with a road time, for about five seconds to corner sensor is ready to be
tire containing the TPMS sensor. start the TPMS learn mode. The learned. Proceed to the
The malfunction light and the DIC horn sounds twice indicating the passenger side rear tire and
message should go off at the next TPMS receiver is ready and in repeat the procedure in Step 5.
ignition cycle. The sensors are learn mode.
matched to the tire/wheel positions,
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle Care 10-57
8. The driver side rear turn signal Tire Inspection

. The tire has a bump, bulge,
comes on to indicate that corner or split.
sensor is ready to be learned. GM recommends that the tires,
including the spare tire, if the
. The tire has a puncture, cut,
Proceed to the driver side rear
tire, and repeat the procedure in vehicle has one, be inspected or other damage that cannot
Step 5. for signs of wear or damage at be repaired well because of
least once a month. the size or location of the
9. After hearing the single horn
damage.
chirp for the driver side rear tire, Replace the tire if:
two additional horn chirps sound
to indicate the tire learning . The indicators at three or Tire Rotation
process is done. Turn the more places around the tire Tires should be rotated every
ignition switch to LOCK/OFF. can be seen. 12 000 km (7,500 mi). See
If no tires are learned after . There is cord or fabric Scheduled Maintenance on
entering the TPMS learn mode, showing through the tire's page 11‑2.
or if communication with the rubber.
receiver stops, or if the time limit The purpose of a regular tire
has expired, turn the ignition . The tread or sidewall is rotation is to achieve a uniform
switch to LOCK/OFF and start cracked, cut, or snagged wear for all tires on the vehicle.
over beginning with Step 2. deep enough to show cord or This will ensure that the vehicle
10. Set all four tires to the fabric. continues to perform most like it
recommended air pressure did when the tires were new.
level as indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information label.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

10-58 Vehicle Care
Any time you notice unusual After the tires have been
wear, rotate the tires as soon as rotated, adjust the front and rear WARNING (Continued)
possible and check wheel inflation pressures as shown on changing a wheel, remove any
alignment. Also check for the Tire and Loading Information rust or dirt from places where the
damaged tires or wheels. See label. See Tire Pressure on wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
When It Is Time for New Tires page 10‑51 and Vehicle Load an emergency, use a cloth or a
on page 10‑59 and Wheel Limits on page 9‑12. paper towel to do this; but be sure
Replacement on page 10‑64. Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor to use a scraper or wire brush
System. See Tire Pressure later, if needed, to get all the rust
Monitor Operation on or dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flat
on page 10‑65.
page 10‑54.
Make certain that all wheel nuts
Lightly coat the center of the
are properly tightened. See
wheel hub with wheel bearing
“Wheel Nut Torque” under
grease after a wheel change or
Capacities and Specifications on
tire rotation to prevent corrosion
page 12‑2.
or rust build-up. Do not get
grease on the flat wheel
{ WARNING mounting surface or on the
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the wheel nuts or bolts.
When rotating the vehicle's tires, parts to which it is fastened, can
always use the correct rotation make wheel nuts become loose
pattern shown here. after time. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When
Do not include the compact
spare tire in the tire rotation. (Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle Care 10-59
When It Is Time for New The rubber in tires ages over time. at least a month, remove the tires or
This also applies for the spare tire, raise the vehicle to reduce the
Tires if the vehicle has one, even if it is weight from the tires.
Factors such as maintenance, never used. Multiple conditions
temperatures, driving speeds, including temperatures, loading Buying New Tires
vehicle loading, and road conditions conditions, and inflation pressure
affect the wear rate of the tires. maintenance affect how fast aging GM has developed and matched
takes place. Tires will typically need specific tires for the vehicle. The
to be replaced due to wear before original equipment tires installed
they may need to be replaced on the vehicle, when it was new,
due to age. Consult the tire were designed to meet General
manufacturer for more information Motors Tire Performance Criteria
on when tires should be replaced. Specification (TPC Spec)
Vehicle Storage system rating. If you need
replacement tires, GM strongly
Tires age when stored normally
mounted on a parked vehicle. Park
recommends that you get tires
a vehicle that will be stored for at with the same TPC Spec rating.
least a month in a cool, dry, clean This way, the vehicle will
area away from direct sunlight to continue to have tires that are
slow aging. This area should be free designed to give the same
Treadwear indicators are one way to of grease, gasoline, or other performance and vehicle safety,
tell when it is time for new tires. substances that can deteriorate
Treadwear indicators appear when
during normal use, as the
rubber. original tires.
the tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)
or less of tread remaining. See Tire Parking for an extended period can
Inspection on page 10‑57 and Tire cause flat spots on the tires that
Rotation on page 10‑57 for more may result in vibrations while
information. driving. When storing a vehicle for
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

10-60 Vehicle Care
GM's exclusive TPC Spec Tire Inspection on page 10‑57

system considers over a dozen and Tire Rotation on page 10‑57 WARNING (Continued)
critical specifications that impact for information on proper tire a crash. Using tires of different
the overall performance of rotation. sizes, brands, or types may
the vehicle, including brake also cause damage to the
system performance, ride and { WARNING vehicle. Be sure to use the
handling, traction control, and correct size, brand, and type
tire pressure monitoring Tires could explode during
improper service. Attempting to of tires on all wheels. It is all
performance. GM's TPC Spec right to drive with the compact
number is molded onto the tire's mount or dismount a tire could
cause injury or death. Only your spare temporarily, as it was
sidewall near the tire size. If the developed for use on the
dealer or authorized tire service
tires have an all‐season tread vehicle. See Compact Spare
center should mount or dismount
design, the TPC Spec number Tire on page 10‑83.
the tires.
will be followed by an MS for
mud and snow. See Tire
Sidewall Labeling on page 10‑44
for additional information. { WARNING { WARNING
GM recommends replacing tires Mixing tires could cause you Using bias-ply tires on the
in sets of four. This is because to lose control while driving. vehicle may cause the wheel
uniform tread depth on all tires If you mix tires of different rim flanges to develop cracks
will help keep the vehicle sizes, brands, or types (radial after many miles of driving.
performing most like it did when and bias-belted tires), the A tire and/or wheel could fail
the tires were new. Replacing vehicle may not handle suddenly and cause a crash.
less than a full set of tires can properly, and you could have Use only radial-ply tires with
affect the braking and handling (Continued) the wheels on the vehicle.
performance of the vehicle. See I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle Care 10-61
If you must replace the vehicle's The vehicle's original equipment

tires with those that do not have tires are listed on the Tire and { WARNING
a TPC Spec number, make sure Loading Information label. See If different sized wheels are used,
they are the same size, load Vehicle Load Limits on there may not be an acceptable
range, speed rating, and page 9‑12 for more information level of performance and safety if
construction type (radial and about the Tire and Loading tires not recommended for those
bias‐belted tires) as the vehicle's Information label and its location wheels are selected. This
original tires. on the vehicle. increases the chance of a crash
Vehicles that have a tire and serious injury. Only use GM
pressure monitoring system Different Size Tires and specific wheel and tire systems
Wheels developed for the vehicle, and
could give an inaccurate
have them properly installed by a
low‐pressure warning if non‐TPC If wheels or tires are installed that GM certified technician.
Spec rated tires are installed on are a different size than the original
the vehicle. Non‐TPC Spec equipment wheels and tires, vehicle
rated tires may give a performance, including its braking, See Buying New Tires on
low‐pressure warning that is ride and handling characteristics, page 10‑59 and Accessories and
stability, and resistance to rollover Modifications on page 10‑3 for
higher or lower than the proper
may be affected. If the vehicle has additional information.
warning level you would get with
electronic systems such as antilock
TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire brakes, rollover airbags, traction
Pressure Monitor System on control, and electronic stability
page 10‑53. control, the performance of these
systems can also be affected.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

10-62 Vehicle Care
Uniform Tire Quality to deep tread, winter-type snow Treadwear

Grading tires, space-saver, or temporary The treadwear grade is a
use spare tires, tires with comparative rating based on the
Quality grades can be found nominal rim diameters of
where applicable on the tire wear rate of the tire when tested
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), under controlled conditions on a
sidewall between tread shoulder or to some limited-production
and maximum section width. For specified government test
tires. course. For example, a tire
example:
While the tires available on graded 150 would wear one and
Treadwear 200 Traction AA General Motors passenger cars a half (1½) times as well on the
Temperature A and light trucks may vary with government course as a tire
The following information relates respect to these grades, they graded 100. The relative
to the system developed by the must also conform to federal performance of tires depends
United States National Highway safety requirements and upon the actual conditions of
Traffic Safety Administration additional General Motors Tire their use, however, and may
(NHTSA), which grades tires by Performance Criteria (TPC) depart significantly from the
treadwear, traction, and standards. norm due to variations in driving
temperature performance. This All Passenger Car Tires Must habits, service practices
applies only to vehicles sold in Conform to Federal Safety and differences in road
the United States. The grades Requirements In Addition To characteristics and climate.
are molded on the sidewalls of These Grades.
most passenger car tires. The
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
(UTQG) system does not apply
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle Care 10-63
Traction – AA, A, B, C conditions on a specified indoor Wheel Alignment and Tire

The traction grades, from laboratory test wheel. Sustained Balance
highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate The tires and wheels were aligned
and C. Those grades represent and balanced at the factory to
the tire's ability to stop on wet and reduce tire life, and
provide the longest tire life and best
pavement as measured under excessive temperature can lead overall performance. Adjustments to
controlled conditions on to sudden tire failure. The grade wheel alignment and tire balancing
specified government test C corresponds to a level of will not be necessary on a regular
surfaces of asphalt and performance which all basis. However, check the
concrete. A tire marked C may passenger car tires must meet alignment if there is unusual tire
have poor traction performance. under the Federal Motor Safety wear or if the vehicle is pulling to
Standard No. 109. Grades B and one side or the other. If the vehicle
Warning: The traction grade vibrates when driving on a smooth
assigned to this tire is based on A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory road, the tires and wheels might
straight-ahead braking traction need to be rebalanced. See your
tests, and does not include test wheel than the minimum
dealer for proper diagnosis.
acceleration, cornering, required by law. Warning: The
hydroplaning, or peak traction temperature grade for this tire is
characteristics. established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not
Temperature – A, B, C overloaded. Excessive speed,
The temperature grades are A underinflation, or excessive
(the highest), B, and C, loading, either separately or in
representing the tire's resistance combination, can cause heat
to the generation of heat and its buildup and possible tire failure.
ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

10-64 Vehicle Care
Wheel Replacement Used Replacement Wheels

{ WARNING
Replace any wheel that is bent,
cracked, or badly rusted or Using the wrong replacement { WARNING
corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel
Replacing a wheel with a used
loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and nuts can be dangerous. It could
one is dangerous. How it has
wheel nuts should be replaced. affect the braking and handling of
If the wheel leaks air, replace it. been used or how far it has been
the vehicle. Tires can lose air,
Some aluminum wheels can be driven may be unknown. It could
and cause loss of control, causing
repaired. See your dealer if any of fail suddenly and cause a crash.
a crash. Always use the correct
these conditions exist. When replacing wheels, use a
wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel
new GM original equipment
Your dealer will know the kind of nuts for replacement.
wheel.
wheel that is needed.
Each new wheel should have the Notice: The wrong wheel can
same load-carrying capacity, also cause problems with bearing
diameter, width, offset, and be life, brake cooling, speedometer
mounted the same way as the or odometer calibration,
one it replaces. headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire
Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheel
or tire chain clearance to the
nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor
body and chassis.
System (TPMS) sensors with new
GM original equipment parts. See If a Tire Goes Flat on
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle Care 10-65
Tire Chains WARNING (Continued)

If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout,
{ WARNING Use another type of traction
especially if the tires are maintained
properly. See Tires. If air goes out of
Do not use tire chains. There is device only if its manufacturer a tire, it is much more likely to leak
not enough clearance. Tire chains recommends it for use on the out slowly. But if there is ever a
used on a vehicle without the vehicle and tire size combination blowout, here are a few tips about
proper amount of clearance can and road conditions. Follow that what to expect and what to do:
cause damage to the brakes, manufacturer's instructions. To
If a front tire fails, the flat tire
suspension or other vehicle parts. help avoid damage to the vehicle,
creates a drag that pulls the vehicle
The area damaged by the tire drive slowly, readjust or remove
toward that side. Take your foot off
chains could cause you to lose the device if it is contacting the the accelerator pedal and grip the
control of the vehicle and you or vehicle, and do not spin the steering wheel firmly. Steer to
others may be injured in a crash. vehicle's wheels. If you do find maintain lane position, and then
(Continued) traction devices that will fit, install gently brake to a stop, well off the
them on the front tires. road, if possible.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

10-66 Vehicle Care
AA rear blowout, particularly on a

curve, acts much like a skid and { WARNING { WARNING
may require the same correction as
used in a skid. Stop pressing the Lifting a vehicle and getting Changing a tire can be
accelerator pedal and steer to under it to do maintenance or dangerous. The vehicle can slip
straighten the vehicle. It may be repairs is dangerous without the off the jack and roll over or fall
very bumpy and noisy. Gently brake appropriate safety equipment and causing injury or death. Find a
to a stop, well off the road, training. If a jack is provided with level place to change the tire. To
if possible. the vehicle, it is designed only for help prevent the vehicle from
changing a flat tire. If it is used for moving:
{ WARNING anything else, you or others could
be badly injured or killed if the
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
Driving on a flat tire will cause vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack 2. Put an automatic
permanent damage to the tire. is provided with the vehicle, only transmission shift lever in
Re-inflating a tire after it has use it for changing a flat tire. P (Park), or shift a manual
transmission to 1 (First) or
been driven on while severely
R (Reverse).
underinflated or flat may cause a If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
blowout and a serious crash. 3. Turn off the engine and do
and wheel damage by driving slowly
Never attempt to re-inflate a tire not restart while the vehicle
to a level place, well off the road,
that has been driven on while is raised.
if possible. Turn on the hazard
severely underinflated or flat. warning flashers. See Hazard 4. Do not allow passengers to
Have your dealer or an authorized Warning Flashers on page 6‑4. remain in the vehicle.
tire service center repair or 5. Place wheel blocks on both
replace the flat tire as soon as sides of the tire at the
possible. opposite corner of the tire
being changed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle Care 10-67
This vehicle may come with a jack Tire Sealant and

and spare tire or a tire sealant and
compressor kit. To use the jacking
Compressor Kit
equipment to change a spare tire
safely, follow the instructions below. { WARNING
Then see Tire Changing on
page 10‑75. To use the tire sealant Idling a vehicle in an enclosed
and compressor kit, see Tire area with poor ventilation is
Sealant and Compressor Kit on dangerous. Engine exhaust may
page 10‑67. A. Wheel Block enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust
B. Flat Tire contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),
which cannot be seen or smelled.
use the following example as a The following information explains
guide to assist you in the placement It can cause unconsciousness
how to repair or change a tire. and even death. Never run the
of wheel blocks (A).
engine in an enclosed area that
has no fresh air ventilation. For
more information, see Engine
Exhaust on page 9‑22.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

10-68 Vehicle Care
If this vehicle has a tire sealant and The kit includes:

{ WARNING compressor kit, there may not be a
spare tire, tire changing equipment,
Overinflating a tire could cause and on some vehicles there may not
the tire to rupture and you or be a place to store a tire.
others could be injured. Be sure
to read and follow the tire sealant The tire sealant and compressor
and compressor kit instructions can be used to temporarily seal
and inflate the tire to its punctures up to 6 mm (¼ in) in the
tread area of the tire. It can also be
recommended pressure. Do not
used to inflate an under inflated tire.
exceed the recommended
pressure. If the tire has been separated from
the wheel, has damaged sidewalls,
or has a large puncture, the tire is
too severely damaged for the tire
{ WARNING sealant and compressor kit to be
A. On/Off Button
effective. See Roadside Assistance B. Selector Switch (Sealant/Air or
Storing the tire sealant and Program (U.S. and Canada) on Air Only)
compressor kit or other page 13‑8 or Roadside Assistance C. Pressure Relief Button
equipment in the passenger Program (Mexico) on page 13‑10.
compartment of the vehicle could D. Pressure Gauge
Read and follow all of the tire
cause injury. In a sudden stop or E. Air Only Hose (Black)
sealant and compressor kit
collision, loose equipment could instructions.
strike someone. Store the tire F. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear)
sealant and compressor kit in its G. Power Plug
original location.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle Care 10-69
Tire Sealant Using the Tire Sealant and If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
Compressor Kit to Temporarily and wheel damage by driving slowly
Read and follow the safe handling
Seal and Inflate a to a level place. Turn on the hazard
instructions on the label adhered to
Punctured Tire warning flashers. See Hazard
the compressor.
Warning Flashers on page 6‑4.
Check the tire sealant expiration Follow the directions closely for
correct sealant usage. See If a Tire Goes Flat on
date on the sealant canister. The
page 10‑65 for other important
sealant canister should be replaced
safety warnings.
before its expiration date.
Replacement sealant canisters are Do not remove any objects that
available at your local dealer. See have penetrated the tire.
“Removal and Installation of the 1. Remove the tire sealant and
Sealant Canister” following. compressor kit from its storage
There is only enough sealant to seal location. See Storing the Tire
one tire. After usage, the sealant Sealant and Compressor Kit on
canister and sealant/air hose page 10‑74.
assembly must be replaced. See 2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (F)
“Removal and Installation of the and the power plug (G).
Sealant Canister” following.
3. Place the kit on the ground.
When using the tire sealant and Make sure the tire valve stem is
compressor kit during cold positioned close to the ground
temperatures, warm the kit in a so the hose will reach it.
heated environment for five minutes.
4. Remove the valve stem cap from
This will help to inflate the tire
the flat tire by turning it
faster.
counterclockwise.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

10-70 Vehicle Care
5. Attach the sealant/air hose (F) 9. Press the on/off (A) button to The pressure gauge (D) may
onto the tire valve stem. Turn it turn the tire sealant and read higher than the actual tire
clockwise until it is tight. compressor kit on. pressure while the compressor
6. Plug the power plug (G) into the The compressor will inject is on. Turn the compressor off
accessory power outlet in the sealant and air into the tire. to get an accurate pressure
vehicle. Unplug all items from reading. The compressor may
The pressure gauge (D) will be turned on/off until the
other accessory power outlets. initially show a high pressure
See Power Outlets on page 5‑7. correct pressure is reached.
while the compressor pushes the
If the vehicle has an accessory sealant into the tire. Once the Notice: If the recommended
power outlet, do not use the sealant is completely dispersed pressure cannot be reached after
cigarette lighter. into the tire, the pressure will approximately 25 minutes, the
quickly drop and start to rise vehicle should not be driven
If the vehicle only has a cigarette farther. The tire is too severely
lighter, use the cigarette lighter. again as the tire inflates with
air only. damaged and the tire sealant and
Do not pinch the power plug compressor kit cannot inflate the
cord in the door or window. 10. Inflate the tire to the tire. Remove the power plug from
recommended inflation the accessory power outlet and
7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle pressure using the pressure unscrew the inflating hose from
must be running while using the gauge (D). The recommended the tire valve. See Roadside
air compressor. inflation pressure can be found Assistance Program (U.S. and
8. Turn the selector switch (B) on the Tire and Loading Canada) on page 13‑8 or
clockwise to the Sealant + Air Information label. See Tire Roadside Assistance Program
position. Pressure on page 10‑51. (Mexico) on page 13‑10.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle Care 10-71
11. Press the on/off button (A) to 15. Return the sealant/air hose (F) 19. Stop at a safe location and
turn the tire sealant and and the power plug (G) back in check the tire pressure. Refer
compressor kit off. their original locations. to Steps 1 through 11 under
The tire is not sealed and will “Using the Tire Sealant and
continue to leak air until the Compressor Kit without Sealant
vehicle is driven and the to Inflate a Tire (Not
sealant is distributed in the tire; Punctured).”
therefore, Steps 12 through If the tire pressure has fallen
18 must be done immediately more than 68 kPa (10 psi)
after Step 11. below the recommended
16. If the flat tire was able to inflate inflation pressure, stop driving
Be careful while handling the
to the recommended inflation the vehicle. The tire is too
tire sealant and compressor kit
pressure, remove the severely damaged and the tire
as it could be warm after
maximum speed label from the sealant cannot seal the tire.
usage.
sealant canister and place it in See Roadside Assistance
12. Unplug the power plug (G) from a highly visible location. Do not Program (U.S. and Canada) on
the accessory power outlet in exceed the speed on this label page 13‑8 or Roadside
the vehicle. until the damaged tire is Assistance Program (Mexico)
13. Turn the sealant/air hose (F) repaired or replaced. on page 13‑10.
counterclockwise to remove it 17. Return the equipment to its If the tire pressure has not
from the tire valve stem. original storage location in the dropped more than 68 kPa
14. Replace the tire valve vehicle. (10 psi) from the recommended
stem cap. 18. Immediately drive the vehicle inflation pressure, use the
8 km (5 mi) to distribute the compressor kit to inflate the tire
sealant in the tire. to the recommended inflation
pressure.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

10-72 Vehicle Care
20. Wipe off any sealant from the Using the Tire Sealant and See If a Tire Goes Flat on
wheel, tire, and vehicle. Compressor Kit without page 10‑65 for other important
21. Dispose of the used sealant Sealant to Inflate a Tire safety warnings.
canister and sealant/air (Not Punctured) 1. Remove the tire sealant and
hose (F) assembly at a local To use the air compressor to inflate compressor kit from its storage
dealer or in accordance with a tire with air only and not sealant: location. See Storing the Tire
local state codes and practices. Sealant and Compressor Kit on
22. Replace it with a new canister page 10‑74.
available from your dealer. 2. Unwrap the air only hose (E)
23. After temporarily sealing a tire and the power plug (G).
using the tire sealant and 3. Place the kit on the ground.
compressor kit, take the Make sure the tire valve stem is
vehicle to an authorized dealer positioned close to the ground
within 161 km (100 mi) of so the hose will reach it.
driving to have the tire repaired
or replaced. 4. Remove the tire valve stem cap
from the flat tire by turning it
counterclockwise.
5. Attach the air only hose (E) onto
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire the tire valve stem by turning it
and wheel damage by driving slowly clockwise until it is tight.
to a level place. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 6‑4.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle Care 10-73
6. Plug the power plug (G) into the 10. Inflate the tire to the 11. Press the on/off button (A) to
accessory power outlet in the recommended inflation turn the tire sealant and
vehicle. Unplug all items from pressure using the pressure compressor kit off.
other accessory power outlets. gauge (D). The recommended Be careful while handling the
See Power Outlets on page 5‑7. inflation pressure can be found tire sealant and compressor kit
If the vehicle has an accessory on the Tire and Loading as it could be warm after
power outlet, do not use the Information label. See Tire usage.
cigarette lighter. Pressure on page 10‑51.
12. Unplug the power plug (G) from
If the vehicle only has a cigarette The pressure gauge (D) may the accessory power outlet in
lighter, use the cigarette lighter. read higher than the actual tire the vehicle.
pressure while the compressor
Do not pinch the power plug is on. Turn the compressor off 13. Disconnect the air only
cord in the door or window. to get an accurate reading. The hose (E) from the tire
7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle compressor may be turned on/ valve stem, by turning it
must be running while using the off until the correct pressure is counterclockwise, and replace
air compressor. reached. If the tire is inflated the tire valve stem cap.
higher than the recommended 14. Return the air only hose (E)
8. Turn the selector switch (B) pressure, press the pressure
counterclockwise to the Air Only and the power plug (G) back to
relief button (C), if equipped, their original locations.
position. until the proper pressure
9. Press the on/off (A) button to reading is reached. This option 15. Return the equipment to its
turn the compressor on. is only functional when using original storage location in the
the air only hose (E). vehicle.
The compressor will inflate the
tire with air only.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

10-74 Vehicle Care
Removal and Installation of the 4. Replace with a new canister

Sealant Canister which is available from your
dealer.
To remove the sealant canister:
5. Push the new canister into
place.
6. Screw the connector (B) to the
canister (A).
7. Slide the plastic cover back on.
Storing the Tire Sealant

and Compressor Kit
3. Turn the retainer clockwise and
The tire sealant and compressor kit remove the tire sealant and
is located in the trunk. compressor kit.
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on To store the tire sealant and
1. Remove the plastic cover. page 2‑9. compressor kit, reverse the steps.
2. Unscrew the connector (B) from 2. Lift the cover.
the canister (A).
3. Pull up on the canister (A) to
remove it.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle Care 10-75
Tire Changing 4. Remove the wing nut holding the

jack in place.
Removing the Spare Tire and 5. Remove the jack and wheel
Tools wrench from the trunk.
The equipment you will need is in
the trunk. Tire Changing Tools
2. Remove the spare tire cover.
1. Turn the wing nut

counterclockwise to loosen
wheel wrench.
2. Unhook the wheel wrench from
the jack.
The tools you will be using include

the wheel wrench (A) and jack (B).
3. Turn the wing nut

counterclockwise and remove it.
Then remove the compact spare
tire. See Compact Spare Tire on
page 10‑83 for more information. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

10-76 Vehicle Care
Removing the Flat Tire and

Installing the Spare Tire
1. Do a safety check before
proceeding. See If a Tire Goes
Flat on page 10‑65.
2. If the vehicle has a wheel cover
or hubcap that has plastic wheel
nut caps, loosen the plastic nut
caps. You might need to use the
wheel wrench to loosen them.
Do not pry off wheel covers or
center caps that have plastic
3. Extend the handle on the wheel 4. Use the wrench to loosen all the
wheel nut caps.
wrench by pressing the button wheel nuts. Do not remove
and pulling on the end of the 3. Remove the wheel cover or them yet.
wrench. You must do this before center cap from the wheel to
using the wheel wrench. locate the wheel nuts.
If the vehicle has a wheel cover
or hubcap without plastic wheel
nut caps, gently pry on the edge
of the plastic wheel trim to
remove it from the wheel to
locate the wheel nuts.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle Care 10-77
{ WARNING
Getting under a vehicle when it is
jacked up is dangerous. If the
vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed.
Never get under a vehicle when it
is supported only by a jack.
{ WARNING
5. Position the lift head at the jack 7. Raise the vehicle by turning the
location nearest the flat tire. Raising the vehicle with the jack wrench clockwise. Raise the
Make sure all of the jack lift improperly positioned can vehicle far enough off the
head is touching the jacking damage the vehicle and even ground so there is enough room
flange under the body. Do not make the vehicle fall. To help for the compact spare tire to fit.
place the jack under a body avoid personal injury and vehicle
panel. damage, be sure to fit the jack lift
6. Put the compact spare tire near head into the proper location
the flat tire. before raising the vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

10-78 Vehicle Care
11. Install the compact spare tire.

WARNING (Continued)
an emergency, use a cloth or a { WARNING
paper towel to do this; but be sure Never use oil or grease on bolts
to use a scraper or wire brush or nuts because the nuts might
later, if needed, to get all the rust come loose. The vehicle's wheel
or dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flat could fall off, causing a crash.
on page 10‑65.
12. Put the wheel nuts back on

with the rounded end toward
the wheel. Tighten each nut by
8. Remove all of the wheel nuts. hand or with the wrench until
9. Remove the flat tire. the wheel is held against
the hub.
{ WARNING
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
parts to which it is fastened, can
make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When
changing a wheel, remove any 10. Remove any rust or dirt from
rust or dirt from places where the the wheel bolts, mounting
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In surfaces and spare wheel.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle Care 10-79
WARNING (Continued)
aftermarket manufacturer when
using accessory locking wheel
nuts. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 12‑2 for
original equipment wheel nut
torque specifications.
Notice: Improperly tightened

wheel nuts can lead to brake
13. Lower the vehicle by turning pulsation and rotor damage. To 14. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in
the wrench counterclockwise. avoid expensive brake repairs, a crisscross sequence, as
Lower the jack completely. evenly tighten the wheel nuts in shown, with the wheel wrench.
the proper sequence and to the
proper torque specification. See Notice: Wheel covers will not fit
{ WARNING Capacities and Specifications on on the vehicle's compact spare.
page 12‑2 for the wheel nut If you try to put a wheel cover on
Wheel nuts that are improperly or the compact spare, the cover or
incorrectly tightened can cause torque specification.
the spare could be damaged.
the wheels to become loose or
come off. The wheel nuts should Do not try to put a wheel cover on
your compact spare tire. It will not
be tightened with a torque wrench
fit. Store the wheel cover and wheel
to the proper torque specification
nut caps in the trunk until you have
after replacing. Follow the torque
the flat tire repaired or replaced.
specification supplied by the
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

10-80 Vehicle Care
Storing a Flat Tire and Tools
{ WARNING
Storing a jack, a tire, or other
equipment in the passenger
compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or
collision, loose equipment could
strike someone. Store all these in
the proper place.
To store the flat tire and jack in the 3. Collapse the wrench using the 5. Raise the jack to the height
compact spare tire compartment: same button used to extend it. shown and lock the wrench onto
4. Attach the wrench to the jack by the jack.
page 2‑9. placing the tab on the wrench
into the hole on the side of the
2. Remove the bolt extension (in jack. Then place the wrench
the yellow sleeve) from the jack handle over the tab on the side
and remove the center cap from of the jack.
the wheel.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle Care 10-81
7. With the valve stem up, place

the tire on the compartment floor
with the rear of the tire under the
trim panel. The tire may not lay
completely flat.
8. Line up the bolt with the wheel
center.
9. With the yellow cap in place to
prevent the wheel from being
scratched, screw the bolt
extension onto the bolt through
the wheel center hole.
6. Place the jack over the bolt (A) A. Cover
on the floor, making sure it 10. Remove the yellow cap from
B. Wing Nut
contacts the bolt. Thread the the bolt extension.
jack retainer nut until it contacts C. Extension
11. Secure the tire and wheel with
the jack. the larger wing nut. D. Flat Tire (valve stem up)
E. Nut
F. Jack
G. Bolt
The compact spare is for temporary
use only. Replace the compact
spare tire with a full-size tire as
soon as you can. See Compact
Spare Tire on page 10‑83.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

10-82 Vehicle Care
Storing the Spare Tire and

Tools
{ WARNING
Storing a jack, a tire, or other
equipment in the passenger
compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or
collision, loose equipment could
strike someone. Store all these in
the proper place.
2. Collapse the wrench using the 4. Raise the jack to the height
same button used to extend it. shown and lock the wrench onto
3. Attach the wrench to the jack by the jack.
page 2‑9.
placing the tab on the wrench 5. Place the jack in the spare tire
into the hole on the side of the well. Make sure the stow bolt
jack. Then place the wrench goes through the hole in the
handle over the tab on the side center of the wrench on the jack,
of the jack. with the base of the jack towards
the front of the vehicle. Turn the
jack retainer nut until it firmly
contacts the wrench. Do not
over tighten.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle Care 10-83
6. Place the compact spare into the If this vehicle has a compact spare Notice: When the compact spare
tire compartment with the stow tire it was fully inflated when the is installed, do not take the
bolt going through the center vehicle was new, however, it can vehicle through an automatic car
hole of the wheel. lose air after a time. Check the wash with guide rails. The
7. Turn the spare tire retainer nut inflation pressure regularly. It should compact spare can get caught on
until it firmly contacts the wheel. be 60 psi (420 kPa). the rails which can damage the
Do not over tighten. After installing the compact spare tire, wheel and other parts of the
on the vehicle, stop as soon as vehicle.
Compact Spare Tire possible and make sure the spare Do not use the compact spare on
tire is correctly inflated. The other vehicles.
compact spare is made to perform
{ WARNING well at speeds up to 65 mph
Do not mix the compact spare tire or
wheel with other wheels or tires.
Driving with more than one (105 km/h) for distances up to They will not fit. Keep the spare tire
compact spare tire at a time could 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can and its wheel together.
result in loss of braking and finish your trip and have the full-size
tire repaired or replaced at your Notice: Tire chains will not fit the
handling. This could lead to a compact spare. Using them can
convenience. Of course, it is best to
crash and you or others could be damage the vehicle and can
replace the spare with a full-size tire
injured. Use only one compact as soon as possible. The spare tire damage the chains too. Do not
spare tire at a time. will last longer and be in good use tire chains on the compact
shape in case it is needed again. spare.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

10-84 Vehicle Care
Jump Starting Notice: Ignoring these steps

could result in costly damage to
vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical
For more information about the the vehicle that would not be systems.
vehicle battery, see Battery on covered by the warranty. To avoid the possibility of the
page 10‑26.
Trying to start the vehicle by vehicles rolling, set the parking
If the battery has run down, you pushing or pulling it will not brake firmly on both vehicles
may want to use another vehicle work, and it could damage the involved in the jump start
and some jumper cables to start vehicle. procedure. Put an automatic
your vehicle. Be sure to use the transmission in P (Park) or a
1. Check the other vehicle. It must
following steps to do it safely. manual transmission in
have a 12-volt battery with a
negative ground system. N (Neutral) before setting the
{ WARNING Notice: Only use a vehicle that
parking brake.
has a 12-volt system with a Notice: If the radio or other

Batteries can hurt you. They can accessories are left on during the
be dangerous because: negative ground for jump
starting. If the other vehicle does jump starting procedure, they
. They contain acid that can not have a 12-volt system with a could be damaged. The repairs
burn you. negative ground, both vehicles would not be covered by the
can be damaged. warranty. Always turn off the
. They contain gas that can
radio and other accessories when
explode or ignite. 2. Get the vehicles close enough jump starting the vehicle.
. They contain enough so the jumper cables can reach,
but be sure the vehicles are 3. Turn off the ignition on both
electricity to burn you.
not touching each other. If they vehicles. Unplug unnecessary
If you do not follow these steps are, it could cause a ground accessories plugged into the
exactly, some or all of these connection you do not want. You cigarette lighter or the accessory
things can hurt you. would not be able to start your power outlet. Turn off the radio
and all lamps that are not
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle Care 10-85
needed. This will avoid sparks

and help save both batteries. { WARNING { WARNING
And it could save the radio!
Using a match near a battery can Fans or other moving engine
4. Open the hoods and locate the cause battery gas to explode. parts can injure you badly. Keep
batteries. Find the positive (+) People have been hurt doing this, your hands away from moving
and negative (−) terminal and some have been blinded. parts once the engine is running.
locations on each vehicle. Your Use a flashlight if you need more
vehicle's positive (+) terminal light.
and negative (–) terminal are 5. Check that the jumper cables do
located under a black cover on Be sure the battery has enough not have loose or missing
the battery. See Engine water. You do not need to add insulation. If they do, you could
Compartment Overview on water to the battery installed in get a shock. The vehicles could
page 10‑6 for more information your new vehicle. But if a battery be damaged too.
on location. Remove the cover has filler caps, be sure the right Before you connect the cables,
to access the positive (+) and amount of fluid is there. If it is low, here are some things you should
negative (–) terminals. add water to take care of that know. Positive (+) will go to
first. If you don't, explosive gas positive (+) or to a remote
{ WARNING could be present. positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
has one. Negative (−) will go to a
An electric fan can start up even Battery fluid contains acid that
heavy, unpainted metal engine
when the engine is not running can burn you. Do not get it on part or to a remote negative (−)
and can injure you. Keep hands, you. If you accidentally get it in terminal if the vehicle has one.
clothing and tools away from any your eyes or on your skin, flush
underhood electric fan. the place with water and get
medical help immediately.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

10-86 Vehicle Care
Do not connect positive (+) to 7. Do not let the other end touch 9. Connect the other end of the
negative (−) or you will get a metal. Connect it to the negative (−) cable at least
short that would damage the positive (+) terminal of the 18 inches (45 cm) away from the
battery and maybe other parts good battery. Use a remote dead battery, but not near
too. And do not connect the positive (+) terminal if the vehicle engine parts that move. The
negative (−) cable to the has one. electrical connection is just as
negative (−) terminal on the dead 8. Now connect the black good there, and the chance of
battery because this can cause negative (−) cable to the sparks getting back to the
sparks. negative (−) terminal of the good battery is much less.
battery. Use a remote 10. Now start the vehicle with the
negative (−) terminal if the good battery and run the
vehicle has one. engine for a while.
Do not let the other end touch 11. Try to start the vehicle that had
anything until the next step. The the dead battery. If it will not
other end of the negative (−) start after a few tries, it
cable does not go to the dead probably needs service.
battery. It goes to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or
to a remote negative (−) terminal
on the vehicle with the dead
battery.
6. Connect the red positive (+)
cable to the positive (+) terminal
of the dead battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the
vehicle has one.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle Care 10-87
Notice: If the jumper cables are To disconnect the jumper cables

connected or removed in the from both vehicles, do the following:
wrong order, electrical shorting 1. Disconnect the black
may occur and damage the negative (−) cable from the
vehicle. The repairs would not be vehicle that had the dead
covered by the vehicle warranty. battery.
Always connect and remove the
jumper cables in the correct 2. Disconnect the black
order, making sure that the negative (−) cable from the
cables do not touch each other or vehicle with the good battery.
other metal. 3. Disconnect the red positive (+)
cable from the vehicle with the
Jumper Cable Removal good battery.
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine 4. Disconnect the red positive (+)
Part or Remote Negative (–) cable from the other vehicle.
Terminal 5. Return the caps over the
B. Good Battery or Remote positive (+) and negative (−)
Positive (+) and Remote terminals to their original
Negative (–) Terminals positions.
C. Dead Battery or Remote
Positive (+) Terminal
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

10-88 Vehicle Care
Towing To tow the vehicle behind another

vehicle for recreational purposes,
Here are some important things to
consider before recreational vehicle
such as behind a motor home, see towing:
Towing the Vehicle “Recreational Vehicle Towing” in this . What's the towing capacity of the
Notice: To avoid damage, the section. towing vehicle? Be sure to read
disabled vehicle should be towed the tow vehicle manufacturer's
with all four wheels off the Recreational Vehicle recommendations.
ground. Care must be taken with Towing
vehicles that have low ground
. How far will the vehicle be
clearance and/or special Recreational vehicle towing means towed? Some vehicles have
equipment. Always flatbed on a towing the vehicle behind another restrictions on how far and how
car carrier. vehicle – such as behind a motor long they can tow.
home. The two most common types . Does the vehicle have the
Consult your dealer or a of recreational vehicle towing are
professional towing service if the proper towing equipment? See
known as dinghy towing and dolly your dealer or trailering
disabled vehicle must be towed. towing. Dinghy towing is towing the
See Roadside Assistance Program professional for additional
vehicle with all four wheels on the advice and equipment
(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑8 or ground. Dolly towing is towing the
Roadside Assistance Program recommendations.
vehicle with two wheels on the
(Mexico) on page 13‑10. ground and two wheels up on a
. Is the vehicle ready to be
device known as a dolly. towed? Just as preparing the
vehicle for a long trip, make sure
the vehicle is prepared to be
towed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle Care 10-89
Dinghy Towing 2. Shift the transmission to P (Park)

and turn the ignition to
When dinghy towing, the vehicle
LOCK/OFF.
should be run at the beginning of
each day and at each RV fuel stop 3. Set the parking brake.
for about five minutes. This will 4. To prevent the battery from
ensure proper lubrication of draining while the vehicle is
transmission components. being towed, remove the
following fuse from the
instrument panel fuse block:
(IGN SENSOR). See Instrument
Panel Fuse Block on page 10‑38
for more information.
Notice: Towing the vehicle from
5. Turn the ignition to ACC/ the rear could damage it. Also,
ACCESSORY. repairs would not be covered by
6. Shift the transmission to the vehicle warranty. Never have
N (Neutral). the vehicle towed from the rear.
7. Release the parking brake.

Remember to reinstall the IGN
SENSOR fuse once the destination
To dinghy tow the vehicle from the has been reached.
front with all four wheels on the
ground: Notice: If 105 km/h (65 mph) is
exceeded while towing the
1. Position the vehicle to tow and vehicle, it could be damaged.
then secure it to the towing Never exceed 105 km/h (65 mph)
vehicle. while towing the vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

10-90 Vehicle Care
Dolly Towing 5. Secure the vehicle to the dolly. Appearance Care

6. Release the parking brake.
Exterior Care
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/
Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a
soft cloth, and a car washing soap
to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under “Washing
the Vehicle” later in this section.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing
Tow the vehicle with the two rear of the vehicle by hand may be
wheels on the ground and the front Notice: Towing the vehicle from necessary to remove residue from
wheels on a dolly: the rear could damage it. Also, the paint finish. Approved cleaning
To tow the vehicle with two wheels repairs would not be covered by products can be obtained from your
on the ground and a dolly: the vehicle warranty. Never have dealer.
the vehicle towed from the rear.
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly. If the vehicle has a basecoat/
clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoat
2. Put the gear shift lever in gives more depth and gloss to the
P (Park). colored basecoat. Always use
3. Set the parking brake. waxes and polishes that are
4. Remove the key from the non-abrasive and made for a
ignition. basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle Care 10-91
Notice: Machine compounding or Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Approved cleaning products can
aggressive polishing on a Parts be obtained from your dealer.
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish Bright metal parts should be Follow all manufacturer
may damage it. Use only cleaned regularly to keep their directions regarding correct
non-abrasive waxes and polishes luster. Wash with water or use product usage, necessary safety
that are made for a basecoat/ chrome polish on chrome or precautions, and appropriate
clearcoat paint finish on the stainless steel trim, if necessary. disposal of any vehicle care
vehicle. product. Certain cleaners contain
Use special care with aluminum chemicals that can damage the
Foreign materials such as calcium trim. To avoid damaging protective
chloride and other salts, ice melting emblems or nameplates on the
trim, never use auto or chrome vehicle. Check the cleaning
agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, polish, steam, or caustic soap to
bird droppings, chemicals from product label. If it states that it
clean aluminum. A coating of wax, should not be used on plastic
industrial chimneys, etc., can rubbed to high polish, is
damage the vehicle's finish if they parts, do not use it on the vehicle
recommended for all bright metal or damage may occur and it
remain on painted surfaces. Wash parts.
the vehicle as soon as possible. would not be covered by the
warranty.
If necessary, use non-abrasive Washing the Vehicle
cleaners that are marked safe for Rinse the vehicle well, before
To preserve the vehicle's finish,
painted surfaces to remove foreign washing and after, to remove all
keep it clean by washing it often.
matter. cleaning agents completely. If they
Do not wash the vehicle in direct are allowed to dry on the surface,
Exterior painted surfaces are
sunlight and use a car they could stain.
subject to aging, weather, and
washing soap.
chemical fallout that can take their Dry the finish with a soft, clean
toll over a period of years. To keep Notice: Do not use cleaning chamois or an all-cotton towel to
the paint finish looking new, keep agents that are petroleum based avoid surface scratches and water
the vehicle garaged or covered or that contain acid or abrasives, spotting.
whenever possible. as they can damage the paint,
metal, or plastic
I
nfor
mat
i
on
onPr
ovi
the vehicle.
dedby:

10-92 Vehicle Care
High pressure car washes could Wheels and Trim — Aluminum by the vehicle warranty. Use only
cause water to enter the vehicle. or Chrome approved cleaners on aluminum
Avoid using high pressure washes or chrome-plated wheels.
closer than 30 cm (12 in) to the The vehicle may have either
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. Notice: Never drive a vehicle that
surface of the vehicle. Use of power has aluminum or chrome-plated
washers exceeding 8,274 kPa Keep the wheels clean using a soft, wheels through an automatic car
(1,200 psi) can result in damage or clean cloth with mild soap and wash that uses silicone carbide
removal of paint and decals. water. Rinse with clean water. After tire cleaning brushes, as this
Notice: Conveyor systems on rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft, could cause damage. The repairs
some automatic car washes could clean towel. A wax may then be would not be covered by the
damage the vehicle. There may applied. vehicle warranty.
not be enough clearance for the Notice: Chrome wheels and other Notice: Driving the vehicle
undercarriage. Check with the car chrome trim may be damaged if through an automatic car wash
wash manager before using the the vehicle is not washed after that has silicone carbide tire
automatic car wash. driving on roads that have been cleaning brushes, could damage
sprayed with magnesium, calcium the aluminum or chrome-plated
Weatherstrips or sodium chloride. These wheels. The repairs would not be
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will chlorides are used on roads for covered by the vehicle warranty.
make them last longer, seal better, conditions such as ice and dust. Never drive a vehicle that has
and not stick or squeak. Apply Always wash the chrome with aluminum or chrome-plated
silicone grease with a clean cloth. soap and water after exposure. wheels through an automatic car
During very cold, damp weather Notice: Do not use strong soaps, wash that uses silicone carbide
frequent application may be chemicals, abrasive polishes, tire cleaning brushes.
required. See Recommended Fluids cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
and Lubricants on page 11‑6. that contain acid on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels, because
the surface could be damaged.
The repairs would
I
nfor
mat
i not
onPr dedbe
ovi by: covered

Vehicle Care 10-93
Windshield and Wiper Blades Tires Finish Damage

Clean the outside of the windshield Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to Any stone chips, fractures, or deep
with glass cleaner. clean the tires. scratches in the finish should be
Clean the rubber blades using a Notice: Using petroleum-based repaired right away. Bare metal will
lint‐free cloth or paper towel soaked tire dressing products on the corrode quickly and may develop
with windshield washer fluid or a vehicle may damage the paint into major repair expense.
mild detergent. Wash the windshield finish and/or tires. When applying Minor chips and scratches can be
thoroughly when cleaning the a tire dressing, always wipe off repaired with touch-up materials
blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and any overspray from all painted available from your dealer. Larger
a buildup of vehicle wash/wax surfaces on the vehicle. areas of finish damage can be
treatments may cause wiper corrected in your dealer's body and
streaking. Replace the wiper blades Sheet Metal Damage paint shop.
if they are worn or damaged. If the vehicle is damaged and
requires sheet metal repair or
Underbody Maintenance
Wipers can be damaged by:
replacement, make sure the body Chemicals used for ice and snow
. Extreme dusty conditions repair shop applies anti-corrosion removal and dust control can collect
. Sand and salt material to parts repaired or on the underbody. If these are not
replaced to restore corrosion removed, corrosion and rust can
. Heat and sun protection. develop on the underbody parts
. Snow and ice, without proper Original manufacturer replacement such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
removal parts will provide the corrosion and exhaust system even though
protection while maintaining the they have corrosion protection.
vehicle warranty.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

10-94 Vehicle Care
At least every spring, flush these Interior Care Permanent damage can result from
materials from the underbody with using cleaners on surfaces for
plain water. Clean any areas where The interior will continue to look its which they were not intended. Apply
mud and debris can collect. Dirt best if it is cleaned often. Dust and the cleaner directly to the cleaning
packed in close areas of the frame dirt can accumulate on the cloth to prevent over-spray. Remove
should be loosened before being upholstery and cause damage to any accidental over-spray from
flushed. Your dealer or an the carpet, fabric, leather, and other surfaces immediately.
underbody car washing system can plastic surfaces. Stains should be
removed quickly as extreme heat Notice: Using abrasive cleaners
do this. when cleaning glass surfaces on
could cause them to set rapidly.
Chemical Paint Spotting the vehicle, could scratch the
Lighter colored interiors may glass and/or cause damage to the
Some weather and atmospheric require more frequent cleaning. rear window defogger. When
conditions can create a chemical Newspapers and garments that can cleaning the glass on the vehicle,
fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall transfer color to home furnishings use only a soft cloth and glass
upon and attack painted surfaces on can also transfer color to the cleaner.
the vehicle. This damage can take interior.
two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped Cleaners can contain solvents that
Remove dust from small buttons can become concentrated in the
discolorations, and small, irregular
and knobs with a small brush with interior. Before using cleaners, read
dark spots etched into the paint
soft bristles. and adhere to all safety instructions
surface.
Your dealer has products for on the label. While cleaning the
cleaning the interior. When cleaning interior, maintain adequate
the interior, only use cleaners ventilation by opening the doors and
specifically designed for the windows.
surfaces that are being cleaned.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle Care 10-95
Do not clean the interior using the Fabric/Carpet 3. Start on the outside edge of the
following cleaners or techniques: soil and gently rub toward the
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft
. Never use a knife or any other center. Continue cleaning, using
brush attachment to remove dust
sharp object to remove a soil a clean area of the cloth each
and loose dirt. A canister vacuum
from any interior surface. time it becomes soiled.
with rotating brushes in the nozzle
. Never use a stiff brush. It can may only be used on floor carpet 4. Continue to gently rub the
cause damage. and carpeted floor mats. For soils, soiled area.
always try to remove them first with 5. If the soil is not completely
. Never apply heavy pressure or plain water or club soda. Before
rub aggressively with a cleaning removed, use a mild soap
cleaning, gently remove as much of solution and repeat the cleaning
cloth. Use of heavy pressure can the soil as possible using one of the
damage the interior and does process with plain water.
following techniques:
not improve the effectiveness of If any of the soil remains, a
soil removal.
. For liquids: gently blot the commercial fabric cleaner or spot
remaining soil with a paper lifter may be necessary. Test a small
. Avoid laundry detergents or towel. Allow the soil to absorb
dishwashing soaps with hidden area for colorfastness before
into the paper towel until no using a commercial upholstery
degreasers. Using too much more can be removed.
soap will leave a residue that cleaner or spot lifter. If the locally
leaves streaks and attracts dirt.
. For solid dry soils: remove as cleaned area gives any impression
For liquid cleaners, about much as possible and then that a ring formation may result,
20 drops per 3.78 L (1 gal) of vacuum. clean the entire surface.
water is a good guide. Use only To clean: A paper towel can be used to blot
mild, neutral-pH soaps. excess moisture from the fabric or
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white
. Do not heavily saturate the carpet after the cleaning process.
cloth with water or club soda.
upholstery while cleaning.
2. Remove excess moisture.
. Cleaners that contain solvents
can damage the interior.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

10-96 Vehicle Care
Leather to clean the interior because they Some commercial products may
can alter the appearance by increase gloss on the instrument
Leather, and lighter colored leather
increasing the gloss in a panel. The increase in gloss may
in particular, will need more frequent
non-uniform manner. cause annoying reflections in the
cleaning to prevent the buildup of
windshield and even make it difficult
dust, dirt, and colors transferred Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and to see through the windshield under
from other items so that these do Other Plastic Surfaces certain conditions.
not become permanent stains.
To remove dust, a soft cloth Notice: Air fresheners contain
To remove dust, a soft cloth dampened with water can be used. solvents that may cause damage
dampened with water can be used. If a more thorough cleaning is to plastics and painted surfaces.
If a more thorough cleaning is necessary, a clean soft cloth Follow the manufacturer’s
necessary, a soft cloth dampened dampened with a mild soap solution instructions when using air
with a mild soap solution can be can be used to gently remove dust fresheners in the vehicle. If air
used. Your dealer has a GM and dirt. Never use spot lifters or freshener comes in contact with
approved leather cleaner available removers on plastic surfaces. Many paint or a plastic surface, blot
that provides superior cleaning commercial cleaners and coatings immediately with a soft cloth.
performance when used regularly that are sold to preserve and protect Damage caused by using air
on finished automotive leathers. soft plastic surfaces may fresheners would not be covered
Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do permanently change the by the vehicle warranty.
not use heat, steam, spot lifters or appearance and feel of the interior
spot removers, or shoe polish on and are not recommended. Do not
leather. Many commercial leather use silicone or wax-based products,
cleaners and coatings that are sold or those containing organic solvents
to preserve and protect leather may to clean the interior because they
permanently change the can alter the appearance by
appearance and feel of the leather increasing the gloss in a
and are not recommended. Do not non-uniform manner.
use silicone or wax-based products,
or those containing organic solvents I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle Care 10-97
Care of Safety Belts Floor Mats Use the following guidelines for
proper floor mat usage.
Keep belts clean and dry.
{ WARNING . The original equipment floor
{ WARNING If a floor mat is the wrong size or
mats were designed for your
vehicle. If the floor mats need
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. is not properly installed, it can replacing, it is recommended
It may severely weaken them. In interfere with the accelerator that GM certified floor mats be
a crash, they might not be able to pedal and/or brake pedal. purchased. Non-GM floor mats
provide adequate protection. Interference with the pedals can may not fit properly and may
Clean safety belts only with mild cause unintended acceleration interfere with the accelerator or
soap and lukewarm water. and/or increased stopping brake pedal. Always check that
distance which can cause a crash the floor mats do not interfere
and injury. Make sure the floor with the pedals.
mat does not interfere with the . Use the floor mat with the
accelerator or brake pedal. correct side up. Do not turn
it over.
. Do not place anything on top of
the driver side floor mat.
. Use only a single floor mat on
the driver side.
. Do not place one floor mat on
top of another.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

10-98 Vehicle Care
Removing and Replacing the

Floor Mat
1. Pull up on the rear of the mat to
remove it from the hooks.
2. Reinstall the floor mat by lining
up the openings in the floor mat
over the hooks and push it down
into position.
3. Make sure the floor mat is
properly secured and verify that
it does not interfere with the
The driver side floor mat is held in accelerator or brake pedals.
place by two hooks.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Service and Maintenance 11-1
Service and General Information Because of all the different ways

people use vehicles, maintenance
Maintenance Notice: Maintenance intervals,
checks, inspections,
needs vary. The vehicle might need
more frequent checks and services.
recommended fluids, and Please read the information under
General Information lubricants are necessary to keep Scheduled Maintenance. To keep
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 this vehicle in good working the vehicle in good condition, see
condition. Damage caused by your dealer.
Scheduled Maintenance failure to follow scheduled
The maintenance schedule is for
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . 11-2 maintenance might not be
vehicles that:
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Recommended Fluids, . Carry passengers and cargo
Lubricants, and Parts As the vehicle owner, you are
within recommended limits on
Recommended Fluids and responsible for the scheduled
the Tire and Loading Information
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6 maintenance in this section. We
label. See Vehicle Load Limits
Maintenance Replacement recommend having your dealer
on page 9‑12.
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7 perform these services. Proper
. Are driven on reasonable road
vehicle maintenance helps to keep
Maintenance Records the vehicle in good working surfaces within legal driving
Maintenance Records . . . . . . . . 11-8 condition, improves fuel economy, limits.
and reduces vehicle emissions for . Use the recommended fuel. See
better air quality. Recommended Fuel on
page 9‑35.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

11-2 Service and Maintenance
The proper replacement parts, Scheduled

{ WARNING fluids, and lubricants to use are
Performing maintenance work can
listed in Recommended Fluids and Maintenance
Lubricants on page 11‑6 and
be dangerous. Some jobs can Maintenance Replacement Parts on When the Change Oil Soon
cause serious injury. Perform page 11‑7. We recommend the use Message Displays
maintenance work only if you of genuine parts from your dealer. Change engine oil and filter. See
have the required know-how and Engine Oil on page 10‑9. An
the proper tools and equipment. Rotation of New Tires
Emission Control Service.
If in doubt, see your dealer to To maintain ride, handling, and
have a qualified technician do the performance of the vehicle, it is When the CHANGE OIL SOON
work. See Doing Your Own important that the first rotation message displays, service is
Service Work on page 10‑4. service for new tires be performed. required for the vehicle as soon as
Tires should be rotated every possible, within the next 1 000 km/
12 000 km/7,500 miles. See Tire 600 miles. If driving under the best
At your dealer, you can be certain Rotation on page 10‑57. conditions, the engine oil life system
that you will receive the highest might not indicate the need for
level of service available. Your vehicle service for more than a year.
dealer has specially trained service The engine oil and filter must be
technicians, uses genuine changed at least once a year and
replacement parts, as well as, the oil life system must be reset.
up‐to‐date tools and equipment to
ensure fast and accurate
diagnostics.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Your dealer has trained service

. Engine cooling system . Tire wear inspection. See Tire
technicians who will perform this inspection. Visual inspection of Inspection on page 10‑57.
work and reset the system. If the hoses, pipes, fittings, and . Rotate tires if necessary. See
engine oil life system is reset clamps and replacement, Tire Rotation on page 10‑57.
accidentally, service the vehicle if needed.
within 5 000 km/3,000 miles since
. Fluids visual leak check (or
. Windshield washer fluid level every 12 months, whichever
the last service. Reset the oil life check. See Washer Fluid on
system whenever the oil is changed. occurs first). A leak in any
page 10‑23. system must be repaired and the
See Engine Oil Life System on
page 10‑13.
. Windshield wiper blade fluid level checked.
inspection for wear, cracking, . Engine air cleaner filter
Every Engine Oil Change or contamination and windshield inspection. See Engine Air
and wiper blade cleaning, Cleaner/Filter on page 10‑14.
. Change engine oil and filter.
if contaminated. See Exterior
Reset oil life system. See . Brake system inspection (or
Care on page 10‑90. Worn or
Engine Oil on page 10‑9 and every 12 months, whichever
damaged wiper blade
Engine Oil Life System on occurs first).
replacement. See Wiper Blade
page 10‑13. An Emission
Replacement on page 10‑29. . Steering and suspension
Control Service.
.
. Tire inflation pressures check. inspection. Visual inspection for
Engine coolant level check. See damaged, loose, or missing
See Tire Pressure on
Engine Coolant on page 10‑16. parts or signs of wear.
page 10‑51.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


. Body hinges and latches, key Additional Required Services Once a Year
lock cylinders, folding seat
hardware, and rear compartment Every 12 000 km/7,500 Miles
. See Starter Switch Check on
hinges lubrication. See page 10‑27.
. Rotate tires. Tires should be
Recommended Fluids and rotated every 12 000 km/
. See Automatic Transmission
Lubricants on page 11‑6. More 7,500 miles. See Tire Rotation Shift Lock Control Function
frequent lubrication may be on page 10‑57. Check on page 10‑27.
required when the vehicle is .
At Each Fuel Stop See Ignition Transmission Lock
exposed to a corrosive
Check on page 10‑28.
environment. Applying silicone . Engine oil level check. See
grease on weatherstrips with a Engine Oil on page 10‑9.
. See Park Brake and P (Park)
clean cloth makes them last Mechanism Check on
longer, seal better, and not stick
. Engine coolant level check. See page 10‑28.
or squeak. Engine Coolant on page 10‑16. . Accelerator pedal check for
. Restraint system component
. Windshield washer fluid level damage, high effort, or binding.
check. See Safety System check. See Washer Fluid on Replace if needed.
Check on page 3‑24. page 10‑23. . If the vehicle has a Tire Sealant
. Fuel system inspection for Once a Month and Compressor Kit, check the
damage or leaks. . Tire inflation check. See Tire sealant expiration date printed
Pressure on page 10‑51. on the instruction label of the kit.
. Exhaust system and nearby heat
See Tire Sealant and
shields inspection for loose or . Tire wear inspection. See Tire Compressor Kit on page 10‑67.
damaged components. Inspection on page 10‑57. . Underbody flushing service.
. Sunroof track and seal
inspection, if equipped. See
Sunroof on page 2‑18.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


. Hood/Decklid/Liftgate/Liftglass . Evaporative control system First Engine Oil Change After
Support Gas Strut Service: inspection. Check all fuel and Every 160 000 km/100,000 Miles
Visually inspect gas strut, vapor lines and hoses for proper
if equipped, for signs of wear, hook‐up, routing, and condition.
. Automatic transmission fluid
cracks, or other damage. Check Check that the purge valve, change (normal service). See
the hold open ability of the gas if the vehicle has one, works Automatic Transmission Fluid on
strut. Contact your dealer if properly. Replace as needed. An page 10‑14.
service is required. Emission Control Service. The . Spark plug replacement and
U.S. Environmental Protection spark plug wires inspection. An
First Engine Oil Change After Agency or the California Air Emission Control Service.
Every 80 000 km/50,000 Miles Resources Board has
. Engine air cleaner filter determined that the failure to First Engine Oil Change After
replacement. See Engine Air perform this maintenance item Every 240 000 km/150,000 Miles
Cleaner/Filter on page 10‑14. will not nullify the emission . Engine cooling system drain,
. Automatic transmission fluid warranty or limit recall liability flush, and refill (or every five
change (severe service) for prior to the completion of the years, whichever occurs first).
vehicles mainly driven in heavy vehicle's useful life. We, See Cooling System on
city traffic in hot weather, in hilly however, urge that all page 10‑16. An Emission
or mountainous terrain, when recommended maintenance Control Service.
frequently towing a trailer, services be performed at the . Engine drive belts inspection for
or used for taxi, police, indicated intervals and the
fraying, excessive cracks,
or delivery service. See maintenance be recorded.
or obvious damage (or every
Automatic Transmission Fluid on 10 years, whichever occurs
page 10‑14. first). Replace, if needed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
The engine requires engine oil approved to the dexos specification. Oils
meeting this specification can be identified with the dexos certification
Engine Oil mark. Look for and use only an engine oil that displays the dexos
certification mark of the proper viscosity grade. See Engine Oil on
page 10‑9.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.
Engine Coolant
See Engine Coolant on page 10‑16.
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 88862806, in
Hydraulic Brake System
Canada 88862807).
Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Hydraulic Power Steering System (if
GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. 89021184, in Canada 89021186).
equipped)
Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Key Lock Cylinders
Canada 10953474).
Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 12346293, in Canada 992723)
Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and
or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Release Pawl
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Hood and Door Hinges
Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) or
Weatherstrip Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 992887).
Maintenance Replacement Parts

Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 22676970 A1627C
Engine Oil Filter
2.4L L4 Engine 12605566 PF457G
3.6L V6 Engine 89017524 PF48
Spark Plugs
2.4L L4 Engine 12625058 41-103
3.6L V6 Engine 12622561 41-109
Wiper Blades
Driver Side – 60.0 cm (23.6 in) 25800624 —
Passenger Side – 53.0 cm (21.0 in) 25800623 —
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Maintenance Record (cont.)

Odometer
Reading
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Maintenance Record (cont.)

Odometer
Reading
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Technical Data 12-1
Technical Data Vehicle Identification Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN is
Vehicle Identification the engine code. This code
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) identifies the vehicle's engine,
Vehicle Identification specifications, and replacement
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 parts. See “Engine Specifications”
Service Parts Identification under Capacities and Specifications
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 on page 12‑2 for the vehicle's
engine code.
Vehicle Data
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Service Parts
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-4 Identification Label
This label, on the inside of the glove
box, has the following information:
. Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
. Model designation.
This legal identifier is in the front . Paint information.
corner of the instrument panel, on .
the left side of the vehicle. It can be Production options and special
seen through the windshield from equipment.
outside. The VIN also appears on Do not remove this label from the
the Vehicle Certification and Service vehicle.
Parts labels and certificates of title
and registration.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

12-2 Technical Data
Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
Capacities
Application
Metric English
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a amount, see the refrigerant label located under the
hood. See your dealer for more information.
Engine Cooling System
2.4L L4 Engine 7.1 L 7.5 qt
3.6L V6 Engines 9.4 L 9.9 qt
Engine Oil with Filter
2.4L L4 Engine 4.7 L 5.0 qt
3.6L V6 Engine 5.2 L 5.5 qt
Fuel Tank 61.7 L 16.3 gal
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Technical Data 12-3
Capacities
Application
Metric English
Transmission Fluid*
6 — Speed Automatic Transmission
5.0 L 5.3 qt
(RPO X23F) — (Drain and Refill)
6 — Speed Automatic Transmission
6.0 L 6.3 qt
(RPO 6T70) — (Drain and Refill)
Wheel Nut Torque 140 Y 100 ft lb
*See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 10‑14 for information on checking fluid level.
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap
2.4L L4 Engine U Automatic 1.01 mm (0.040 in)
2.4L L4 Engine 1 Automatic 1.01 mm (0.040 in)
3.6L V6 Engine 7 Automatic 1.10 mm (0.044 in)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

12-4 Technical Data
Engine Drive Belt Routing
3.6L V6 Engine
2.4L L4 Engine
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Customer Information 13-1
Courtesy Transportation
Customer Program (U.S. and
Customer Information
Information Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
Collision Damage Repair Customer Satisfaction
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . 13-12 Procedure (U.S. and
Customer Information Service Publications Canada)
Customer Satisfaction Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-15
Your satisfaction and goodwill are
Procedure (U.S. and Reporting Safety Defects important to your dealer and to
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 Reporting Safety Defects to
Customer Satisfaction Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
the United States with the sales transaction or the
Procedure (Mexico) . . . . . . . . 13-3 Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Customer Assistance Offices operation of the vehicle will be
Reporting Safety Defects to resolved by the dealer's sales or
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-5 the Canadian
Customer Assistance Offices service departments. Sometimes,
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17 however, despite the best intentions
(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Reporting Safety Defects to
Customer Assistance for Text of all concerned, misunderstandings
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17 can occur. If your concern has not
Telephone (TTY) Users (U.S.
and Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Vehicle Data Recording and been resolved to your satisfaction,
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-6 the following steps should be taken:
Privacy
GM Mobility Reimbursement Vehicle Data Recording and STEP ONE: Discuss your concern
Program (U.S. and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17 with a member of dealership
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-18 management. Normally, concerns
Roadside Assistance Program OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19 can be quickly resolved at that level.
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-8 Radio Frequency If the matter has already been
Roadside Assistance Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-19 reviewed with the sales, service,
Program (Mexico) . . . . . . . . . 13-10 Radio Frequency or parts manager, contact the owner
Scheduling Service Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19 of the dealership or the general
Appointments (U.S. and manager.
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10 I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

13-2 Customer Information
STEP TWO: If after contacting a When contacting Chevrolet, 40 days. If you do not agree with the
member of dealership management, remember that your concern will decision given in your case, you
it appears your concern cannot be likely be resolved at a dealer's may reject it and proceed with any
resolved by the dealership without facility. That is why we suggest other venue for relief available
further help, in the U.S., call the following Step One first. to you.
Chevrolet Customer Assistance STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: You may contact the BBB Auto
Center at 1-800-222-1020. In Both General Motors and your Line Program using the toll-free
Canada, call General Motors of dealer are committed to making telephone number or write them at
Canada Customer Communication sure you are completely satisfied the following address:
Centre at 1-800-263-3777 (English), with your new vehicle. However,
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). BBB Auto Line Program
if you continue to remain unsatisfied Council of Better Business
We encourage you to call the after following the procedure Bureaus, Inc.
toll-free number in order to give your outlined in Steps One and Two, you 4200 Wilson Boulevard
inquiry prompt attention. Have the can file with the Better Business Suite 800
following information available to Bureau (BBB) Auto Line® Program Arlington, VA 22203-1838
give the Customer Assistance to enforce your rights.
representative: Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
The BBB Auto Line Program is an www.dr.bbb.org/goauto
. Vehicle Identification out-of-court program administered
Number (VIN). This is available by the Council of Better Business This program is available in all
from the vehicle registration or Bureaus to settle automotive 50 states and the District of
title, or the plate at the top left of disputes regarding vehicle repairs or Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
the instrument panel and visible the interpretation of the New Vehicle vehicle age, mileage, and other
through the windshield. Limited Warranty. Although you may factors. General Motors reserves
be required to resort to this informal the right to change eligibility
. Dealership name and location. limitations and/or discontinue its
dispute resolution program prior to
. Vehicle delivery date and filing a court action, use of the participation in this program.
present mileage. program is free of charge and your
case will generally
I
nfor
mat
i be
onPr heard
ovi
dedby: within

STEP THREE — Canadian For further information concerning Customer Satisfaction

Owners: In the event that you do eligibility in the Canadian Motor
not feel your concerns have been Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
Procedure (Mexico)
addressed after following the call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call
procedure outlined in Steps One the General Motors Customer
and Two, General Motors of Canada Communication Centre,
Limited wants you to be aware of its 1-800-263-3777 (English),
participation in a no-charge 1-800-263-7854 (French),
Mediation/Arbitration Program. or write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited The Mediation/Arbitration Program
has committed to binding arbitration c/o Customer Communication Did you get the Warranty Extension
of owner disputes involving Centre Plan? This plan is recommended by
factory-related vehicle service General Motors of Canada Limited General Motors to supplement the
claims. The program provides for Mail Code: CA1-163-005 warranty included with the new
the review of the facts involved by 1908 Colonel Sam Drive vehicle purchase.
an impartial third party arbiter, and Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
may include an informal hearing See your dealer for details.
before the arbiter. The program is Your inquiry should be accompanied
designed so that the entire dispute by the Vehicle Identification
settlement process, from the time Number (VIN).
you file your complaint to the final
decision, should be completed in
about 70 days. We believe our
impartial program offers advantages
over courts in most jurisdictions
because it is informal, quick, and
free of charge.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Customer Assistance If you have a problem that has not STEP THREE
Procedure been satisfactorily handled through If your case is not resolved in a
the normal means, we suggest the reasonable amount of time by your
Owner satisfaction and goodwill are following steps:
very important to your dealer and dealer, please call the General
General Motors. STEP ONE Motors Customer Assistance
Center (CAC) and provide the
Normally, any problem with the Explain your case to the dealer following information:
transaction, sale, or usage of the service agent, service manager,
vehicle must be handled by your dealer sales agent, or sales . Name
dealer sales or service departments. manager, depending on your case. . Address
However, we recognize that despite Make sure that they have all
the good intentions of all parties
. Phone number
necessary information. They are
involved, sometimes a interested in your continual
. Model year
misunderstanding may occur. satisfaction. . Brand
STEP TWO . Vehicle Identification
If you are not satisfied, please Number (VIN)
contact the general manager or the . Mileage
dealership owner to ask for their . Delivery date
help. If they are not able to resolve
your case, ask them to contact the . Description of the problem
right people at General Motors for . Dealership name
support, if needed.
. Dealership address
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

See Customer Assistance Offices From Puerto Rico: Mexico, Central America, and
(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑5 or 1-800-496-9992 (English) Caribbean Islands/Countries
Customer Assistance Offices 1-800-496-9993 (Spanish) (Except Puerto Rico and U.S.
(Mexico) on page 13‑5 for more Virgin Islands)
information. From U.S. Virgin Islands:
General Motors de Mexico, S. de
1-800-496-9994
Customer Assistance R.L. de C.V.
Canada Customer Assistance Center
Offices (U.S. and Canada) Av. Ejercito Nacional #843
General Motors of Canada Limited Col. Granada
Chevrolet encourages customers to Customer Communication Centre,
call the toll-free number for C.P. 11520, Mexico, D.F.
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
assistance. However, if a customer 1908 Colonel Sam Drive 01-800-466-0800
wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet, Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0800
the letter should be addressed to: www.gm.ca
United States 1-800-263-3777 (English) Customer Assistance
Chevrolet Motor Division 1-800-263-7854 (French) Offices (Mexico)
Chevrolet Customer Assistance 1-800-263-3830 (For Text To contact the Customer Assistance
Center Telephone devices (TTYs)) Center (CAC), use the phone
P.O. Box 33170 Roadside Assistance: numbers listed in this section.
Detroit, MI 48232-5170 1-800-268-6800 Customer assistance is available
www.Chevrolet.com Overseas Monday through Friday, 08:00 to
1-800-222-1020 20:00 hours, and Saturdays from
Please contact the local General 08:00 to 15:00 hours.
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Motors Business Unit.
Telephone Devices (TTYs)) All e-mail inquiries to the Customer
Roadside Assistance: Assistance Center (CAC) should be
1-800-243-8872 sent to: cac.chevrolet@gm.com.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Mexico Customer Assistance for Online Owner Center

From Mexico City Text Telephone (TTY) Chevrolet Owner Center (U.S.)
5329-0811 Users (U.S. and Canada) www.chevyownercenter.com
From Other Mexico Locations To assist customers who are deaf, Information and
hard of hearing, or speech-impaired services customized for your
01-800-466-0811 and who use Text Telephones specific vehicle — all in one
United States and Canada (TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY convenient place.
equipment available at its Customer
1-866-466-8190 Assistance Center. Any TTY
. Digital owner manual, warranty
user in the U.S. can communicate information, and more.
Costa Rica
with Chevrolet by dialing: . Storage for online service and
00-800-052-1005 1-800-833-2438. TTY users in maintenance records.
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830. . Chevrolet dealer locator for
Guatemala
service nationwide.
1-800-999-5252
. Exclusive privileges and offers.
Panama . Recall notices for your specific
00-800-052-0001 vehicle.
Dominican Republic . OnStar and GM Cardmember
Services Earnings summaries.
1-888-751-5301
El Salvador
800-6273
Honduras
800-0122-6101 I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Other Helpful Links Here are a few of the valuable tools GM Mobility
and services you will have
Chevrolet — www.chevrolet.com
access to:
Reimbursement Program
Chevrolet Merchandise — . My Showroom: Find and save
(U.S. and Canada)
www.chevymall.com
information on vehicles and
Help Center — www.chevrolet.com/ current offers in your area.
pages/mds/helpcenter/faq.do . My Dealers: Save details such
. FAQ as address and phone number
. Contact Us for each of your preferred GM
dealers.
My GM Canada www.gm.ca . My Driveway: Access quick links This program is available to
My GM Canada is a to parts and service estimates, qualified applicants for cost
password-protected section of check trade-in values, reimbursement of eligible
www.gm.ca where you can save or schedule a service aftermarket adaptive equipment
information on GM vehicles, get appointment by adding the required for the vehicle, such as
personalized offers, and use handy vehicles you own to your hand controls or a wheelchair/
tools and forms with greater ease. driveway profile. scooter lift for the vehicle.
. My Preferences: Manage your For more information on the limited
profile and use tools and forms offer, visit www.gmmobility.com or
with greater ease. call the GM Mobility Assistance
To sign up, visit the My GM.ca Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text
section within www.gm.ca. Telephone (TTY) users, call
1-800-833-9935.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

General Motors of Canada also Calling for Assistance Coverage

has a Mobility Program. Call
When calling Roadside Assistance, Services are provided up to 5 years/
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for
have the following information 160 000 km (100,000 mi), whichever
details. TTY users call
ready: comes first.
1-800-263-3830.
. Your name, home address, and In the U.S., anyone driving the
Roadside Assistance home telephone number. vehicle is covered. In Canada, a
person driving the vehicle without
Program (U.S. and . Telephone number of your
permission from the owner is not
Canada) location.
covered.
. Location of the vehicle.
For U.S.‐purchased vehicles, call Roadside Assistance is not a part of
1‐800‐243‐8872; (Text Telephone . Model, year, color, and license the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
(TTY): 1‐888‐889‐2438). plate number of the vehicle. Chevrolet and General Motors of
For Canadian‐purchased vehicles, . Odometer reading, Vehicle Canada Limited reserve the right to
call 1-800-268-6800. Identification Number (VIN), and make any changes or discontinue
delivery date of the vehicle. the Roadside Assistance program at
Service is available 24 hours a day, any time without notification.
365 days a year. . Description of the problem.
Chevrolet and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to
limit services or payment to an
owner or driver if they decide the
claims are made too often, or the
same type of claim is made many
times.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Services Provided
. Flat Tire Change: Service to Services Specific to Canadian
change a flat tire with the spare Purchased Vehicles
. Emergency Fuel Delivery: tire. The spare tire, if equipped,
Delivery of enough fuel for the must be in good condition and . Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement
vehicle to get to the nearest properly inflated. It is the owner's is approximately $5 Canadian.
service station. responsibility for the repair or Diesel fuel delivery may be
. Lock‐Out Service: Service to replacement of the tire if it is not restricted. Propane and other
unlock the vehicle if you are covered by the warranty. fuels are not provided through
locked out. A remote unlock may this service.
. Battery Jump Start: Service to
be available if you have OnStar. jump start a dead battery. . Lock-Out Service: Vehicle
For security reasons, the driver registration is required.
must present identification Services Not Included in . Trip Routing Service: Detailed
before this service is given. Roadside Assistance
maps of North America are
. Emergency Tow From a Public . Impound towing caused by provided when requested either
Road or Highway: Tow to the violation of any laws. with the most direct route or the
nearest Chevrolet dealer for . Legal fines. most scenic route. There is a
warranty service, or if the vehicle limit of six requests per year.
was in a crash and cannot be . Mounting, dismounting, Additional travel information is
driven. Assistance is also given or changing of snow tires, also available. Allow three
when the vehicle is stuck in the chains, or other traction devices. weeks for delivery.
sand, mud, or snow. . Towing or services for vehicles
driven on a non-public road or
highway.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


. Trip Interruption Benefits and
Assistance: Must be
Roadside Assistance Scheduling Service
over 250 kilometers from Program (Mexico) Appointments (U.S. and
where your trip was started to Roadside Assistance is available Canada)
qualify. General Motors of 24 hours a day, 365 days of
Canada Limited requires When the vehicle requires warranty
the year. service, contact the dealer and
pre-authorization, original
detailed receipts, and a copy For detailed information about request an appointment. By
of the repair orders. Once Roadside Assistance, please see scheduling a service appointment
authorization has been received, the brochure provided with your new and advising the service consultant
the Roadside Assistance advisor vehicle or visit our website at: of your transportation needs, the
will help to make arrangements www.chevrolet.com.mx. Navigate dealer can help minimize your
and explain how to receive the site and click on “Asistencia en inconvenience.
payment. el Camino.” E-mail correspondence If the vehicle cannot be scheduled
should be sent to: into the service department
. Alternative Service: If asistencia.chevrolet@gm.com.
assistance cannot be provided immediately, keep driving it until it
right away, the Roadside To contact Roadside Assistance by can be scheduled for service,
Assistance advisor may give phone, use the following numbers: unless, of course, the problem is
permission to get local safety related. If it is, please call the
Mexico dealership, let them know this, and
emergency road service. You will
receive payment, up to $100, 01-800-466-0800 ask for instructions.
after sending the original receipt United States If the dealer requests you to bring
to Roadside Assistance. the vehicle for service, you are
Mechanical failures may be 1-866-466-8901 urged to do so as early in the work
covered, however any cost for Canada day as possible to allow for the
parts and labor for repairs not same day-repair.
covered by the warranty are the 1-800-268-6800
owner responsibility.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Courtesy Transportation Transportation Options Public Transportation or Fuel

Reimbursement
Program (U.S. and Warranty service can generally be
Canada) completed while you wait. However, If the vehicle requires overnight
if you are unable to wait, GM helps warranty repairs, and public
To enhance your ownership to minimize inconvenience by transportation is used instead of the
experience, we and our participating providing several transportation dealer's shuttle service, the expense
dealers are proud to offer Courtesy options. Depending on the must be supported by original
Transportation, a customer support circumstances, the dealer can receipts and can only be up to the
program for vehicles with the offer one of the following: maximum amount allowed by GM
Bumper-to-Bumper (Base Warranty for shuttle service. In addition, for
Coverage period in Canada), Shuttle Service U.S. customers, should you arrange
extended powertrain, and/or Shuttle service is the preferred transportation through a friend or
hybrid‐specific warranties in both means of offering Courtesy relative, limited reimbursement for
the U.S. and Canada. Transportation. Dealers may provide reasonable fuel expenses may be
Several Courtesy Transportation shuttle service to get you to your available. Claim amounts should
options are available to assist in destination with minimal interruption reflect actual costs and be
reducing inconvenience when of your daily schedule. This includes supported by original receipts. See
warranty repairs are required. one‐way or round‐trip shuttle service the dealer for information regarding
within reasonable time and distance the allowance amounts for
Courtesy Transportation is not a parameters of the dealer's area. reimbursement of fuel or other
part of the New Vehicle Limited transportation costs.
Warranty. A separate booklet
entitled “Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information” furnished
with each new vehicle provides
detailed warranty coverage
information.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Courtesy Rental Vehicle Additional Program Collision Damage Repair

The dealer may arrange to provide Information (U.S. and Canada)
you with a courtesy rental vehicle or All program options, such as shuttle
reimburse you for a rental vehicle If the vehicle is involved in a
service, may not be available at collision and it is damaged, have the
that you obtain if the vehicle is kept every dealer. Please contact the
for an overnight warranty repair. damage repaired by a qualified
dealer for specific information technician using the proper
Rental reimbursement will be limited about availability. All Courtesy
and must be supported by original equipment and quality replacement
Transportation arrangements will be parts. Poorly performed collision
receipts. This requires that you sign administered by appropriate dealer
and complete a rental agreement repairs diminish the vehicle resale
personnel. value, and safety performance can
and meet state/provincial, local, and
rental vehicle provider requirements. General Motors reserves the be compromised in subsequent
Requirements vary and may include right to unilaterally modify, change, collisions.
minimum age requirements, or discontinue Courtesy
Transportation at any time and to Collision Parts
insurance coverage, credit card,
etc. You are responsible for fuel resolve all questions of claim Genuine GM Collision parts are new
usage charges and may also be eligibility pursuant to the terms and parts made with the same materials
responsible for taxes, levies, usage conditions described herein at its and construction methods as the
fees, excessive mileage, or rental sole discretion. parts with which the vehicle was
usage beyond the completion of the originally built. Genuine GM
repair. Collision parts are the best choice to
ensure that the vehicle's designed
It may not be possible to provide a appearance, durability, and safety
like vehicle as a courtesy rental. are preserved. The use of Genuine
GM parts can help maintain the GM
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Recycled original equipment parts Limited Warranty, and any vehicle Many insurance policies provide
may also be used for repair. These failure related to such parts is not reduced protection to the GM
parts are typically removed from covered by that warranty. vehicle by limiting compensation for
vehicles that were total losses in damage repairs by using
prior crashes. In most cases, the Repair Facility aftermarket collision parts. Some
parts being recycled are from GM also recommends that you insurance companies will not
undamaged sections of the vehicle. choose a collision repair facility that specify aftermarket collision parts.
A recycled original equipment GM meets your needs before you ever When purchasing insurance, we
part may be an acceptable choice to need collision repairs. The dealer recommend that you ensure that the
maintain the vehicle's originally may have a collision repair center vehicle will be repaired with GM
designed appearance and safety with GM-trained technicians and original equipment collision parts.
performance; however, the history of state‐of‐the‐art equipment, or be If such insurance coverage is not
these parts is not known. Such parts able to recommend a collision repair available from your current
are not covered by the GM New center that has GM-trained insurance carrier, consider switching
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any technicians and comparable to another insurance carrier.
related failures are not covered by equipment. If the vehicle is leased, the leasing
that warranty. company may require you to have
Insuring The Vehicle
Aftermarket collision parts are also insurance that ensures repairs with
available. These are made by Protect your investment in the GM Genuine GM Original Equipment
companies other than GM and may vehicle with comprehensive and Manufacturer (OEM) parts or
not have been tested for the vehicle. collision insurance coverage. There Genuine Manufacturer replacement
As a result, these parts may fit are significant differences in the parts. Read the lease carefully, as
poorly, exhibit premature durability/ quality of coverage afforded by you may be charged at the end of
corrosion problems, and may not various insurance policy terms. the lease for poor quality repairs.
perform properly in subsequent
collisions. Aftermarket parts are not
covered by the GM New Vehicle
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

If a Crash Occurs Gather the following information: Choose a reputable repair facility
. Driver name, address, and that uses quality replacement parts.
If there has been an injury, call
telephone number. See “Collision Parts” earlier in this
emergency services for help. Do not
section.
leave the scene of a crash until all . Driver license number.
matters have been taken care of. If the airbag has inflated, see What
. Owner name, address, and
Move the vehicle only if its position Will You See After an Airbag
puts you in danger, or you are telephone number. Inflates? on page 3‑31.
instructed to move it by a police . Vehicle license plate number.
officer.
Managing the Vehicle Damage
. Vehicle make, model, and Repair Process
Give only the necessary information model year.
to police and other parties involved In the event that the vehicle requires
in the crash.
. Vehicle Identification damage repairs, GM recommends
Number (VIN). that you take an active role in its
For emergency towing see repair. If you have a pre-determined
Roadside Assistance Program (U.S.
. Insurance company and policy
number. repair facility of choice, take the
and Canada) on page 13‑8 or vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Roadside Assistance Program . General description of the Specify to the facility that any
(Mexico) on page 13‑10. damage to the other vehicle. required replacement collision parts
be original equipment parts, either
new Genuine GM parts or recycled
original GM parts. Remember,
recycled parts will not be covered by
the GM vehicle warranty.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Insurance pays the bill for the repair, Service Publications Owner Information
but you must live with the repair.
Depending on your policy limits,
Ordering Information Owner publications are written
specifically for owners and intended
your insurance company may Service Manuals to provide basic operational
initially value the repair using
Service Manuals have the diagnosis information about the vehicle. The
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with
and repair information on the Owner Manual includes the
the repair professional, and insist on
engines, transmission, axle, Maintenance Schedule for all
Genuine GM parts. Remember,
suspension, brakes, electrical, models.
if the vehicle is leased, you may be
obligated to have the vehicle steering, body, etc. In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,
repaired with Genuine GM parts, Service Bulletins Owner Manual, and Warranty
even if your insurance coverage Booklet.
does not pay the full cost. Service Bulletins give additional
technical service information RETAIL SELL PRICE:
If another party's insurance needed to knowledgeably service $35.00 (U.S.) plus handling and
company is paying for the repairs, General Motors cars and trucks. shipping fees.
you are not obligated to accept a Each bulletin contains instructions Without Portfolio: Owner
repair valuation based on that to assist in the diagnosis and Manual only.
insurance company's collision policy service of the vehicle.
repair limits, as you have no RETAIL SELL PRICE:
contractual limits with that company. $25.00 (U.S.) plus handling and
In such cases, you can have control shipping fees.
of the repair and parts choices as
long as the cost stays within
reasonable limits.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Current and Past Models Reporting Safety However, NHTSA cannot

Technical Service Bulletins and become involved in individual
Manuals are available for current
Defects problems between you, your
and past model GM vehicles. dealer, or General Motors.
Reporting Safety Defects
ORDER TOLL FREE: To contact NHTSA, you may call
1-800-551-4123 Monday - Friday
to the United States the Vehicle Safety Hotline
8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time Government toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
For Credit Card Orders Only If you believe that your vehicle (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit has a defect which could cause http://www.safercar.gov; or
Helm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com. a crash or could cause injury or write to:
Or write to: death, you should immediately Administrator, NHTSA
inform the National Highway 1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130 Traffic Safety Administration Washington, D.C. 20590
Detroit, MI 48207 (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
You can also obtain other
General Motors.
Prices are subject to change without information about motor
notice and without incurring If NHTSA receives similar vehicle safety from
obligation. Allow ample time for complaints, it may open an http://www.safercar.gov.
delivery. investigation, and if it finds that
All listed prices are quoted in U.S. a safety defect exists in a group
funds. Make checks payable in U.S. of vehicles, it may order a recall
funds. and remedy campaign.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects Vehicle Data

to the Canadian to General Motors Recording and
Government In addition to notifying NHTSA Privacy
If you live in Canada, and you (or Transport Canada) in a situation
believe that the vehicle has a safety like this, notify General Motors. This GM vehicle has a number of
defect, notify Transport Canada sophisticated computers that record
Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:
immediately, and notify General information about the vehicle’s
Chevrolet Motor Division performance and how it is driven.
Motors of Canada Limited. Call
Chevrolet Customer Assistance For example, the vehicle uses
them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Center computer modules to monitor and
Transport Canada P.O. Box 33170 control engine and transmission
Road Safety Branch Detroit, MI 48232-5170 performance, to monitor the
2780 Sheffield Road conditions for airbag deployment
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9 and deploy airbags in a crash, and,
(English) or 1-800-263-7854
(French), or write: if so equipped, to provide antilock
braking to help the driver control the
General Motors of Canada Limited vehicle. These modules may store
Customer Communication Centre, data to help the dealer technician
Mail Code: CA1-163-005 service the vehicle. Some modules
1908 Colonel Sam Drive may also store data about how you
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 operate the vehicle, such as rate of
fuel consumption or average speed.
These modules may also retain the
owner’s personal preferences, such
as radio pre-sets, seat positions,
and temperature settings.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Event Data Recorders This data can help provide a better GM will not access this data or
understanding of the circumstances share it with others except: with the
This vehicle has an Event Data in which crashes and injuries occur. consent of the vehicle owner or,
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose if the vehicle is leased, with the
of an EDR is to record, in certain Important: EDR data is recorded
by the vehicle only if a non-trivial consent of the lessee; in response
crash or near crash-like situations, to an official request by police or
such as an airbag deployment or crash situation occurs; no data is
recorded by the EDR under normal similar government office; as part of
hitting a road obstacle, data that will GM's defense of litigation through
assist in understanding how a driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age, the discovery process; or, as
vehicle's systems performed. The required by law. Data that GM
EDR is designed to record data and crash location) is recorded.
However, other parties, such as collects or receives may also be
related to vehicle dynamics and used for GM research needs or may
safety systems for a short period of law enforcement, could combine
the EDR data with the type of be made available to others for
time, typically 30 seconds or less. research purposes, where a need is
The EDR in this vehicle is designed personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash shown and the data is not tied to a
to record such data as: specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
investigation.
. How various systems in the
vehicle were operating. To read data recorded by an EDR,
special equipment is required, and
. Whether or not the driver and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
passenger safety belts were needed. In addition to the vehicle
buckled/fastened. manufacturer, other parties, such as
. How far, if at all, the driver was law enforcement, that have the
pressing the accelerator and/or special equipment, can read the
brake pedal. information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
. How fast the vehicle was
traveling.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

OnStar® Radio Frequency Radio Frequency

If the vehicle is equipped with an Identification (RFID) Statement
active OnStar system, that system RFID technology is used in some This vehicle has systems that
may also record data in crash or vehicles for functions such as tire operate on a radio frequency that
near crash‐like situations. The pressure monitoring and ignition comply with Part 15 of the Federal
OnStar Terms and Conditions system security, as well as in Communications Commission (FCC)
provides information on data connection with conveniences such rules and with Industry Canada
collection and use and is available as key fobs for remote door locking/ Standards RSS‐210/220/310.
in the OnStar glove box kit, at unlocking and starting, and
www.onstar.com (U.S.) or Operation is subject to the following
in-vehicle transmitters for garage two conditions:
www.onstar.ca (Canada), or by door openers. RFID technology in
pressing the Q button and GM vehicles does not use or record 1. The device may not cause
speaking to an advisor. personal information or link with any interference.
other GM system containing 2. The device must accept any
personal information. interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation of the
device.
Changes or modifications to any of
these systems by other than an
authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

2 NOTES
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

INDEX i-1
A Airbags Audio System

Adding Equipment to the Backglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . .7-15
Accessories and
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37 Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-13 Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Automatic
Add-On Electrical
Servicing Airbag-Equipped Climate Control System . . . . . . . . 8-5
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Adjustments
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25 Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Lumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Alarm System Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 9-24
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-14
Anti-Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Antenna Shift Lock Control
Airbag System
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15 Function Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38
Anti-Theft Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
How Does an Airbag
Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30
Passenger Sensing
Antilock Brake B
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84
What Makes an Airbag
Appearance Care Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90 Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
What Will You See After
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-94 Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-29
an Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . .3-31
Assistance Program, Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
When Should an Airbag
Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8, 13-10 Brake System Warning Light . . . 5-18
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-27
CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

i-2 INDEX
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24 C Check

Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27 Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28 Ignition
California
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25 Transmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-28
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-36
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28 Child Restraints
Perchlorate Materials
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26 Infants and Young
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-16 Lower Anchors and
Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iii
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34 Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-48
Capacities and
Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33 Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55, 3-57
Carbon Monoxide
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Cleaning
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-34 Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-94
Cautions, Danger, and
Taillamps, Turn Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Signal and Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Stoplamps . . . . . . . . . 10-30, 10-32 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-3
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59 Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Charging
Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

INDEX i-3
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-12 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Door

Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-83 Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-5 Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Text Telephone (TTY) Ajar Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Compressor Kit, Tire Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-6 Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67 Customer Information Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Service Publications Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-15 Driver Information
Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Customer Satisfaction Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Coolant Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1, 13-3 Driving
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Characteristics and
Engine Temperature D Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-12 Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Engine Temperature Danger, Warnings, and Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20 Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-18 Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-8
Courtesy Transportation Daytime Running If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11 Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32 Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Delayed Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26 Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Devices, Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20 Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Driving for Better Fuel
Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

i-4 INDEX
E Engine (cont.) Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-18

Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6 Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
E85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Electrical Equipment,
Coolant Temperature Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 6-2
Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Electrical System
Engine Compartment
Coolant Temperature F
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20 Filter,
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Instrument Panel Fuse
Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22 Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-4
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19 Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Overheated Protection Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
Rear Compartment Fuse
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21 Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-97
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20 Fluid
Electronic Stability Control . . . . . 9-31
Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26 Automatic Transmission . . . . 10-14
Electronic Stability Control
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
(ESC)/Traction Control
Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-23 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
System (TCS) Indicator
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18 Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Engine Oil Fog Lamps
Engine
Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26 Front Seats
Check and Service Engine
Entry/Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

INDEX i-5
Front Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 G H

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Gasoline Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-4
E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . . . . . . .9-37
Gauges Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Filling a Portable Fuel
Engine Coolant Headlamps
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-39
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .9-36
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-36
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Daytime Running
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Delayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Requirements, California . . . . .9-36
Warning Lights and Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Fuel Economy
General Information High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21
Service and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1 Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-41 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Engine Compartment
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Heater
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19
Instrument Panel Fuse
GM Mobility Reimbursement Heating and Air
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1, 8-5
Rear Compartment Fuse
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

i-6 INDEX
High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . 10-52 J Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 LATCH System
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-8 Replacing Parts After a
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-55
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 K LATCH, Lower Anchors and
How to Wear Safety Belts Key and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-27 Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Keyless Entry Light
Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3 Electronic Stability Control
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
I (ESC)/Traction Conrol
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16 System (TCS) Indicator
Ignition Transmission Lock L Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-44 Lighting
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 Entry/Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Infants and Young Children, Lamps Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41 Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-2 Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Lights
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Instrument Panel Exterior Lamps Off Antilock Brake System
Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 (ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34 Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-18
Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-15 Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

INDEX i-7
Lights (cont.) M Mirrors

Engine Coolant Automatic Dimming
Maintenance
Temperature Warning . . . . . . .5-20 Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Maintenance Schedule
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Recommended Fluids and
High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-12 Monitor System, Tire
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-15
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Messages
Locks
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29 N
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26 O
Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27 Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27 Off-Road
Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-27 Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Lower Anchors and Tethers
Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29 Oil
for Children (LATCH
Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

i-8 INDEX
Oil (cont.) Parking Pregnancy, Using Safety

Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-13 Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28 Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26 Brake and P (Park) Privacy
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-28 Radio Frequency
Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-39 Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-22 Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-19
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Passenger Airbag Status Program
OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Courtesy Transportation . . . . .13-11
Operation, Infotainment Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-32 Proposition 65 Warning,
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Perchlorate Materials California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Outlets Requirements, California . . . . . 10-3
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Personalization R
Overheated Engine Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30 Radio Frequency
Protection Phone Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-19
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21 Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-25 Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-20 Power Radios
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
P Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14 Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14
Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10
Park Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20 Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-20 Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21 Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

INDEX i-9
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Replacing Safety Belt S

Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-14 System Parts After a
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
Recommended Fluids and Reporting Safety Defects
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6 Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-17
How to Wear Safety Belts
Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35 General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
Records U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 Restraints
Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Recreational Vehicle Where to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-45
Replacing After a Crash . . . . . .3-24
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88 Retained Accessory
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-23
Reimbursement Program, Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Safety Defects Reporting
GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-17
Remote Keyless Entry Electronic Stability (ESC) . . . . .9-31
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
(RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2, 2-3 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Roads
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34 Driving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Replacement Parts Roadside Assistance
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8, 13-10
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . 11-2
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7 Roof
Scheduling Appointments . . . . . 13-10
Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-38 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Sealant Kit, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67
Replacing LATCH System Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55 Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-4
Running the Vehicle While
Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

i-10 INDEX
Seats Service (cont.) Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-27

Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1 Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Publications Ordering Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15 Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-4 Scheduling Appointments . . . 13-10 Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-4 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29 Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36 Storage Areas
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Shift Lock Control Function Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Securing Child Check, Automatic Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55, 3-57 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Security Shifting Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20 Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21 Storing the Tire Sealant
Service Signals, Turn and and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . 10-74
Accessories and Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3 Spare Tire Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-4 Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15 Specifications and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Maintenance Records . . . . . . . . 11-8 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 System
Maintenance, General Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

INDEX i-11
T Tires (cont.) Towing

Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52 Driving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-42
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-47
Taillamps
Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-53 General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-41
Turn Signal, and
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57 Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-88
Stoplamps . . . . . . . . . 10-30, 10-32
Sealant and Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-45
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-6
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-12
Sealant and Compressor Traction
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Kit, Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74 Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . .9-29
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45
Tires
Terminology and Transmission
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
Uniform Tire Quality Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62 Transportation Program,
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83
Wheel Alignment and Tire Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-64 Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
When It Is Time for New Turn and Lane-Change
Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-54
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59 Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Low Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

i-12 INDEX
U Vehicle Care Wheels

Storing the Tire Sealant Alignment and Tire
Uniform Tire Quality
and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . 10-74 Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51 Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Vehicle Identification Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64
Service Parts Identification When It Is Time for New
V Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Vehicle Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-45
Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Identification
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
W Windshield
Warning Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12 Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Brake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25 Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-29
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-30
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Cautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . . . 5-30
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

2011 Malibu

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2011 Malibu

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (1,1)

2011 Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2011 Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual M

Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

This manual describes features that Canadian Vehicle Owners

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Using this Manual Symbols

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Vehicle Symbol Chart # : Fog Lamps

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

In Brief Sensing System for Passenger

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

H. Driver Compartment Storage. O. Ignition Positions on page 9‑16.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Initial Drive Press L and hold for more than

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

vehicle and press and hold / For more information, see:

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Seat Adjustment Height Adjustment Seatback Adjustment

If available, press and hold the top To recline the seatback:

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

To adjust a power seat, if available:

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A. Increase Lumbar Support

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Mirror Adjustment 2. Press one of the four arrows

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Steering Wheel 3. Pull or push the steering wheel Reading Lamps

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A. Fan Control E. Air Delivery Mode Control

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Automatic Climate Control System (If Equipped)

A. Fan Control F. Air Delivery Mode Control

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Transmission Vehicle Features

Radio with CD (MP3) and USB Port shown

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

© ¨ : Seek or scan stations. Storing a Favorite Station Setting the Clock

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Satellite Radio Portable Audio Devices Bluetooth®

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

If equipped, some audio controls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Driver Information r: Press to reset some vehicle Power Outlets

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Performance and Electronic Stability Tire Pressure Monitor

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

OnStar® ]: Push this red emergency For a full description of OnStar

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors and Exterior Mirrors

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2-2 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys and Locks If you are locked out of your vehicle,